IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


// 


// 


& 


< 

f^ 


t/j 


1.0 


I.I 


1.25 


M    11112,5 


1.4 


6" 


iilM 

2.0 

1.6 


v: 


^ 


/}. 


^ 


'3 


^  > 

^v 


^ 


/ 


/A 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WEGT  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  872-4S03 


V 


Si.. 


4^ 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  mfrroreproductions  historiques 


lyij  I 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliogtaphically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exitmplaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  m^thode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqu6s  ci-dessous. 


□    Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  coule   > 

□    Covers  damaged/ 
Couverture  endommagee 

□    Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaurde  et/ou  pellicul6e 


□    Cover  title  missing/ 
Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 


I      I    Coloured  maps/ 


Cartes  g^ographiques  en  couleur 


□    Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 

□    Coloured  plates  and/o    illustrations/ 
Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 


□    Bou 
Reli 


Bound  with  other  material/ 


I      I    Coloured  pages/ 


n 


Pages  de  couleur 


Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagdes 


I      I    Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 


e  avec  d'autres  documents 


Pages  restaur^es  et/ou  pellicul^es 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxei 
Pages  d^colordes,  tachetdes  ou  piqu^es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d^tach^es 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  prir 

Quality  in^gale  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  materic 
Comprend  du  materiel  supplementaire 


r~^  Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 

I      I  Pages  detached/ 

I    y\  Showthrough/ 

I      I  Quality  of  print  varies/ 

]      I  Includes  supplementary  material/ 


□ 


D 


□ 


Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  reliure  serree  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  intdrieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajout^es 
lors  J'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  torsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6t6  filmdes. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  suppl6mentaires; 


D 

D 


Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  refilmed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuilli9t  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  M  filmdes  d  nouveau  de  facon  i 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  filmd  au  taux  de  reduction  indiqud  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


26X 


SOX 


/ 


12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


■■  ^NiPW^^'v 


32X 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

National  Library  of  Canada 


L'exemplaire  filmd  fut  reproduit  grdce  d  la 
g6n6rosit6  de: 

Bibliothdque  nationale  du  Canada 


The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  ir  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustt   >     '  impression. 


The  last  recorded  fr^me  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — •-  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


Les  images  suivantes  ont  6X6  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettet6  de  l'exemplaire  filmd,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimde  sont  film6s  en  commenpant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  selon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  filmds  en  commenpant  par  la 
premiere  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cha(;ue  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  le  symbole  —^'  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  le 
symbole  V  signifie  "FIM". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  dtre 
filmds  6  des  taux  de  reduction  diff^rents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  §tre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clich§,  il  est  filmd  d  partir 
de  Tangle  sup6rieur  gauche,  de  gauche  6  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  bas,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  ndcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mdthode. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

^1  Mil      inji  ii|i  iiniiMiaiBi 


FIRST     BOOK 


ON 


ANATOMY, 
PHYSIOLOGY,  AND  HYGIENE. 


FOR 


GRAMMAR   SCHOOLS   AND   FAMILIES 


WITH  EIGHTY-THREE  ENGRAVINGS. 


By  CALVIN  CUTTER,  M.D. 

AUTHOR  OF  "ANATOMT,  PUTSIOLOOT,  AND    UYQIENK,   FOR    C0LLE0E8,  A0AI)KMIK8,  AN© 

PAMIUE8;"     "SECOND  BOOK  ON  ANATuMf,   PlirSIOLOOY,  AND   UfUIENB, 

FOR  ACADEMIES,  BOHOOLS,  AND  FAMIUE8;"     "  ANATOJllOAl, 

OHTUXB  PLATES  FOB  OCliOOIS,  KTa 


BEV18BD   STEREOTYPE   EDITION. 


PHILADELPHIA: 

J.  B.   LIPPINCOTT    &    CO. 

TORONTO: 

ADAM    MILLER, 

11  Wellington  Street,  West. 

1871. 


Bntcrod  according  to  Act  of  CongreM,  in  the  year  1864.  by 

CALVIN    CUTTER,  M.D.. 

Iq  the  CloTR'i  OflBce  of  the  District  Court  of  the  DlBtrtct  of  taaiwachnHOtto. 


PREFACE 


Iw  presenting  this  work  to  the  public,  th«  author 
would  indulge  in  a  few  prefatory  suggestion*. 

Education,  to  be  complete,  mii?t  be  not  only  moral 
and  intellectual,  but  physical.  As  the  culture  of  the 
mind  and  of  the  affections  is  the  subject  of  systematic 
attention  in  early  life,  should  not  the  education  of  the 
physical  powers  be  commenced  as  early  ?  It  will 
demand  no  more  maturity  and  thought  to  understand 
the  reasons  for  adequate  clothing,  bathing,  *he  neces- 
sity of  an  erect  position  in  standing  and  suting,  regu- 
larity in  taking  food,  the  supply  of  pure  air  to  the 
lungs,  (fcc,  than  to  comprehend  geographical  details 
or  moral  truths.  Is  not  a  knowledge  of  the  laws  upon 
which  health  depends,  as  important  to  the  develop- 
ment of  a  vigorous  physical  constitution,  w  moral 
instniction  is  to  the  formation  of  correct  moral  prin- 
ciples ?  Can  any  reason  be  given  why  both  should 
♦lot  be  taught  in  the  school-room? 

A  child  should  be  taught  to  call  each  organ  by  its 
correct  name.  No  more  effort  is  required  to  learn  the 
meaning  of  a  proper^  than  an  improper  term.  F^or 
example :  a  child  will  pronounce  the  word  as  readily, 
and  obtain  as  correct  an  idea,  if  you  say  lungs^  as 
if  you  used  the  word  lights. 

In  preparing  tnis  work,  it  has  not  been  deemed 
necessary  to  use  low,  vulgar  terms,  for  the  purpose  of 
being  understood  ^  but  such  words  have  been  selected 


VI  PREFACE. 

as  good  usage  sanctions.  Should  the  pupil  meet  witn 
any  word  he  does  not  understand,  let  him  consult  his 
dictionary,  as  he  should  do  in  perusing  works  upon 
history,  when  a  similar  difficulty  occurs. 

To  iFkSure  a  correct  pronunciation  of  the  technical 
words  interspersed  with  the  text,  they  have  been 
divided  into  syllables,  and  the  accented  syllables  des- 
ignated. An  jjrnple  Glossary  of  technical  terms  luis 
aiso  been  appended  to  the  work,  to  which  reference 
should  be  made. 

To  the  teacher  we  would  suggest  the  propriety  of 
calling  on  a  pupil  of  the  class,  to  describe  the  anatomy 
of  an  organ  from  an  anatomical  outline  plate ;  after- 
wards call  upon  another  to  give  the  physiology  of 
the  part,  while  a  third  may  state  the  hygiene ;  aftei 
which,  the  questions  at  the  bottom  of  the  page  may 
be  asked  promiscuously,  and  thus  the  detailed  knowl- 
edge which  each  pupil  porsessea  of  the  subject  will 
be  tested. 

With  advanced  pupils,  it  is  recommended  that  the 
subject  be  examined  in  the  form  of  topics.  The  ques- 
tions in  Italics  are  designed  for  this  method  of  reci- 
tation. 

For  a  more  full  and  complete  explanation  of  Anato- 
my, Physiology,  and  Hygiene,  the  pupil  is  referred  to 
the  Author's  treatise,  of  450  pages,  for  Colleges,  Acade- 
mies, and  Families,  or  to  his  second  boot:,  of  300 
pages,  for  Academies,  Schools,  and  Families. 

To  the  instructors  of  youth,  and  the  patrons  of 
Mucaticn,  this  work  is  respectfully  j^ubmitted. 

Warp.en,  J/a««.,  1852 


CONTENTS. 


1     GENr.RAL  IlEHARKS, 9 

S.  Anatomt  of  tub  Bones, 11 

3.  Anatomt  of  the  Bonks,  continued,      .         .        ....  16 

4.  Phtbioloot  of  thb  Bonbs, 21 

5.  Htoienb  of  the  Bones, 24 

6.  Anatomy  of  the  Muscles, 27 

7.  Phtbioloot  of  the  Moscles, .    .  SO 

8.  Htoiene  of  the  Muscles, 86 

9.  Anatomt  of  the  Teeth, 43 

»0.  Anatomt  of  the  Digestive  Okoans ,       47 

11.  Phtsioloot  of  the  Diqestivb  Okoans, 63 

12.  Hygiene  of  the  Digestive  Organs, 56 

13-  Anatomt  of  the  Circclatokt  Organs, 62 

14.  Phtsioloot  of  th«  Circulatort  Organs, 67 

15.  Htgienb  of  the  Circolatort  Organs, 70 

16.  Absorption, 76 

17.  Secretion, 82 

18.  Nutrition, 86 

19.  Anatomt  of  the  Rkspiratort  Organs,    ....  .89 

20.  Phyj»iologt  of  the  Re:   iratort  Organs,    ...  .93 
81   Hygiene  of  thb  Kkbpiratory  Organs,.    .         >             .98 


tftrw^^jr^^v^  WT'w^ 


TUl  0ONTINT8. 

Chapter  PS|, 

22.  Animal  Hbat, 10« 

23.  Anatomt  o»  thb  Vocal  Oroaks, 110 

24.  Anatomt  of  the  Ssin, 115 

25.  PUTSIOLOOT   OF  THB   SkIN, , 119 

26.  Utoibnb  of  tub  Skist, 122 

27.  Anatomt  of  the  NKRvor5  Ststbm, 127 

28.  Fhtsioloot  of  thb  Nervous  Stbtkx, 131 

29.  Htoienb  of  thb  Nebvous  Ststbm, 134 

80.  Senhb  of  Touch, 138 

Sbnbb  of  Tastb, 139 

Sense  of  Smell, 141 

81.  Anatomt  of  thb  Organs  of  Visiok, 143 

32.  Phtsioloot  of  the  Organs  of  Vision, 149 

S3.  Anatov;  of  the  Organs  of  Hearing, 152 

34.  Phtsiologt  of  the  Organs  of  Ebabibo, 155 

35.  Mbanh  of  preserving  the  Ubalth, 158 

86    DiRIlOTIONS  fob  NubSBS, 164 


APPE>'DIX, 170 

GLOSSABr, 176 

INDEl .  181 


FIUST   BOOK 


ox 


ANATOMY,  PHYSIOLOGY,  AND 
HYGIENE. 


CHAPTER   I. 

GENERAL    REMARKS. 


1.  Anatomy  is  a  description  of  the  organs^  or  parts  o/  a 
Dody. 

Examples.  Ist.  Flowers  have  roots,  stems,  and  blossoms. 
These  are  their  organs.  2d.  The  teeth,  stomach,  and  heart, 
are  some  of  the  organs  of  the  human  body.* 

2.  Physiology  is  a  description  of  X\\q  function^  or  use  of  an 
organ. 

Examples.  1st.  The  roots  of  flowers  suck  up  water,  to 
make  them  grow.  This  is  their  function.  2d.  The  stomach, 
in  man,  is  one  of  the  organs  that  prepare  the  food  for  his 
growth.     This  is  its  function. 

3.  Anatomy  and  Physiology  are  divided  into  two  kinds, 
namely,  Animal  au  \  Vegetable. 


,   •  Where  examples  are  given,  let  the  pupil  mention  other  analog 
gous  ones. 


I.  What  is  anatomy  ?    Give  examples.    2.  What  is  physiology  ?    Givo 
examples.    3.  How  many  kinds  of  anatomy  and  physiology  are  there? 


10  OENhRAL   REMARKS. 

4.  Anitnal  Anatomy  and  Physiology  are  again  divided  into 
Human  nnd  Comparative. 

5.  Ilunuin  Anatomy  and  Physiology  describe  iho  structure 
and  functions  of  the  organs  of  man, 

6.  Comparative  Anatomy  and  Physiology  describe  the  struc- 
ture and  functions  of  the  organs  of  other  animals  than  man. 

Examples.     As  the  horse,  the  monkey,  and  the  whalo. 

7.  Vegetable  Anatomy  and  Physiology  describe  the  struc- 
ture and  functions  of  different  parts  of  trees,  shrubs,  plants,  and 
flowers. 

8.  ilvGiENE  is  the  art  of  preserving  health,  or  that  depart- 
ment of  medicine  which  treats  of  the  preservation  oiT  health. 

9.  All  bodies  in  nature  are  divided  into  Organic  and  In- 
organic.  Organic  bodias  include  animals  and  plants.  Inor- 
ganic bodies  include  earths,  metals,  and  other  minerals. 

10.  All  organized  bodies  have  a  limited  period  of  life,  and 
this  period  varies  with  every  species.  The  duration  of  some 
plants  is  limited  to  a  single  summer,  as  many  garden  ilowers  ; 
while  some  trees,  as  the  olive,  live  many  hundred  years.  Some 
atiimals  live  but  a  short  time,  while  the  elephant  lives  more 
thun  a  century. 

l.\  The  life  of  man  is  shortened  by  disease  ;  but  disease  is 
undc  the  control  of  fixed  laws  —  laws  which  we  are  capable 
of  understanding  and  obeying.  How  important,  then,  is  the 
study  of  ;  thysiology  and  hygiene  !  For  how  can  we  expect  to 
obey  laws  which  we  do  not  ui.  'erstand  ? 

4.  How  are  animal  anatomy  and  physiology  divided  ?  6.  What  do 
human  anatomy  and  physiology  describe  ?  6.  What  do  comparative  anat- 
omy and  physiology  describe  ?  7.  What  do  vegetable  anatomy  and  physi- 
ology describe  ?  8.  What  is  hygiene  ?  9.  How  are  all  bodies  in  nature 
divided  ?  What  bodies  are  called  organic  ?  What  bodies  are  called  in- 
organic ?  10.  Have  all  animals  and  plants  a  limited  period  of  life  ?  Doei 
this  period  vary  with  different  speiies  of  animals  and  plants?  Give  some 
exr.mples.  1 1.  How  is  life  usually  shortened  ?  Wliy  is  the  study  of  phyai< 
•lugy  aiid  ii)  gicne  important  to  every  person  ? 


ANATOMY    OF   THE    BONES.  11 


CHAPTER   II. 

THE    BONES. 

12.  The  b)ne3  are  firm  and  hard,  and  of  a  dull  white  color 
In  all  the  higher  ordors  of  animals,  among  which  is  man,  they 
are  in  the  interic  r  of  the  body,  while  in  lobsters,  crabs,  <fcc., 
thoy  are  on  the  outside,  forming  a  case,  which  protects  'he 
movable  parts  from  injury. 

ANATOMY   OF  1'HE  BONES. 

13.  There  are  two  hundred  and  eight  •  bones  in  the  human 
body,  beside  ifio  teeth. 

14.  These,  for  convenience,  are  divided  into  four  parts: 
1st.  The  bones  of  the  Head.  2d.  The  bones  of  the  Trunk. 
3d.  Tne  bones  of  the  U2)per  Extremities.  4lh.  Tho  bones  of 
the  Lower  Extremities. 

15.  The  bones  of  the  iikad  are  divided  into  those  of  the 
Skull.^  Eary  and  Face.  '^ 

16.  The  SKULL  is  formed  of  eight  bones.  These  are  joined 
together  by  ragged  edges,  called  sutures.     (Fig.  2.) 

Observation.  The  sutures  stop,  in  a  measure,  the  jars 
caused  by  external  blows.     Children  should  never  strike  each 


♦  Some  anatomists  reckon  more  than  this  number,  others  leas,  for 
the  reason  that,  at  different  periods  of  life,  the  niunber  of  pieces  of 
which  one  bone  is  formed,  varies.  Example.  The  breast-bone,  in 
infancy,  has  ei(/ht  pieces ;  in  youth,  three ;  in  old  age,  but  one. 

^1  '" '■        '  llll.l—  ■!  ■■  I.  IMIII.         — ■  111  ■  I  II  ■    I'l       — ^— ■  I  1 

12.  Describe  the  bones.  13.  How  many  bones  in  the  human  body? 
14.  How  are  they  diy'ded?  Name  them.  15  — 18.  Give  the  anatomy  of  tht 
bones  of  the  head.  15.  How  are  the  bones  of  the  head  divided  ?  16.  Ho* 
nuiny  bones  in  the  skull  ?    How  are  the  bones  of  the  skull  joined  togethn  *^ 


^■vm^fM>.fn^e^<^^^*v'''';m!pmfm!^figffifmir 


12  ANATOMT,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

Other  upon  the  head,  I     nuse  the  bones  of  the  skull  in  them 
are  softer  than  in  adults. 
#    17.   In  each  ear  are  four  small  bones.     They  aid  in  hearing. 

18.  In  the  face  are  fourteen  bones.  They  support  the 
softer  parts  outside  of  them. 

19.  The  TRUNK  has  fifty-four  bones  —  iwenty-four  RihSf 
tw'enty-foui"  bones  in  the  Spinal  Col'umn^  (back-bone;)  four 
in  the  Pelvis;  the  Ster'n^.tPy  (breast-bone;)  and  one  at  the 
root  of  the  tongue. 

20.  All  the  RIBS  are  joined  to  the  spinal  column.  There 
are  twelve  on  each  side. 

Fig.  2. 


^^. 


Ptg.  S.    The  bones  of  the  npper  part  of  the  skuU.   1 , 1, 9, 9, 3,  The  mturw  that  joia 
Oie  bones. 

21.  The  seven  upper  ribs  are  united  in  front  to  the  sternum 
by  a  yielding  substance  called  car^ti-lage^*  (gristle.)     The 


•  See  paragraj/h  46. 


17.  What  is  the  use  of  futures  ?  How  many  bonea  in  each  ear  ?  "What 
Is  their  use?  J",  iiow  many  bones  in  the  face?  19  —  29.  Give  the  anato 
my  of  the  hones  of  the  tntnk.  19.  How  many  bones  in  the  trunk  ?  Name 
them.  20.  To  what  are  all  the  ribs  joined  ?  How  many  on  each  side  ? 
What  does  fig.  2  represent?  21.  How  are  the  first  seTen  ribs  united  io 
tront? 


ANATOMY   OF   TFK   BOWES.  18 

remjining   five   are   not   attached,   directly,   to  the   sternum. 
Three  are  joined  to  each  other  by  cartilage ;  two  are  not  con  , 
fined;  hence  they  are  called  "floating  ribs." 

22.  The  cavity  formed  by  the  sternum,  ribs,  and  spinal 
column,  is  called  the  Chest.  It  contains  the  heart,  iungs,  and 
large  blood-vessels. 

23.  The  shape  of  the  chest  is  conical,  or  like  a  sugar-loaf. 


Fig.  3.  The  lonii  of  the  chest.  ',2,3,  The  stennim,  (breast-bone.)  4,  3,  The 
■pinal  coluirin,  (back-bone.)  6,  7,  8,  9,  The  first  rib.  10,  The  seventh  rib.  11,  The 
cartilage  of  the  third  rib.     13,  The  floating  ribs. 

Observation,  The  lower  part  of  the  chest  is  broader  and 
fuller  than  the  upper  part,  when  it  is  not  made  smaller  by  tight 
clothing. 

The  next  three  ?    What  are  the  last  L^o  called  ?    Why  ?    Describe  flg.  S. 
"  22.  How  is  the  chest  formed  ?  What  does  it  contain  ?    23.  What  is  th» 
shape  of  the  chest }     How  does  the  lower  part  of  the  chest  compare  in 
•ixe  with  the  upper? 

2  ,,'-■■;.   -  ,:--:-.zk,'''' 


M 


ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE 


24.  llie  SPINAL*  COLUMN  IS  composcd  of  twenty-four 
pieces  of  bone.     Each  piece  is  called  a  vert'e'bra. 

25.  Uetween  the  pieces,  or  vertebra;,  is  a  thick  piece  of  car- 
tilage, which  is  elastic,  or  springs  like  India-rubber.  This  not 
only  unites  the  vertebiTc,  but  pernnits  them  to  move  in  diflerent 
ways. 

26.  There  is  an  opening  in  each  vertebra.  By  a  union  of 
these  openings,  a  canal  is  formed  the  whole  length  of  the  spinal 
column  in  which  the  spinal  cord  (pith  of  the  back-bone)  is 
placed. 


Fig.  4. 


Fig.  5. 


Fig  4.  The  form  of  a  vertebra  of  iho  neck.  1,  The  main  portion  of  Ite  bona. 
2,  'I'he  spinal  canal,  in  which  tJie  spinal  cord  is  placed.  4,  5,  7,  8,  Points,  <  projto 
liuns  of  ihe  vertebra. 

r=3,  5.  1,  The  cartilage  that  c  mnects  the  vertcbree.  3,  4,  5,  6,  Points,  r  pro- 
jections of  the  vertebra.    7,  The  Hpinal  canal. 

Observation.  A  good  idea  of  the  structure  of  the  vertehraj 
may  be  obtained,  by  examining  the  spinal  column  of  a  domestic 
animal,  as  the  dog,  cat,  or  pig. 


•  From  the  Latin  spi'na,  a  thorn  ;  so  called  from  the  points  of  tfe.» 
rertebrae  that  are  felt  beneath  the  skin. 


24.  How  many  pieces  of  bone  in  the  spinal  column  ?  "What  is  each 
piece  called  ?  2.5.  What  is  placed  between  the  vernebrie  ?  Give  its  use. 
26.  How  is  the  spinal  canal  formed,  and  what  does  it  contain  ?  Describe 
fig.  4.  Describe  fig  5.  How  may  an  idea  of  the  structure  of  th*  Terte* 
OIK  be  obtained  2 


ANATOMY    OF    THE    BONES 


1» 


27.  I'he  spinal  column  is  a  very  curious  and  perfect  piece 
of  mechanical  art.  By  its  structure,  great  strength  and  suf- 
fijiient  movement  or  tiexibility  are  combined.  The  vertebrfla 
are  so  firmly  joined  together,  that  dislocation  of  tliem,  without 
fracture,  is  very  rare. 

28.  The  PELVIS  is  composed  of  four  bones.  They  are  so 
arranged  as  to  form  a  bony  basin.  Tlie  spinal  column  testa 
on  these  bones,  and  they  also  serve  to  support  the  lower 
extremities. 

Fig.  6. 


Pig.  6.  1, 1,  The  hip-bones.  2,  The  sacrum,  wynm  which  the  Hpinal  coiumn 
re  Its.  3,  Tlie  extremity  of  the  spinal  column,  named  the  coc'cyz.  4,  4,  The  cavitiea 
for  the  head  of  the  tliigh  bone. 

29.  In  the  sides  of  these  bones  is  a  deep,  round  cavity, 
called  a-ce-tabu-lum,  in  which  the  head  of  the  thigh-bone  ia 
placed. 


27.  What  is  said  of  the  structure  of  the  spinal  column  ?  28.  Of  how  many 
bones  is  thr  pelvis  composed  ?  What  is  their  use  ?  Describe  fig.  C 
Hi.  Wiiat  is  found  in  the  bidea  of  these  bones  ? 


16  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYOIENB. 


CHAPTER    III. 

ANATOMY    OF   THE    BONES,    CONTINUED. 

30  The  upper  extremities  contain  sixty-four  bones  — 
the  Scap'ii-la^  (shoulder-blade;)  the  Clav'i-ch^  (collar- bone;) 
and  the  bones  of  the  Arm^  Fore-arm^   Wrist^  and  Hand. 

31.  The  SCAPULA  is  a  broad,  irregular  bone,  situated  upon 
the  upper  and  back  part  of  the  chest. 

32.  The  CLAVICLE  is  a  thin  bone  at  the  base  of  the  neck. 
It  IS  joined  at  one  extremity  to  the  sternum,  at  the  other  to 
the  scapula. 

Observation.  The  use  of  the  clavicle  is  to  keep  the  arms 
from  sliding  toward  the  breast.  Children  should  frequently 
throw  their  arms  backward,  as  t'^  s  exercise  would  tend  to 
increase  the  length  of  this  bone,  am   nlso  to  enlarge  the  chest. 

33.  The  ARM  is  formed  of  a  su.^  >  bone,  called  the  hu'' 
mer-us. 

34.  The  FORE-ARM  is  formed  of  two  bones — the  w/'nrt,  on 
the  inner  side,  and  the  ra'di-us.,  on  the  outside,  (the  side  on 
which  the  thumb  is  placed.)  By  a  beautiful  arrangement  of 
these  bones,  the  hand  is  made  to  rotate^  or  turn,  permitting  ita 
complicated  and  varied  movements. 

35.  The  WRIST  is  formed  of  eight  irregular  bones.  They 
move  but  little  upon  each  other. 

36.  The  HAND  consists  of  nineteen  bones —  five  in  the  palm, 
and  fourteen  bones  in  the  fingers  and  thumb.  * 

30 — 37.  Give  the  anatomy  of  the  hones  of  ihc  upper  extremities.  30.  Name 
the  bones  of  the  upper  extremities.  31.  Describe  the  Sv?apula.  32.  "Where 
is  the  clavicle  situated  ?  \Vliat  is  the  use  of  the  clavicle  ?  33.  How  ia 
the  arm  formed  ?  34.  The  fore-arm  ?  35.  How  many  bones  in  the  wrist  ? 
86.  How  many  bores  in  the  hand  ? 


ANATOMY   OP  THE   BONES. 


17 


37.  Kach  finger  is  formed  of  thr^e  bones  of  diflerent  lengths 
the  thumb  has  but  two.     Proofs  of  a  designing  Creator  aro 
nowhere   more   manifest   than   in   the   simple   but   wonderful 
structure  and  adaptation  of  the  human  hand. 

38.  The   LOWER   extremities    contain    sixty   bones — the 
Fe'mur^  (thigh-bone ;)  the  Pa-tel'la^  (knee-pan ;)  the    Tib'i-a 
(shin-bone;)  \\ie  Fib'u-la^  (small  bone  of  the  leg;)    and  the 
bones  of  the  Foot. 

39.  The  FEMUR  is  the  longest  bone  of  the  body.     It  sup- 
ports the  weight  of  the  head,  trunk,  and  upper  extremities. 


Fig.  7. 


Fig.  8. 


Fig.  7.    V,  The  nlna.    R,  The  radiui.    s,  L,  c,  P,  U,  M,  T,  T,  The  eight  bones  «l 
the  wrist.    1>  1, 1, 1,  1,  The  five  bones  of  the  pjilm  of  the  hand. 

Fig.  8.    10, 10,  10,  Tile  bones  of  the  palm  of  the  hand     11,  13, 13,  The  bonea  of 
(he  fingers.    14, 15,  The  bones  of  the  thumb. 

40.   The  TIBIA  and  the  fibula  are  situated  between  the 
knee  and  ankle. 


37.  What  is  said  of  the  bones  of  the  fingers  and  thumn  ?  38 — 41.  Qiv 
the  anatomy  of  the  bonea  of  the  lower  extremities.  38.  Name  th« 
oonfs    of  the    liwer    extremities.     39.    "What    is    said    of   the    femur? 


Describe    fig.  7. 
anUe? 


Fig.    8       40.    What   bones    between    the    knee    and 


J8 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 


41.  Th«  FOOT  is  formed  of  twenty-six  bones --seven  in  the 
instep  ;  five  in  the  middle  of  the  foot;  and  fourteen  toe-Dones. 

Observation.  Tlie  bones  of  the  foot  ore  so  united  as  to  give 
it  the  form  of  an  arch,  —  convex  on  its  upper  surface,  and  con- 
cave on  the  lower  surface. 

Fig.  9. 


Fig.  9.  A  view  of  the  upper  surfnce  of  the  Ijones  of  the  foot.  1,  2,  3,  4,5,  8,  T 
8,  The  bones  of  the  instep.  9,  9,  9,  Tlie  boncfl  of  the  middle  of  the  foot.  10,  11,  Th« 
bonea  of  the  great  toe.     12, 13,  14,  The  boaea  of  the  siiiull  toea 

Fig.  10 


P  (?.  10.  A  Bide  view  of  the  bones  of  the  foot,  showing  its  arched  form.  The  arch 
rests  upon  the  htel  behind,  Rnd  the  baU  of  the  toes  in  front.  I,  Tnt  lower  i«rt  of  the 
tibia.  2,  3,  4,  5,  Runes  of  the  instep.  6,  A  bone  of  the  middle  of  the  foot.  7,  8,  The 
bones  of  tlie  great  toe. 

♦ 

42.   The  bones  consist  of  animal  matter,  (jelly,)  and  earthy 
matter,  (phosphate  and  carbonate  of  lime.) 


41.  How  many  bones  in  the  foit,  and  name  them  ?  What  is  the  form 
3f  the  foot?  Describe  fig.  9.  Fig.  10.  42.  Of  what  are  the  bonec 
•omposed?  »  ^  ^,  :,'„ 


ana:omy  op  the  bones. 


19 


43.  To  show  the  cinitnal  without  the  eurthy  matter  of  the 
bones,  immerse  a  slender  bone  tor  a  few  days  in  a  weak  aciu, 
(one  part  muriatic  acid  and  six  parts  water,)  and  it  can  then 
be  bent  in  any  direction. 

44.  To  show  the  earthy  without  the  animal  matter,  bum  a 
bone  in  a  clear  fire  for  about  fifteen  minutes,  and  it  becomet 
white  and  brittle. 

45.  The  JOINTS  form  an  interesting  part  of  the  body.  They 
are  composed  of  the  extremities  of  two  or  more  bones,  Car'li- 
ingcc^  '.<?ristles,)  Syn-o'vi-al  membrane,  and  Lig'a-ments 

Fig.  12. 


*«<•.■ 


Fig.  11.  The  relative  position  of  the  tmiie,  rartilnge,  and  synovial  membrans. 
1,  1,  The  extreiiiities  of  two  bones,  to  form  a  joint.  9,  2,  The  cartilage  that  coven* 
the  end  of  the  bone.  3,  3,  3,  3,  The  synovial  membrane,  winch  cover:)  the  cnrtiluge 
of  both  bones,  and  is  Uien  doubled  back  from  cue  to  the  other ;  It  is  represented  by 
the  dotted  lines. 

Fig.  12.  A  vertical  section  of  the' knee-joint  1,  The  femur.  3,  The  patella 
5.  Th.?  tibia.  2,  4,  Ligaments  of  the  patella.  6.  Cartilage  of  the  til)ia-  12,  The 
cartilage  of  the  femur.    *  «  *  *,  The  synflvial  membrane. 

46.  Cartilage  is  a  smooth,  solid,  elastic  substance,  that 
covers  the  ends  of  the  bones  that  form  a  joint.  It  prevents 
the  ends  of  the  bones  from  wearing  off,  and  also  diminishes 
tlie  jar  that  the  joint  receives,  in  walking  or  leaping. 


-    43.  How  can  the  animal  matter  be  shown  ?    44.  The  earthy  ?    45— 18.  D« 
tcribe  the  parts  that  form  aJoiiU.     4.5.  AVhat  is  said  of  the  joints  ?    Of  what 
bre  they  composed  ?    What  is  represented  by  fig.  11  ?    Fig.  12  ?   46.  Defina 
cartilage.    'W^.iat  is  its  use  i 


mm 


2() 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENE. 


47.  The  SYNOVIAL  ^xi:MBRANE  is  a  thin,  membranous  layer 
which  covers  the  cartilages,  and  is  thence  bent  back,  or  reflected 
upon  the  inner  surfaces  of  the  ligaitients  which  surround  and 
enter   into   the   composition  of  tho  jomts.     This  inembrano 
forms  a  »,  osed  sac.     (Fig.  11.) 

48.  The  LIGAMENTS  are  strong,  in'^lastic  suostances ;  th«y 
serve  to  connect  and  bind  together  the  bones  of  the  body. 


Fig.  13. 


Fig.  14. 


Pig.  13.     8,  9,  The  ligaments  that  extend  flrom  the  hip-bone  (6)  to  the  thigli' 
tme,  (5.) 

Fig.  14.  2,  3,'  The  ligaments  that  extend  from  the  collar-bone  (I)  to  the  shouldef 
DiHile,  (4.)  The  ligaments  5,  6,  extend  from  the  shoulder-blade  to  the  first  bona 
vf  the  arm. 

Observation.  The  joints  of  the  domestic  animals,  are  similar 
in  their  construction  to  those  of  man.  To  illustrate  this  part  of 
the  body,  a  fresh  joint  of  the  calf  or  sheep  may  be  used. 


47.  Define  synovial  membrane.  48.  What  are  ligaments  ?  Wbat  is 
their  use  ?  What  is  represented  bv  fig  13  ?  Fig.  14  ?  How  oan  the  etruo* 
turo  of  the  joints  be  illustrated 


PHYitlOLOQir   OF    THE   BONES.  21 


CHAPTER    IV. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OF    lilS    BC'^li«. 

4&.  The  bones  are  the  frumework  of  iho  body.  They  sup- 
port 'all  the  soA  parts,  as  the  flesh  and  vessels,  and  likewise 
afford  a  firm  surface  for  the  attachment  of  the  ligaments. 

50.  The  use  of  the  various  bones  is  different.  Some  protect 
organs,  as  those  of  the  skull  and  chest,  while  others  are  used 
when  we  move,  as  those  of  the  extremities  and  spinal  column. 

51.  The  bones  are  covered  with  a  firm  mem'brane,  or  skin, 
called  per-i-os'te-um.  This  membrane  and  the  bones,  when 
healthy,  give  us  but  little  pain  if  wounded  ;  but.  if  diseased,  as 
in  "  felons,"  the  pain  is  very  severe. 

52.  The  joints  are  constantly  supplied  with  a  fluid  called 
syn-o'vi-a.  This  operates  like  oil  on  the  joints  of  a  machine. 
By  the  smooth  cartilages  and  synovia,  the  joints  are  enabled 
to  bear  all  the  motion  required  of  them  during  a  great  number 
of  years. 

53.  The  joints  vary  in  their  functions.  Some  are  movable, 
as  the  finger-joints ;  while  others  are  immovable,  as  the  sutures 
of  the  skull. 

54.  The  union  of  the  spinal  column  with  the  skull  exhibits 
one  of  the  most  ingenious  contrivances  to  be  met  with  in  the 
body.  1st  It  permits  the  backward  and  forward  movement, 
as  in  bowing  and  nodding  the  head.  2d.  The  motion  which 
is  made  in  turning  the  head  from  side  to  side. 


49 — 61.  Give  the  physiology  of  the  hones.  49.  What  is  the  use  of  the 
bones  ?  60.  Give  the  function  of  some  of  the  bones.  61.  With  what  are 
the  bones  covere  1  ?  62 — 66.  dive  the  physiology  of  the  joints.  62.  With 
what  are  the  joints  constantly  supplied  ?  What  is  the  use  of  this  fluid 
and  the  cartilages  ?  63.  Mention  some  of  the  functions  of  the  joints. 
64.  What  is  said  of  the  union  of  the  spinal  column  with  the  skull? 


^iMiiiiitiiMiiiiiiBr^"^-^-^'"^'^"-^^- 


Ss 


22 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 


65.   This  admirable  piece  of  mechanism  aflbrds  great  pro- 
tection to  the  spinal  cord,  at  the  top  of  the  neck ;  ti'is  being 
perhaps,  the  most  vital  portion  of  the  whole  body.     Injury  to 
it,  or  pressure  upon  it,  is  instantly  fatal. 

56.  Some  joints  move  but  in  one  direction,  like  a  hinge  of  a 
door.  These  are  called  Hinge  Joints ;  as  the  ankle  and  the 
knee-joint.  Some  joints  move  in  difFerent  directions,  like  a  ball 
in  a  socket.  These  are  culled  Ball  and  Socket  Joints ;  as  the 
fhoulder  and  the  hip-joint. 


Fig.  16. 


Fig.  16. 


Fig.  15.  The  knee-JoinU  1,  The  lower  extremity  of  the  thighbone,  a,  5,  The 
two  rounded  extremities  that  rest  upon  the  upper  extremity  of  the  tibia,  (shin-bone.) 
S.  Two  ligaments  within  the  knee-JoinL  6,  7,  The  cartilage  that  tips  the  uppei 
extremity  of  the  tibia,  (4.) 

Pig.  16.  2,  The  deep  socket  of  the  hip-joint.  .5,  The  round  head  of  the  thigh- 
bone, which  ii  lodged  in   ''e  socket.    3,  The  ligament  within  the  socket. 


Observation.  The  more  movable  a  joint,  the  less  firm  it  is, 
and  the  more  frequently  dislocated,  or  "  put  out."  It  is  for  this 
reason  that  the  shoulder-joint  is  more  frequently  displaced  than 
any  other  in  the  body. 


65.  What  is  protected  by  this  admirable  piece  of  mechanism  ?  66^  What 
•re  hinge  joints  ?  What  are  ball  and  socket  joints  ?  Why  is  the  shouldtfT> 
Joint  more  frequently  dislocated  than  any  other  in  th>^  body  i 


|»P»v8'Ol,OGY    OF   THE    BONES. 
Fig.  17. 


2f^ 


'■W 


P»g  17.  1,1,  The  spinal  column.  2,  TheFkuIl.  3,  The  lower  jaw.  4,  The  sternam. 
\  The  libs.  6,G,  The  carMlagCH  of  the  ribs.  7,  Tl,e  clavicle.  8,  The  humerus.  9,  Th« 
rhoulder-JoinC  10,  The  radius.  11,  The  ulna.  Vi,  The  elbow-joint  13,  The  wriat. 
U,  The  hand.  15,  The  luuinch-bone.  IG,  The  sacrum.  17,  The  hip-joint.  18,  The 
thigh-bone.  19,  The  patfll.i.  20,  The  knee-joint.  21,  The  fibula.  22,  The  tibia. 
23,  The  ankle-joint.  24,  The  foot  2.";,  2ti,  The  lignnients  of  the  clavicle,  Rtemum, 
and  ribs.  27, 28,  29,  The  ligaments  of  the  shoulder,  elbow,  and  wrist.  30,  The  larfe 
Kitery  of  the  arm.  31,  The  ll^ainentsof  the  hi|>-joint.  'M,  The  largo  bl(M>d-VMwbior  the 
fhigh.  33,  Thearterj'ofthelei^.   34, 35, 3(3,  The  iigauienlsufthe  patella,  kne«, and  ankla. 

A'd(£.  Let  the  pupil,  in  form  of  topics,  review  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  Jm 
^nes  from  fig.  17  or  from  anatomical  outline  plateb  1  and  3. 


14  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY.    ANU    BTOIXNX. 


CHAPTER    V. 

HYGIENE   OF   THE   BONES. 

67.  The  hones  require  exercise  to  make  them  healthy.  By 
use  they  arc  iiicr  ased  in  size  and  strength  to  a  limited  extent, 
while  inaction  or  disease  weakens  them.  Exercise  favors  the 
deposition  of  the  substances  of  which  they  are  composed. 

58.  The  exercise  or  labor  should  he  adapted  to  the  condition 
of  the  hones.  The  bones  of  a  child  contain  more  of  the  animal 
than  the  earthy  matter,  and  are  consequently  weak ;  though 
the  child  is  able  to  exercise,  its  bones  are  not  adapted  to  severe 
toil.  On  the  other  hand,  the  bones  of  the  aged  man  contain 
more  earthy  than  animal  matter.  This  causes  them  to  be  brit- 
tle and  unfit  for  labor.  But  in  middle  age,  the  proportions  of 
animal  and  earthy  matter  are,  usually,  such  as  to  give  the 
proper  degree  of  flexibility  and  strength  for  labor,  with  little 
liab  lity  to  injury. 

Ohservation.  The  difference  in  the  structure  of  the  bonea 
at  different  ages  may  be  seen,  by  comparing  the  rib  of  a  calf 
or  lamb,  with  the  rib  of  an  ox  or  sheep. 

59.  The  clothing  should  he  loosely  worn.  The  ribs  and 
bones  of  the  spmal  column  are  soft  and  yielding  in  childhuod. 
A  small  amount  of  pressure  on  the  walls  of  the  trunk  will 
lessen  the  size  of  the  chest,  and  thus  injure  the  lungs,  stomach, 
and  heart 

60.  In  sittings  the  feet  of  the  child  should  he  supported.    If 

67—63.  Give  the  hygiene  of  the  bone*.  67.  What  effect  has  exerciw 
upon  the  bones  ?  68.  Give  the  reasons  why  the  amount  of  labor  should  be 
adapted  to  the  condition  of  the  bones.  How  can  the  difference  in  the 
structure  of  the  bones  at  different  ages  be  illustrated  ?  69.  Give  a  reason 
why  the  clothing  should  be  loosely  worn.  60.  Why  should  the  feet  of 
ihildren,  when  sitting,  be  supported  ?  »;:.*;«. 


;ii*; 


nVGIENK    OF    THE    BONES. 


35 


ihe  stool  IS  so  hi^h  as  not  to  permit  the  feet  to  rest  upon  the 
Hoor,  the  weight  of  the  limbs  below  the  luuie  luiiy  cause  the 
flexible  hone  of  the  thi^fh  to  becntne  curved.  When  the  feet 
are  not  supported,  the  child  is  inclined  to  lean  forward,  contract- 
ing an  injurious  and  ungraceful  position. 

Observation.  The  scats  in  school-rooms  should  not  only  be 
of  such  height  as  to  enable  the  pupil  to  rest  the  feel  on  tlio 
floor,  but  they  should  have  properly-constructed  backs. 


Fig.  19. 


Fig.  18.    The  position  ossuined  when  the  leat  ia  of  proper  height,  and  the  feet 

buppiirtcd. 

Fig.  19.    The  position  a  child  naturally  assumes  when  Uie  seat  ia  so  high  tliat  Mm 
feet  are  not  8u;)ported. 

61.  Children  should  stand  and  sit  erect.  This  position  tends 
'.o  keep  the  spinal  column  erect  and  healthy.  When  a  slight 
cur/ature  of  the  spine  exists,  it  can  be  improved  by  walking 
with  a  book,  or  a  heavier  weight,  upon  the  top  of  the  head ;  tq 


Should  seats  in  a  school-room  have  backs  ?    61.  Wliy  should  childrea 
•land  and  sit  erect  ? 

a 


26  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

ba!7*iice  which,  the  spine  must  be  nearly  erect.  Thosfi  people 
that  carry  their  burdens  upon  their  heads  se'dom  have  crooked 
spines.  * 

62.  Pupils,  while  writing,  drawing,  and  sometimes  while 
studying,  frequently  incline  the  spinal  column  to  one  side,  in 
order  to  accommodate  themselves  to  the  desks  at  which  they 
are  seated.  This  position  elevates  one  shoulder,  while  i  t  de- 
presses the  other. 

;  ,  Fig.  20. 


Fig.  ^X  A  representation  of  .  deformed  spinal  column.  A  well-Armed  spinal 
column  has  three  curves,  two  forward  und  one  bucliward,  (2,  2, 2,  fig  25,}  but  no 
lateral  curvature,  (1,  1,  Ag.  17.) 

63.  One  shoulder  may  be  thus  elevated  for  a  short  time,  and 
no  injurious  results  follow,  prrivided  care  is  taken  not  to  keep  it 
in  the  raised  position  too  long,  or  if  the  opposite  shoulder  is 
elevated  for  the  same  period  of  time. 

What  is  the  effect  of  carrying  biirdens  upon  the  head  ?    62.  What  is  tht 
effect  of  pupils  using  desks  that  are  too  Itigh  or  improperly  constructed 
6S.  How  can  one  shoulder  b«  elevated,  Aud  *o  injurious  results  follow  ? 


ANATOMY   OF   THE   MUSCIES. 


27 


CHAPTER    VI 


THE    MTJSCLES. 


« 


64.  All  the  great  motions  of  the  body  are  caused  by  the 
movement  of  some  of  the  bones  which  form  the  framework  of 
the  body  ;  but  these,  independently  of  themselves,  have  not  llie 
power  of  motion,  and  only  change  their  position  through  the 
action  of  other  organs  attached  to  them,  which,  by  contracting, 
or  shrinking,  draw  the  bones  after  ihem.  In  some  of  the  slight 
movements,  as  the  winking  of  the  eye,  no  bones  are  displaced, 
or  moved.  These  movmg,  contro 'ting  organs  are  the  Mus'ch^y 
(lean  meat)  "* 


ANATOMY  OF  THE  MUSCLES. 

65.  A  MUSCLE  is  composed  of  many  little  strings,  called 
fibres.  Some  of  these  fibres  run  in  straight  lines ;  others 
spread  like  a  fan ;  while  some  are  inclined  like  the  feathery 
part  of  a  quill.     (Fig.  21.) 

66.  Toward  the  extremities  of  a  muscle  the  fibres  unite,  and 
form  a  substance  of  a  whitish  color,  harder  and  tougher  than 
the  muscle.     This  is  called  ten'don^  (cord,  sinew.) 

Observation.  TI  t  pupil  can  examine  a  piece  of  boiled 
beef,  or  the  leg  of  a  fowl,  and  -^ee  the  structure  of  the  fibres 
and  tendons  of  a  muscle,  with  the  attachment  of  the  tendons 
tc  the  bones. 

67.  Tendons  have   various  shapes.     Sonie*imes  tt.'iy   are 

94.  Ilovy  are  all  the  great  motions  of  the  body  produced  ?  What  are 
these  moving,  contracting  organs  called  ?  65 — 72.  Give  the  structure  of  the 
muaclea.  65.  Of  what  is  a  muscle  composed  ?  66.  What  in  a  tendon  ? 
How  can  the  structure  of  a  muscle  be  shown  ?  67.  Wliat  is  the  shape  ol 
tendons  ? 


m 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 


long,  slender  strings;   sometimes  they  are  short  and   thck 
again,  in  some  situations,  they  are  thin  and  broad.     Thej  serve 
to  fasten  the  muscles  to  the  bones,  or  to  each  other. 

Observation.  In  some  instances,  the  synovial  membrane, 
which  forms  the  sheath  of  the  tendons,  is  ruptured,  and  the 
synovial  fluid  escapes.  This  forms  a  tumor,  called  a  gan'gli-on, 
(weeping  sinew.)  It  is  called  a  wind-gall  when  on  the  limbs 
of  a  horse. 

68.  in  tha  description  of  a  muscle,  its  attachments  are  ex- 
piessbd  by  the  terms  origin  and  instrlion.  The  term  origin  is 
general Jy  applied  to  the  more  fixed  or  centml  attachment,  or  to 
the  points  toward  which  motion  is  directed ;  while  insertion  is 
assigned  to  the  more  movable  point,  or  to  that  most  distant  from 
the  centre.  The  middle,  fleshy  portion,  is  called  the  "  belly,'* 
or  swell. 

Fig.  21. 


Pig.  21.  I,  Represents  the  fibres  of  a  muscle  running  in  straight  lines.  S,  Th« 
Ibn-shaped  fibres.  3,  4,  Fibres  inclined  like  the  plumes  of  a  quill,  t,  (,  Tendons  a* 
the  extremities  of  the  muscle,  L 

69.   In  some  parts  of  the  body,  there  is  but  one  layer  of 
muscle  over  the  bones ;  in  other  parts,  there  are  five  or  six 


How  are  the  tumors  formed,  called  weeping  sinews  ?  68.  How  are  the 
attachments  of  muscles  expressed  ?  What  is  the  middle  portion  called  ^ 
69.  How  many  layers  of  muscles  aie  there  around  the  bones  ? 


,p--.-Ty,».-7jr-T--i;'-'^r>-^yv-  -Tr.-,.  1.7  t  ..y-^r-,    "■■■.■--•■';  v    ,•,>  -       '   ■  ''W^Jij   .••■:::^.\ 


AN.?  rOMY    OF    THE    MUSCLES.  95 

layers,  ona  muscle  being  placed  over  another.     They  are  sepa- 
rated by  a  tiiin,  whitish  membrane,  ciUlcd  fas'ci-a. 

Observation.  An  instance  is  seen  in  the  membrane  which 
envelops  a  leg  of  beef,  and  which  is  observed  on  the  edges 
cf  Pi  slice  when  it  is  cut  for  broiling. 

70.  In  general,  the  muscles  form  about  the  bones  two 
layeiTJ,  calleo  the  superficial^  or  external  muscles ;  and  the 
deep-seated^  or  those  nearest  the  bone. 

71.  There  are  more  than  four  hundred  muscles  in  the 
human  body.  To  these,  and  a  yellow  substance,  called  fat^ 
that  surrounds  and  fills  the  spaces  in  the  muscles,  the  child 
and  youth  are  indebted  for  the  roundness  and  hearty  of  their 
limbs. 

Observation.     When  we  are  sick,  and  cannot  take  food,  the 
/  is  {*;d  with  ihis  fat.     The  removal  of  it  into  the  blood 
causes  the  sunken  cheek,  hollow  eye,  and  prominent  appear- 
ance of  the  bones,  after  a  severe  sickness. 

72.  When  we  look  at  this  "harp  of  thousand  strings,"  and 
notice  the  varied,  rapid,  complicated,  yet  accurate  movements 
it  performs  in  a  single  day,  our  thoughts  are  lost  in  wonder,  in 
contemplating  this  superb  and  mtricate  machine,  framed  and 
finished  by  the  divine  Architect 

How  are  they  separated  from  each  othor?    Give  an  instance  where  thia 
membrane  may  be  seen.     70.  How  many  lav«»rs  of  Tuscles  generally  around 
the  bones,  and  M-hat  are  they  called  ?    71.  How  m»nv  n)i|iu>l<>s  in  the  hu 
man  body?    "W*  y  are  the  limbs  of  a  child  nu  a  rntind  and  full  thar  ws 
aged  ptTSOo'f  ?     How  is  the  body  nourished  whca  wc  ctioTiot  t«k<«  toodk  * 


W  ANATOMY     PnySIOLOGY,    AND   HYGIENE. 


CHAPTER    VII. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    MUSCLES. 

73.  Every  motion  of  the  body  is  made  by  the  contraction 
of  the  fibres  of  the  muscles ;  from  the  awkward  movement 
of  the  boy's  first  efibrt  at  penmanship,  to  the  delicate  and 
graceful  sweeps  of  the  pianist ;  from  the  firm,  the  stately  tread 
of  the  soldier,  to  the  light,  fairy-like  step  of  the  danseuse. 

Illustration.  The  muscles  ami  tendons  are  to  the  bones 
what  the  ropes  are  to  the  sails  and  yards  of  a  sh'p.  By  their 
action,  the  direction  of  the  sails  and  yards  is  chanj^ed.  So,  by 
the  action  of  the  muscles,  the  position  of  the  bones  of  the  body 
is  changed. 

74.  Each  fibre  of  the  several  muscles  receives  from  the 
brain,  through  the  nervous  filament  appropriated  to  it,  a  certaiu 
influence  called  nervoiis  fluid ^  or  stimuhis.  It  is  this  that  in- 
duces contraction,  while  the  suspension  of  this  stimulus  causes 
relaxation  of  the  fibres. 

75.  Muscles  remain  contracted  but  a  short  time  ;  then  they 
relax,  or  lengthen,  which  is  their  rest.  When  the  muscles  are 
in  a  state  of  contraction,  they  are  full,  hard,  and  more  prom- 
inent than  when  relaxed. 

76.  The  alternate  contraction  and  relaxation  of  the  muscles 
may  be  shown  by  the  following  experiment:  — 

Experiment.  Clasp  the  fore-arm  about  three  inches  below 
the  elbow,  then  open  and  shut  the  fingers  rapidly,  and  the 

73 — 99.  Give  the  physiology  of  the  miiscles.  73.  How  is  every  motion  of 
the  body  produced  ?  74.  With  what  is  each  muscular  fibre  supplied  ^ 
What  effect  has  this  stimulus  on  the  muscles  ?  75.  Do  muscles  remain 
crntracted  a  long  time  ?  What  is  their  appearance  when  in  a  state  of  con- 
traction ?  76.  How  can  the  aU«rnate  contraction  and  relaxation  of  the 
muscles  be  shown  ? 


^-V'-XP'l 


rnvsioLOGY  of  titk  muscles. 


81 


Bwelling  and  relaxation  of  tlie  muscles  on  the  opposite  sides  of 
*he  arms,  alternately  with  each  other,  will  be  felt  correspond 
ing  with  the  movement  of  the  fingers.  While  the  fingers  are 
bending,  the  nside  muscles  swell  and  the  outside  ones  become 
flaccid ;  and,  while  the  fingers  are  extending,  the  inside  mus- 
cles relax  and  the  outside  ones  swell.  The  altornate  swelling 
and  relaxation  of  opposing  muscles  may  be  felt  in  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  limbs. 

Fig.  22. 


2  4 

t  rejrrenentation  of  the  manner  in  which  all  nf  the  joints  of  the  body  are  m6V«d. 

Fig.  22,  1,  The  bone  of  the  arm  above  the  elbow.  2,  One  of  the  bones  below  fh« 
ilbow.  3,  The  muscle  that  bends  tlie  elbow.  This  muscle  is  united,  by  »  tendon,  to 
the  bone  below  the  elbow,  (4  ;)  at  llie  other  extremity,  to  the  bone  above  the  elbow, 
(5.)  6,  The  muscle  that  extends  the  elbow.  7,  Up  attachment  to  tlie  point  of  the 
eJbow.  8,  A  weight  in  the  hand,  to  be  raised.  '  .le  central  part  of  the  musc!e  (3) 
contracts,  and  its  two  ends  are  brought  nearer  together.  The  bones  beh»w  the  elbow 
are  brought  to  the  lines  shown  by  9,  10,  II.  The  weight  is  raised  in  the  direction  of 
the  curved  line.  When  the  muscle  (6)  contracts,  the  muscle  (3)  relaxes,  and  the  el- 
bow is  extended. 

77.  The  eyebrows  are  elevated,  or  raised  by  the  contraction 
of  the  muscles  on  the  forehead,  1,  fig.  23. 

78.  The  eyes  ar^  closed  by  the  contraction  of  the  muscles 
that  surround  them,  2,  fig.  23. 

Explain  65?.  22. 
Note.    Let  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  muscular  system  be  re 
viewed,  in  form  of  topics,  from  figs.  23,  24,  or  from  the  outline  anatomicft« 
plates  3  and  4 


ji 


M  (ij'-pi     ■■(■iiiiwi   iijii.mi'.v    f  !  I. 


82  ATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 

79.  The  upper  lip  is  elevated  by  the  contraction  of  the  mus- 
cles, 3,  4,  5,  6,  fig.  23. 

80.  The  mouth  is  closed  by  the  contraction  of  a  muscle  that 
surrounds  it,  7,  fig.  23. 

81.  The  lower  lip  is  drawn  down,  or  depressed,  by  the  con 
traction  of  muscles  on  the  lower  part  of  the  face,  8,  fig.  23. 

82.  The  head  is  bent  forward,  as  in  nodding,  by  the  contrac- 
tion of  muscles  on  the  front  part  of  the  neck,  9,  fig.  23.- 

83.  The  chin  is  raised,  and  the  head  is  brought  erect  by  the 
contraction  of  muscles  on  the  back  part  of  the  neck,  5, 6,  fig.  24. 

84.  I'he  body  is  bent  forward,  and  the  ribs  brought  down, 
by  the  contraction  of  muscles  on  the  front  and  lower  part  of 
the  trunk,  22,  23,  fig.  23. 

85.  The  spinal  column  is  kept  erect  by  the  muscles  at  the 
lower  and  back  part  of  the  trunk,  24,  25,  26,  fig.  24. 

86.  The  shoulders  are  brought  forward  by  the  muscles  upon 
the  upper  and  (ront  part  of  the  chest,  11,  fig.  23. 

87.  I'he  shoulders  are  brought  back  by  the  contraction  of  the 
muscles  upon  the  upper  and  back  part  of  tlie  chest, 7,  fig.  24. 

88.  The  arm  is  elevated  by  a  muscle  upon  the  shoulder,  10, 
fig.  23 ;  and  8,  fig.  24. 

89.  The  arm  is  brought  to  the  side  by  muscles,  11,  fig.  23; 
and  24,  fig.  24 

90.  The  elbow  is  bent  by  the  contraction  of  the  muscles  on 
the  upper  and  front  side  of  the  arm,  14,  fig.  23. 

91.  The  elbow  is  extended  by  a  muscle  on  the  back  part  of 
/he  arm,  10,  fig.  24. 

92.  The  wrist  and  fingers  are  bent  by  the  muscles  on  the 
front  part  of  the  arm,  below  the  elbow,  16,  18,  fig.  23. 

93.  The  muscles  on  the  back  part  of  the  arm,  below  the 
elbow,  extend  the  wrist  and  fingers,  21,  22,  23,  fig.  24. 

94.  The  muscles  that  bend  the  lower  limbs,  at  the  hip,  are 
situated  at  the  lower  and  front  part  of  the  trunk,  and  the  upper 
and  front  part  of  the  thigh,  25,  26,  27,  28,  fig.  23. 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE   MUSCLES. 


38 


95.  The  lower  limbs  are  extended  at  the  hips  by  the 
muscles  on  the  lower  and  back  part  of  the  trunk,  and  the  uppei 
and  back  part  of  the  thigh,  27,  2b,  fig.  24. 

96.  The  muscles  upon  the  front  part  of  the  thigh  extend  the 
leg  at  the  knee,  29,  30,  fig.  23. 

97.  The  knee  is  bent  by  the  muscles  upon  the  back  part  of 
the  thigh,  29,  30,  fig.  24. 

98.  The  muscles  upon  the  fore  part  of  the  leg,  below  the 
knee,  bend  the  foot  at  the  ankle,  and  extend  the  toes,  34,  35, 
36,  fig.  23. 

99.  The  muscles  upon  the  back  part  of  the  leg,  below  the 
knee,  extend  the  foot  at  the  ankle,  and  bend  the  toes,  31,  32 
33,  fig.  24. 

Observation.  It  would  be  a  profitable  exercise  for  pupils  to 
press  their  fingers  upon  prominent  muscles,  and,  at  the  same 
time,  vigorously  contract  them,  not  only  to  learn  their  situations, 
but  their  use ;  as  the  one  that  bends  the  arm,  14,  fig.  23. 

[Fig.  23.    A  front  view  of  the  muscles  of  the  body.    1,  The  frontal  swells  of  the 
occipito-frontalis.    3,  The  orbicularis  palpebrarum.    3,  The  levator  labii  superioria 
alteque  nasi.     4,  The  i^ygomaticua  major.     5,  The  zygoniaticus  minor.     6,  The 
mosseter.    7,  The  orbicularis  oris.    8,  The  depressor  labii  Inferioris.    9,  I'he  {ilatysma 
myoides.    10,  The  deltoid.    11,  The  pectornlis  major.     13,  Thb  latissimus  dursi 
13,  The  serratus  major  anticus.     14,  The  biceps  flexor  cubiti.     15,  The  triceps  ex- 
tensor cubiti.    16,  The  supinator  radii  longus.   17,  The  pronator  radii  um cm.    18,  The 
extensor  carpi  radialis  longior.    19,  The  extensor  oasis  metacarpi  pollicis.    30,  The 
nnnular  ligament    31,  The   palmar  fascia.    33,  The  obliquuit  externus  abdominis. 
23,    The  linea  alba.     24,    The  tensor  vagine  femoris.     26,    The   psoas  magnua 
27,   The  abductor  longus.     38,   The  sartorius.    39,  The  rectus   femoris.    30,  The 
vastus  externus.    31,  The  vastus  Internus.    32,  The  tendo  patella;.    33,  The   gas- 
trocnemius.   34,  The  tibialis  auticus.    35,  The  tibia.    36,  The  tendons  of  the  ex 
tensor  communis. 

Fig.  24.  A  back  view  of  the  muscles  of  the  body.  1,  The  temporalis.  2,  The 
occipito-frontalis.  3,  The  complexus.  4,  The  splenius.  5,  The  masseter.  6,  Tli* 
■tcrno^^leido  mastoideus.  7,  The  trapezius.  8,  The  deltoid.  9,  The  infra  spinatus. 
;0,  The  triceps  extensor.  11,  The  teres  minor.  12,  The  teres  major.  13,  The 
tendinous  portion  of  the  triceps.  14,  The  anterior  edge  of  the  triceps.  15,  The 
supinator  radii  longus.  16,  The  pronator  radii  teres.  17,  The  extensor  conuniinit 
digitorum.  18,  The  extensor  oesis  metacarpi  pollicis.  19,  The  extensor  comniunia 
•ligitorum  tendons.  20,  The  olecranon  and  in.sertion  of  the  triceps.  21,  The  exten* 
■or  tarpi  ulnads.  22,  The  auricularis.  23,  The  extensor  communis.  24,  The  Litis 
■imus  dcrsi.  2.%  Its  tendinous  origin.  26,  Tlie  obliquus  externus.  27,  The  ghitei'j 
medius.  28,  The  gluteus  magnus.  29,  The  biceps  flexor  cruris.  30,  Tne  semi-tea 
dinoflus.    31,  32,  The  gastrocnemiua.    33,  Tlie  tendo- Achillis.] 


y* 


--.•i^^'M   '■  • 


34  ANATOMY,   niYSlOLOGY,    ANH   HYGIENB. 

Fig.  23. 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    MITSCLBS. 


35 


Fig.  24. 


86  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    4Nr>    UtulEftm 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

HYGIENE   OF   THE   MUSCLES. 

100.  Tlie  muscles  should  he  used  and  then  rested.  Tih* 
will  increase  their  size  and  strength,  by  increasing  the  flow  oi 
blood  to  the  parts  called  into  action  A  muscle  should  not  be 
used  too  long,  or  remain  at  rest  too  long ;  both  are  alik« 
injurious. 

Illustrations.  1st  The  blacksmith  uses  and  rests  the  mus- 
cles of  his  arm  when  striking  upon  the  anvil.  They  not  only 
become  large,  but  very  firm  and  hard. 

2d.  The  student  uses  the  muscles  of  the  arm  but  little,  in 
holding  his  books  and  pen ;  they  are  not  only  small,  but  soft. 

3d.  Let  the  student  leave  his  books,  and  wield  an  iron  sledge, 
and  the  muscles  of  his  arm  will  increase  in  size  and  firmness. 
On  the  other  hand,  let  the  blacksmith  assume  the  student's 
vocation,  and  the  muscles  of  his  arm  will  become  fioft  and 
less  firm. 

101.  Exercise  should  he  regular  and  frequent.  The  sys- 
tem needs  this  means  of  invigoration  as  regularly  as  it  does 
new  supplies  of  food.  It  is  no  more  correct  that  we  devote 
several  days  to  a  proper  action  of  the  muscles,  and  then 
spend  one  day  inactively,  than  it  is  to  take  a  proper  amount 
of  food  for  several  days,  and  then  wi'/  iw  this  supply  for 
a  day. 

102.  Every  part  of  the  muscular  system  should  have  its 
appropriate  share  of  exercise.     Some  employments  call  into 

100 — 118.     Give  the  hygiene  of  the  muscles.     100.  Why  should  every  mu8 
cle  be  used  ?    What  is  injurious  to  muscles  ?     How  is  the  effect  of  using 
muscles  illustrated?     101.   Why  should  the  exercise  of  the  muscles  b« 
regular  and  frequent  ?    102.  What  employments  and  amusements  are  b«st 
CDr  ths  health  ? 


Il 


AYGIENE    OF   THE    MUSCLES.  89 

exercise  the  muscles  of  the  upper  limbs,  as  shoe-making ;  others 
the  muscles  of  the  lower  limbs;  while  some  the  muscles  of  l)oth 
upper  and  lower  limbs,  with  those  of  the  trunk,  as  farming. 
Those  trades  and  kinds  of  exercise  are  most  salutary,  in  which 
all  the  muscles  have  their  due  propoition  of  action,  as  this  tendi 
to  develop  and  strengthen  them  equally. 

103.  The  proper  time  for  exercise  should  be  observed.  This 
is  modified  by  many  circumstances.  As  a  general  rule,  the 
morning,  when  the  air  is  pure  and  the  ground  dry,  is  better  than 
the  evening;  for  then,  the  powers  of  the  body  are  greatest 
We  should  avoid  severe  exercise  and  labor  immediately  before 
and  after  eating  a  full  meal,  for  the  energies  of  the  system  are 
then  required  to  perform  the  digestive  function. 

104.  Tlie  muscles  should  be  used  in  pure  air.  The  purei 
the  air  we  breathe,  the  longer  can  the  muscles  be  used  in  labor, 
walking,  or  sitting,  without  fatigue  and  injury ;  hence  the  bene- 
fit derived  in  thoroughly  ventilating  all  inhabited  rooms. 

Observation.     It   is  a  common   remark  that  sick  persons 
will  sit  up  longer  when  riding  in  a  carrian;e,  than  in  an  easy 
I  chair  in  the   room  where  they  have  Inn  sick.     In  the  one 

instance,  they  breathe  pure  air,  in  th  other,  usually,  a  con- 
fined, impure  air. 

105.  The  muscles  should  be  exercised  in  the  light.  Light, 
particularly  that  of  the  sun,  exercises  as  great  an  influence  on 

I  man  as  it  does  on  plants.     Both  require  the  stimulus  of  this 

I  agent.     Students  should  take  their  exercise  during  the  day, 

■|i  rather  than  in  the  evening,  and  the  farmer  and  the  mechanic 

;:|  should  avoid  night  toil,  as  it  is  much  more  exhausting  than  the 

I  same  eflbrt  during  daylight. 

I  Illustrations.     Plants  that  grow  in  the  ^hade,  as  under  a 

I  board,  are  of  lighter  color  and  more  feeble  than  those  that  are 

-^  Why?  103.  What  time,  in  general,  is  best  for  exercise?    What  should  be 

^  avoided  ?    104.  Why  should  the  muscles  be  used  in  pure  air  ?    Give  obser- 

3.  vation.     105.  Why  should  students  take  their  exercise  in  the  davtime  ? 

M  What  should  farmers  and  mechanics  avoid  ?    Why  ?     How  ia  the  iuftuenct 

^  of  Bclar  light  illustrated  ? 

p  4 

1 


88  ANATOMY,    PnYSIOLOGV,    AND   IIVGIENE 

exposed  to  tho  lig  it  of  the  sun.  Persons  that  dwell  in  dark 
rooms,  nro  paler  and  less  vigorous  than  those  who  inhabit 
apartments  well  lighted,  and  exposed  to  solar  light. 

106.  Every  muscle  should  move  freely.  Compression  by 
any  means,  lessens  the  size  and  strength  of  the  muscle. 

Illustration.  Let  a  surgeon  bandage  a  limb  for  some  weeks, 
when  a  bone  is  broken,  and  when  the  bandage  is  removed,  the 
limb  will  be  found  smaller  than  when  the  accident  occurred. 
The  compression  by  close  dresses  produces  similar  eflecis  upon 
the  muscles  of  the  body. 

107.  The  state  of  the  mind  affeclb  musailar  contraction.  A 
person  who  is  "heerful  and  happy  will  do  more  work,  and  with 
less  fatigue,  than  one  who  is  peevish  and  unhappy. 

Illustration.     A  sportsman  will  pursue  his  game  miles  with- 
out fatigue,  while  his  attendant,  not  having  any  mental  stimu- 
us,  will  become  weary. 

108.  The  erect  attitude  lessens  the  exhaustion  of  the  muscles. 
A  person  will  stand  longer,  walk  farther,  and  do  more  work, 
wh«)n  erect,  than  in  a  stooping  posture;  because  the  muscles 
of  the  back,  in  stooping,  are  in  a  state  of  tension,  or  stretching, 
to  keep  the  head  and  trunk  from  falling  forward.  In  the  erect 
position,  the  head  and  trunk  are  nicely  balanced  and  supported 
by  the  boncfc  of  tho  spinal  column,  and  the  muscles  of  the  back 
are  called  but  slightly  into  action. 

Experiment.  Hold  in  each  hand  a  pail  of  water,  or  equai 
weights,  in  a  stooping  posture,  as  long  as  it  can  be  done  with- 
out much  suffering  and  injury.  Again,  when  the  musculai 
pain  has  ceased,  hold  the  same  weights,  for  the  same  length  of 
time,  in  an  erect  posture,  and  note  the  difTerence  in  the  fatigue 
of  the  muscles. 

Ohsewation.     The  attitude  of  children  in  standing  has  been 

106.  Why  should  every  muscle  more  freely  ?  How  is  the  effect  of  com- 
pression illustrated  ?  107-  Does  the  mind  affect  the  action  of  the  muscles  ? 
How  is  this  illustrated  ?  108.  "What  attitude  lessens  the  exhaustion  of  thf 
muscles  ?  Why  ?  How  is  the  effect  of  position  shown  by  experiment  I 
What  is  said  respecting  the  attitude  of  child  en  ? 


HTOTENE    OF   THE    MUSCLES. 


»9 


mur.h  neglected  ooth  by  parents  and  tcncliers.  Let  a  child 
acquire  the  habit  of  inclining  his  head  ai  d  shoulders,  and  the 
chest  wi.l  become  contracted,  the  muscles  of  the  back  enfeebled, 
and  the  deformity  thus  acquired  will  progress  to  advanced  age 


Fig.  25. 


Fig.  26 


Pig.  25.  1,  A  perpendicular  line  from  the  centre  of  the  feet  to  the  upper  extrem- 
ity of  the  opiiial  column,  where  the  head  rests.  2,  2,2,  The  spinal  coiamn,  with  its 
three  natural  turves.  Here  the  head  nnd  body  arc  Imlnnccd  upon  the  spinni  column 
and  jointib  if  the  lower  extremities,  so  that  the  muscles  are  not  kept  in  n  state  of  tcn- 
i.)n.  This  erect  position  of  the  bmly  and  head  is  rlways  accxnpanied  with  straight 
lower  limbs. 

Fig  26.    1,  A  perpendicular  line  from  the  centre  of  the  feet.    2,  Represents  th;  un 
natural  curved  spina    column   and  its  relative  position  to  the  perpendicular,  (1.)    The 
lower  limbs  are  seen  curved  at  the  knee,  and  the  body  is  stooping  forward.    While 
■landing  in  this  position,  the  muscles  nf  the  lower  limbs  and  back  are  in  conl.nued 
tension,  which  exhauat3  and  weakens  them. 


What  is  represented  by  figs.  25  and  26  ? 


40 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE 


109.  Wfiile  studying^  drawing,  writing,  and  sewing,  the 
lody  should  be  kept  erect.  This  attitude  favors  a  healthy  action 
of  the  various  organs  of  the  body,  and  conduces  to  beauty  and 
symmetry  of  form.  On  the  contrary,  narrow  chests,  "  hollow 
stomachs,"  "  round  shoulders,"  and  ill  health,  follow  a  viola- 
tion of  this  rule. 


Fig.  27 


Fig.  28. 


Fig.  97.    An  improper,  but  not  an  unusual  poaition  in  Bitting, 
Fig.  St>.    A  proper  position  in  sitting. 

1 10.  Muscles  should  be  gradually  called  into  action.  When 
the  muscular  system  has  been  in  a  state  of  rest,  \i  should  not 
suddenly  be  called  into  vigorous  action.  On  arising  from  a 
be  1,  lounge,  or  chair,  the  first  movements  of  the  limbs  should 
be  slow,  and  then,  if  necessary,  gradually  increased. 


109.  What  is  one  cause  of  narrow  chests  and  round  shoulders  ? 
110.  "What  caution  is  given  in  using  the  rausclci  when  they  have  been  iv 
a  sUte  of  rest  ?    What  does  fig.  27  show  ?    Fig.  28  ? 


-"V^ 


HYGIENE    OF   THE    MUSCLES.  41 

Observation.  If  a  man  lias  a  certain  amount  of  work  to  be 
performed  in  nine  hours,  and  his  muscles  have  been  in  a  state 
of  rest,  he  will  do  it  with  less  fatigue  by  performing  half  the 
amount  of  the  labor  in  five  hours,  a  d  the  remainder  in  four 
hours.  The  same  principle  should  be  regarded  in  driving 
horses  and  other  beasts  of  burden. 

111.  Muscles  should  be  rested  gradually,  when  they  have 
been  vigorously  used.  If  a  person  has  been  making  great 
muscular  exertion  in  cutting  wood,  or  any  other  employment, 
instead  of  sitting  down  to  rest,  he  should  continue  muscular 
action  by  some  moderate  labor,  or  amusement. 

112.  When  the  skin  is  covered  with  perspiration,  (sweat,) 
from  muscular  action,  avoid  sitting  down  "  to  cool  "  in  a  current 
of  air ;  rather  put  on  more  clothing,  and  continue  to  exercise 
moderately. 

1 13.  In  cases  when  severe  action  of  the  muscles  has  been 
endured,  bathing  and  rubbing  the  skin  over  the  joints  that  have 
been  used,  are  of  much  importance.  This  will  prevei.t  soreness 
of  the  muscles  and  stiffness  of  the  joints. 

114.  In  labor,  or  exercise,  the  muscles  should  be  relaxed. 
In  walking,  dancing,  and  learning  to  write,  there  will  be  Jess 
fatigue,  and  the  inovements  will  be  more  graceful,  when  the 
muscles  are  slightly  relaxed,  than  when  rigidly  contracted. 
The  same  principle  applies  to  mo^t  of  the  mechanical  em- 
ployments. 

Experiments.  Attempt  to  bow  with  the  muscles  of  the 
limbs  and  trunk  rigid,  and  there  will  be  a  stiff  bending  of  the 
body  only  at  the  hip-joint.  On  the  other  hand,  attempt  to  bow 
with  the  muscles  moderately  relaxed  ;  the  ankle,  the  ku  e,  and 

Give  observation.  Should  the  same  principle  be  observed  in  driving 
horses  ?  Ill  ^low  should  muscles  be  rested  when  they  have  been  vigor- 
ously used  .•'  112.  When  the  skin  is  covered  with  perspiration  from  muscu- 
lar action, how  should  it  be  " cooled"  ?  113.  How  can .screncss  of  the  mus- 
cles be  prevented  ?  114.  In  what  state  should  be  the  muscles  of  the  arm  in 
writing  or  performing  most  employments  ?  How  is  this  principle  shown  by 
ezperimente ! 

4» 


12  ANATO^tfT,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

the  hip-jomt  will  slightly  bend,  accompanied  with  an  easy  and 
graceful  curve  of  the  body. 

115.  When  riding  in  cars  and  coaches,  the  system  will  not 
suffer  so  severely  from  the  jar  if  the  muscles  are  slightly 
relaxed.  When  riding  Dver  uneven  places  in  roads,  rising 
slightly  upon  the  feet  diminishes  the  shock  occasioned  by  the 
sudden  notion  of  the  carriage.  The  muscles,  under  such 
circumstances,  are  to  the  body  what  elastic  springs  are  to  a 
carriage. 

116.  In  jumping  or  falling  from  a  carriage,  or  any  height, 
the  shock  to  the  organs  of  the  body  may  be  obviated  in  the 
three  following  ways.  1st.  Let  the  muscles  be  relaxed,  not 
rigid.  2d.  Let  the  limbs  be  bent  at  the  ankle,  knee,  and  hips ; 
the  head  should  be  thrown  slightly  forward,  with  the  trunk  a 
little  stooping.     3d.    Fall  upon  the  toes,  not  the  heel. 

1 17.  Repetition  of  muscular  action  is  necessary.  To  render 
the  action  of  the  muscles  complete  and  effective,  they  must  be 
called  into  action  repeatedly  and  at  proper  intervals.  This 
education  must  be  continued  until  not  only  each  muscle,  but 
every  fibre  of  the  muscle,  is  fully  under  tlie  control  of  tlie  will. 
In  this  way,  persons  become  expert  penmen,  singers,  and 
skilful  in  every  emplojment. 

1 18.  In  training  the  muscles  for  effective  action,  it  is  very 
important  that  correct  movements  be  adopted  at  the  com- 
mencement.    If  this  is  neglected,  much  power  will  be  lost. 

115.  What  suggestion  when  riding  in  cars  or  coaches  ?  116.  In  jumpijtg 
itam  a  carriage,  in  how  many  ways  can  the  shock  to  the  organs  of  the  body 
be  obviated?  Give  the  1st.  The  2d.  The  3d.  117.  How  do  persons  be- 
come expert  penmen,  singers,  or  skilful  in  any  employment  ?  118.  What 
is  necessary  m  trailing  the  muscles  for  effective  action  i 


ANATOMY    OF  THE   TEETH. 


48 


CHAPTER    IX. 

ANATOMY   OF   THE   TEETH. 

119.  The  teeth  aio  nrmly  fixed  in  the  sockets  of  the  upper 
and  lower  jaw.  The  first  set,  which  appear  in  infancy,  is 
called  tem'po-ra-ry^  or  milk-teeth.  They  are  twenty  in  num- 
ber; ten  in  each  jaw. 

Fig.  29. 


Fig.  S9.  The  permanent  teeth  of  the  upper  and  !ower  Jaw.  a,  b.  The  incisora. 
c,  The  cuspi.^s.  d,  e,  The  bicuspids.  /,  g,  The  molars,  (double  teeth.)  A,  The 
wisdom  teeth. 


120.  Between  six  and  fourteen  years  of  age,  the  temporary 
teeth  are  removed,  and  the  second  set  nppeare,  called  per'ma- 
nent  teeth.     They  number  thirty-two,  sixteen  in  each  jaw. 

121.  The  four  front  teeth  in  each  jav;^  are  called  in-ci'sors^ 

119 — 123.  Give  the  anatomy  of  the  teeth.  119.  In  what  are  the  teeth 
placed  ?  What  is  the  first  set  called  ?  How  many  in  number  ?  Describe 
feg.  29.  120.  "Wlion  are  these  teeth  removed  ?  What  is  the  second  set 
called  ?    How  many  in  each  j  w  ?     121.  What  are  the  teeth  in  front  called  ? 


44 


ANATOMY,    PIIYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 


(cutting  teeth ;)  the  next  toofh  on  each  side,  the  cus'pid^  (eye 
tooth  ;)  the  next  two,  bi-cus'pids,  (small  grinders  ;)  the  next  two 
mo'lars,  (grinders.)  The  last  one  on  eacli  side  of  the  jaw,  la 
called  a  wisdom  tooth.,  because  it  does  not  appear  until  a  person 
is  about  twenty  years  old. 

122.  Each  tooth  is  divided  into  two  parts;  iiannely,  crown 
and  root.  The  crown  is  that  part  which  protrudes  fronn  the 
jaw-bone  and  gum.  The  root,  or  "fang,"  is  placed  in  the 
sockets  of  the  jaw. 


Fig.  30. 


Fig.  31. 


Fig.  30.    A  side  view  of  tlie  body  and  enamel  of  a  front  tooth. 

Fig.  31.    A  side  view  of  a  molar  tooth.    1,  The  enamel.    2,  The  body  of  the.  tooth 
3,  Theca.ity  in  the  crown  of  the  tooth.    4,  A  nerve  that  spreads  in  the  pulp  of  the 
tooth.    5,  An  artery  that  ramifies  in  tlie  pulp  of  tlie  tooth. 

123.    The  crowns  of  the  teeth  are  covered  with  a  very  hard 
substance,  called  en-am'el.     The  roots  consist  of  bony  matter.  • 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE   TEETH. 

124.   The  use  of  the  teeth  is  twofold.      1st.    By  a  cutting 
and  grinding  movement,  they  divide  the  masses  of  food  into 

The  next  ?  The  next  two  ?  Those  next  the  bicuspids  ?  The  last  that 
appear  in  thf  jaw  ?  122.  How  is  each  tooth  divided  ?  "Which  part  of  the 
tooth  is  the  crown  ?  Which  the  root  ?  123.  "With  what  ait  the  crowns 
Df  the  teeth  covered  ?  Of  what  docs  the  root  consist  ?  Describe  fig.  31. 
424 — 126.  Give  ih£ physiology  of  the  teeth.    124.  What  is  one  use  of  the  teeth  } 


HYGIENE    OF   THE   TEETH.  45 

smaller  pieces,  so  tliat  they  are  more  easily  and  readily  changed 
in  the  stomach. 

125.  2d.  The  teeth  aid  us  in  spr  'cing  with  distinctness 
certain  letters  and  word.-:.  An  individual  who  has  lost  his  front 
teeth  cannot  pronounce  distinctly  certain  letters,  called  dental, 

126.  The  teeth  also  give  beauty  to  the  lower  part  of  the 
face.  When  they  are  removed,  the  lips  and  cheeks  sink  in,  as 
is  frequently  seen  in  old  age.  Con.scfiuently,  those  sijiiple 
observances  that  tend  to  the  preservation  of  the  teeth,  are  ol 
practical  interest  to  all  persons. 


HYGIENE    OF   THE    TEgTH. 

127.  To  preserve  the  teeth^  they  must  be  kept  clean.  After 
eating  food,  they  should  be  cleaned  with  a  brush  and  water,  or 
rubbed  with  a  piece  of  soft  flannel,  to  prevent  the  tartar  col- 
lecting, and  to  remove  the  pieces  of  food  that  rnay  have  lodged 
between  them. 

128.  Tooth-picks  may  be  useful  in  removing  any  particles 
maccessible  to  the  brush.     They  may  be  made  of  bone,  ivory 
or  the  common  goosc-quill.     Metallic  tooth-picks  should  not  bo 
used,  as  they  injure  the  enamel. 

129.  The  whole  mouth  should  be  washed  with  pure,  tepid 
water,  at  night,  as  well  as  in  the  morning,  after  which  the  teeth 
should  be  brushed  upward  and  downward,  both  on  the  posterior 
and  anterior  surfaces.  It  may  be  beneficial  to  use  refined 
soap  once  or  twice  every  week,  to  remove  any  corroding  suiv 
stance  that  may  exist  around  the  teeth,  care  being  taken  to 
thoroughly  rinse  the  mouth  after  its  use. 

12.5,  Give  another  use  of  these  organs.  126.  Dc  they  contribute  to  the 
symmetry  of  the  lower  part  of  the  face  ?  127 — 132.  Give  the  hygiem  of  the 
teeth,  127.  By  what  means  can  the  teeth  be  preserved  ?  128.  What  is  said 
of  the  use  of  tooth-picks  ?     129.  How  often  shouul  the  teeth  be  brushed  ? 


V'' 


46  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,  AND   HYGIENE. 

130.  Food  or  drink  should  not  he  taken  into  the  mouth  \ohen 
very  hot  or  very  cold.  Sudden  changes  of  temperature  will 
crack  the  enamel,  and,  finally,  produce  decayed  teeth.    . 

Observation.  On  this  account,  smoking  is  pernicious,  be- 
cause the  teeth  are  subjected  to  an  alternate  inhalation  of  both 
cold  and  warm  air. 

131.  Care  should  he  taken^  in  childhood^  that  the  temporary 
teeth  be  removed  as  soon  as  they  become  loose^  in  order  that  the 
second  set  of  teeth  may  present  a  regular  and  beautiful  appear- 
ance. If  a  permanent  tooth  makes  its  appearance  before  the 
first  is  removed,  or  has  become  loose,  the  milk-tooth,  although 
not  loose,  should  be  removed  without  delay. 

132.  If  the  teeth  are  crowded  and  irregular,  in  consequence 
of  the  jaw  being  narrow  and  short,  or  when  they  press  so  hard 
upon  each  other  as  to  injure  the  enamel,  remove  one  or  more, 
to  prevent  their  looking  unsightly  and  irregular,  and  in  a  few 
months,  the  remaining  teeth,  with  a  little  care,  will  fill  the 
spaces. 

Observations.  1st.  It  is  not  always  necessary  to  have  teeth 
extracted  when  they  ache.  The  nerve  may  be  diseased,  and 
the  tooth  still  be  sound. 

2d.  When  it  is  ntcessary  to  have  decayed  teeth  filled,  it  is 
better  for  the  health  of  the  person  and  durability  of  the  teeth, 
to  have  them  filled  with  gold  foil. 

130.  What  is  the  cause  of  decayed  teeth  ?  Why  is  smoking  injurioui 
to  the  teeth?  131.  What  remarks  respecting  the  temporary  teeth? 
132.  Give  other  remarks  in  regard  to  the  temporary  teeth.  Give  obser- 
vation Ist.     Observation  2d. 


ANATOiifr  or  TUB  DIGESTIVB  OBOANB. 


47 


CHAPTER  X. 

DIGESTIVE    ORGANS. 

133.  The  food,  whether  animal  or  vegetable,  has  no  resem- 
blance to  the  bones,  muscles,  and  other  parts  of  the  body  to 
which  it  gives  sustenance.  It  must  undergo  certain  essential 
alterations  before  it  can  become  a  part  of  the  diffcrcv*  struc- 
tures of  the  body.  The  first  change  is  effected  by  tft?  actioa 
of  the  Digestive  Organs. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  DIGESTIVE  ORGANS. 
Fig.  32. 


Fig.  J2  A  view  of  the  salivary  glands  in  their  proper  situations.  1,  The  parotid 
gland  2,  Its  duct.  3,  7'he  submaxillary  gland.  4,  Its  duct.  5,  The  sublingual 
gland,  Drought  to  view  by  the  removal  of  a  section  of  the  lower  Jaw. 

138.  Has  aniraal  or  vegetable  food  any  resemblance  to  the  different  parts 
ot  the  body  to  which  it  f^ives  sustenance  ^  By  what  organs  is  th»  iu«t 
change  in  the  food  effected  ?    Describe  fig.  32. 


■f* 


n. 


48 


ANATOMY,  PHTSIOLOQY,  AND  nYGIENl 


134.  Tho  DIGESTIVE  ORGANS  are  the  Mouth,  Teeth,  SaVl 
va-i-y  Glands,  Phar'ynx,  (E-soph'a-ijiis,  (gullet,)  Stomach, 
In-te^tines,  ^bowels,)  Lac'te-als,  (milk  or  chyle  vessels,) 
Tho-ra(/ic  Duct,  Lit/er,  and  the  Pan'cre-aa,  (sweetbread.) 

135.  The  MOUTH  is  an  irregular  cavity,  which  contains  the 
leeth  and  the  organs  of  taste. 

136.  The  SALIVARY  GLANDS*  are  six  in  number;  three 
on  each  side  of  the  jaw.  They  are  called  the  pOrrotUd, 
the  suh-max'il-la-ry,  and  the  suh-Un'gual.     (Fig.  32.) 

1 37.  The  PHARYNX  is  a  mvuscular,  membranous  sac,  that  leadg 
10  tile  oesophagus. 

Fig.  33. 


I 


r'ig.  33.  A  side  view  of  the  face,  oesophagus,  nnd  tracben.  1,  Zf  The  trachea 
(wind-pipe)  find  larynx.  3,  The  ossophagiis.  4,  4,  4,  The  muscles  of  the  upper  pt)r- 
tion  of  the  (esophagus,  forming  the  pharynx.  5,  The  muscles  of  the  cheek.  6,  Tie 
muscle  that  surrouuds  the  mouth.    7,  The  muscle  that  forms  the  floor  of  the  mouth 


*  See  paragraph  234. 


134 — 147.  Give  the  anatomy  of  the  dir/estive  organs.  134.  Name  the 
digestive  organs.  135.  Describe  the  mouth.  136.  Describe  the  rsihvary 
glanda.     137.  What  is  the  pharynx  ?     What  doea  fig.  33  represent  ? 


ANATOMY    OF    THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGANS. 


49 


138.  The  CESOPHAGUS  is  a  largo,  momhranous  tube,  through 
which  the  food  and  drink  pass  into  the  stomach. 

139.  The  STOMACH  *  is  in  the  left  side  of  the  body,  below 
the  lungs  and  heart.  It  is  composed  of  three  coats,  or  mem- 
branes, which  are  thin  and  yielding.  The  external  is  called 
the  se'rons ;  the  middle  mus'cu-Iar  ;  the  inner,  mn'cnns. 

Illustration.  The  three  coulsof  the  stomach  (anatomicallv^ 
resemble  tripe,  which  is  a  preparation  of  the  largest  stomach 
of  the  cow  or  ox.  The  outer  coat  is  smooth  and  highly 
polished.  The  middle  coat  is  comjujsed  of  minute  threads, 
which  are  arranged  in  two  layers.  The  fibres  of  these  layers 
cross  each  other.  The  inner  coat  is  soft,  and  presents  many 
folds,  usually  called  "  the  honey-comb." 

Fig.  34. 


Fig.  34.  The  Inner  emrface  of  the  gtomach  and  duodenum.  1,  The  lower  portion 
of  the  oesophagus.  2,  The  opening  through  which  the  food  is  passed  into  the  stomach 
3,  The  stomach.  9,  The  opening  throtigh  which  the  food  passes  out  of  the  stomach 
into  the  duodenum,  or  upper  portion  of  the  Rmall  intestine.  10,  ;i,  14,  The  duode- 
num. 12, 13,  Ducts  through  which  bile  and  pancreatic  fluid  pass  into  it,  a,  6, «,  The 
three  coats  of  the  stomach. 


For  situation  of  the  stomach,  &c.,  see  fig.  63. 


138  What  is  the  oesophagus.  139.  Where  is  the  stomach  situated? 
How  many  coats  has  it  ?  Name  them.  What  Article  prepared  for  food 
does  the  slmnach  resemble  iq  Btructute  ?     KxpUiin  fig.  34. 


50 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE, 


140.  The  INTESTINES,  or  alimentary  canal,  are  diviJed  into 
two  parts,  the  small  and  large.  The  small  intestine  is  aboui 
twenty-live  feet  in  length.  The  upper  and  most  important 
division  is  called  the  Du-o-deJnnm.  The  large  intestme  is 
about  five  feet  in  length.  The  largest  division  is  callea  the 
Co'lon. 

141.  The  DUODENUM  (called  by  nurses  the  second  stomach) 
18  the  most  essential  part  of  the  small  intestine.  It  is  about 
twelve  inches  in  length,  and  commences  at  the  lower  orifico  of 
the  stomach. 

Fig-  35. 


Fig.  35.  1,1,  The  duodenum.  2,3,  Tho  small  intestine.  3.  The  conaectlon  jI 
Uie  small  and  large  inteBtine.  4,  5,  6.  7,  8,  9,  10,  The  large  intestine.  6,  7,  8,  9,  T6s 
colon. 


140.  How  are  the  intestines  divided  ?  What  is  the  length  of  the  small 
(kiteatine  ?  What  is  its  lurgeat  division  culled  ?  What  is  the  length  of  th« 
large  intestine  ?  What  is  its  luigest  division  cal/cd  ?  141.  Describe  the 
duodenum.    Explain  fig.  35. 


/  h 


/; 


/.,/ 


iV 


/, 


/v' 


ANATOMY    OF    THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGANS. 


51 


142.  The  LACTEALS  are  minute  vessels,  which  open- upon  tho 
mucous  surface  of  the  small  intestine.  From  the  mtestne 
they  pass  through  small  glands,  {mes-en-ler'ic^)  to  the  thuracio 
diict 

Fig.  .3fi, 


Fig.  36.  A  portion  of  C*^  "tnall  intestine,  lacteal  vessels,  mesenteric  glands  ani 
thoracic  duct.  1,  The  intestine.  2,  3,  4,  Mesenteric  glands,  through  which  th» 
lacteals  pass  to  the  thoracic  duct.  5,  6,  The  thoracic  duct.  7,  The  point  in  the  neck 
where  it  turns  down  to  «*nter  the  vein  at  8.  9,  10,  The  aorta.  II,  13,  Vessels  of  the 
neck.  13,  14, 15,  The  large  veins  that  convey  the  blood  and  chyle  to  the  heart. 
17,  17,  The  spinal  colunriO.    18,  The  diaphragm,  (midriff.) 


142.  What  are  lacteals  ?     Through  what  do  they  pass  as  they  proceed  t« 
the  thoracic  duct  ?    Describe  fig.  36. 


68  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   ANb   HYGIENE. 

143.  The  THORACIC  duct  commences  behind  the  liver,  ajid 
ascends  in  front  of  the  spinal  column.  At  the  lower  part  of 
the  neck,  il  turns  downward  and  forward,  and  pours  its  con- 
ten  5  into  the  vein  behind  the  collar-bone.  (8,  fig.  36.)  This 
due  is  equal  in  diameter  to  a  goose-quill. 

144.  The  LIVER  is  in  the  right  side  of  the  body,  below  the 
right  lung.  On  tlie  under  side  of  this  organ  is  a  small  sac, 
which  contains  a  yellow,  bitter  fluid,  called  bile^  (gall.) 

Observation.  The  bile  does  not  flow  into  the  healthy  stomach, 
Dut  into  the  duodenum.  With  many  persons,  the  imagination  is 
biliouSy  not  the  stomach. 

145.  The  PANCREAS  is  a  long,  flattened  organ,  situated  be- 
hind and  below  the  stomach.  From  it  there  flows  a  fluid  into 
the  duodenum,  called  pan-cre-at'ic  juice. 

Obsenmlion.  A  good  idea  of  the  liver,  pancreas,  and  intes- 
tines can  be  obtained  by  examining  these  parts  of  a  pig.  In 
this  animal,  the  sacs  or  pouches  of  the  large  intestine  are  well 
defined. 

146.  The  i.T'LEEN,  (milt,)  so  called  because  the  ancients 
supposed  it  to  be  the  seat  of  melancholy,  is  an  oblong,  flattened 
organ,  situated  in  the  left  side,  in  contact  with  the  stomach  and 
pancreas.     Its  use  is  not  well  determined. 

147.  The  OMENTUM  (caul)  is  composed  of  adipose  matter, 
(fat,)  deposited  between  layers  of  serous  membrane.  It  is 
attached  tq  the  stomach,  and  lies  on  the  anterior  surface  of  the 
intestines.  In  some  persons  of  gross  habits,  this  deposit  is  very 
great. 

143.   Describe  -ourse  of  the  thoracio  duct.      What  is  its  size) 

144.  Describe  ♦  What  is  found  upon  its  under  surface  ?     Give  ob- 

servation, jribe  the  pancreas.    How  may  an  idea  of  the  liver  be 

obtaJned  describe  the  spleen.    Is  its  use  well  known  ?    147.  De- 

scribe th<.        .NiUtAUO. 


PHTSIv  ^,v^Y    OF   TUB    DIGESTIVE   OBOAN8.  68 


CHAPTER     XI. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OP    THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGANS. 

148.  Substances  received  into  the  stomach  as  food,  must 
necessarily  undergo  many  changes  before  they  are  fitted  to 
form  part  of  the  animal  body.  The  solid  portit)n8  arc  reduced 
to  a  fluid  state,  and  those  parts  that  will  nounsii  the  body  are 
separated  from  the  waste  material. 

149.  The  first  change  in  the  food  is  made  in  the  mouth,  by 
the  teeth,  and  the  sa-li'va  (spittle)  from  the  salivary  glands. 
The  teeth  divide,  while  the  saliva  moistens  and  softens  the  food, 
si  that,  when  carried  into  the  pharynx,  it  is  passed,  with  ease, 
thi   ugh  the  GBsophagus  into  the  stomach. 

150.  In  swallowing,  tlie  food  is  pressed  by  the  contraction 
of  the  muscles  5,  6,  7,  (fig.  33,)  into  the  pharynx,  from  which 
It  is  carried  into  the  oesophagus,  by  the  contraction  of  tho 
muscles  4,  4, 4.  As  soon  as  the  food  is  received  into  this  Xuhe 
its  muscular  coat  contracts  upon  it  successively  \rom  above 
downward,  and  the  alimentary  ball  is  pressed  onward  into  the 
stomach. 

Observation.  The  process  of*  swi"ov/ing,  or  deglutition,  is 
easily  observed,  when  a  person  passes  either  liquid  or  solid 
food  into  the  stomach. 

151.  The  nex*  change  in  llie  food  is  in  the  stomach.  The 
coats  of  the  stomach  contract,  and  the  food  is  moved  around, 
while,  at  the  same  time,  a  peculiar  fluid  is  suoplied  by  the 

148 — 159.  Give  the  icse  of  the  digestive  organs.  148  "Wh«*  ia  necessary 
before  food  ran  nourish  ♦he  body  ?  149.'  Describe  the  first  chanj?e  in  the 
food.  150.  Give  the  process  by  which  the  food  is  passed  into  the  stomach 
H<*w  may  the  process  of  swallowing  be  ooscrved  ?  151.  Where  U  tne 
lecond  change  in  the  food  effected  ?  How  is  it  done  i 
5* 


54  ANATOMY,    PHVSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENK. 

Stomach,  caUed  gastric  juice,  which  mixes  with  the  food,  and 
reduces  it  to  a  soft,  pulpy  mass,  called  chyme. 

152.  This  pulpy,  grayish  substance  is  passed  into  the  duo- 
denum, and,  by  the  action  of  the  bile  and  pancreatic  juice,  it  is 
changed  into  two  parts — a  milk-like  substance,  called  c/iyZe ; 
and  re-sid'u-um,  or  waste  matter. 

153.  The  chyle  and  residuum  pass  from  the  duodenum  i»^.to 
the  remaining  portion  of  the  small  intestine,  and  are  moved 
along  by  a  worm-like  action  of  its  parts. 

154.  As  these  two  substances  are  moved  along  the  intestine, 
the  chyle  is  sucked  up  by  the  lacteal  vessels,*  that  pass  through 
the  small  intestine,  and  the  residuum  is  carried  into  the  large 
intestine,  and  r         cd  from  the  system. 

155.  '^o  recapitulate  :  In  the  adaptation  of  the  food  to  the 
wonts  of  the  body,  it  is  subjected  to  five  different  changes. 
1st.  It  is  changed  in  the  mouth,  by  the  action  of  the  teeth  and 
saliva.     This  is  called  mastication. 

156.  2d.  By  the  action  of  the  stomach  and  gastric  juice,  it 
is  changed  into  a  pulpy,  homogeneous  mass.  This  is  called 
chymijication. 

157.  3d.  In  the  duodenum,  the  bile  and  pannreatic  juice 
change  the  chyme  into  chyle.     This  is  called  ckiflification. 

158.  4th.  By  the  action  of  the  lacteal  vessels  and  thoracic 
duct,  the  chyle  is  poured  into  a  vein  behind  the  collar-bone, 
and  passes  through  the  heart  to  the  lungs  ;  here,  by  the  action 
of  the  air,  it  becomes  blood.    '(See  Chap.  XX.) 

159.  5th.  The  separation  and  excretion  of  the  residuum. 


♦  The  chyle  is  changed  by  the  lactcals  and  mesenteric  glands,  but 
the  nature  of  this  change  is  not,  as  yet,  well  defined  or  understood. 

152.  What  becomes  of  this  pulpy  substance?  What  change  is  effected 
In  the  duodenum  ?  i.53.  "Where  do  the  chyle  and  residuum  then  pass  ? 
1/J4.  What  becomes  of  the  chyle  {  Of  the  residuur^  ?  155.  Recapitulate 
the  five  changes  in  the  digestive  process. 

Note.    Let  the  pupil  review  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  digestive 
rgans,  t'rom  figs.  30  and  37,  or  from  outline  anatomical  plate  6. 


tHYSlOLOGY    OF    THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGANS. 


bk 


Fig.  37. 


Irig.  37.  An  ideal  view  of  the  organs  of  digeation,  opened  neatly  the  whole  lenptlk 
1,  The  uppei  jaw.  2,  TKj  lower  jaw.  3,  The  tongue.  4,  The  roof  of  the  mouth. 
5,  The  CBSophagus.  6,  Thetraclica.  7,  The  parotid  ghind.  8,  The  siiblingual  gland. 
»,  The  stomach.  10,  10,  Tlie  liver.  11,  The  gall-cst,  or  sac.  12,  The  duct  ti.at 
conveys  the  bile  to  the  luodtnum,  (13,  13.)  14,  The  pancreas.  15,  15,  1.5,  15,  Th« 
■mall  intestine.  16,  Tlie  opening  of  the  small  intestine  into  the  large  intestitie 
17, 18,  19,  SO,  The  large  intestine.  21,  The  spleen.  '22,  The  upper  part  of  tlie  spine 
column 


6tt  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENK. 


CHAPTER    XII. 

HYGIENE    OF   THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGANS. 

160.  The  perfection  of  the  digestive  process,  as  well  as  tho 
health  of  the  body,  requires  the  observance  of  certain  condi- 
tions.  These  will  be  considered  under  four  heads.  1st.  The 
quantity  of  food  that  should  be  taken.  2d.  Il8  quality. 
3d.  The  maimer  in  which  it  should  be  taken.  4th.  The  con- 
dilion  of  the  system  when  food  is  taken. 

161.  The  QUANTITY  of  food  necessary  for  the  system  varies. 
Although  many  things  may  aid  us  in  determining  the  quantity 
of  food  proper  for  an  individual,  yet  there  is  no  certain  guide 
in  all  cases.  Age,  occupation,  habits,  temperament,  tempera- 
ture, nealth,  and  disease,  all  exert  an  influence. 

162.  The.  child  and  youth  require  food  to  promote  the 
groicth  of  the  bones,  muscles,  and  the  different  parts  of  the 
body.  The  more  ra})id  the  growth  of  the  child,  the  greater  the 
demand  for  food.  This  accounts  for  the  keen  appetite  and 
vigorous  digestion  in  childhood. 

163.  Food  is  necessary  to  repair  the  waste  which  attends 
the  functions  of  the  different  organs.  The  waste  is  greatest 
when  we  exercise  most.  For  this  reason,  when  we  increase 
our  exercise  or  labor,  the  quantity  of  food  may  be  increased  ; 
while,  on  the  other  hand,  when  we  change  from  an  active  em- 

160 — 186.  Give  the  hyyiene  of  the  digestive  organs.  160.  What  does  the 
perfection  of  the  digestive  process  require  ?  161.  Can  the  quantity  of 
food  proper  for  an  individual  be  determined  in  all  cases  ?  What  exert  an 
Influence  on  the  quantity  necessary  for  the  body  ?  162.  At  what  age  is  the 
appetite  keen  and  the  digestion  vigorous  ?  Why  ?  163.  Give  another  db- 
mand  for  food.  When  is  the  waste  greatest  ?  When  should  the  amount 
of  food  be  lessened  ? 


HYGIENE    OF   THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGAXS.  67 

ployment  to  one  less  active  in  character,  the  food  should  be 
diminished  in  nearly  the  same  degree  that  the  exercise  is 
lessened. 

164.  When  the  girl  leaves  the  active  household  employ- 
ments for  the  shop  of  the  dress-maker,  —  when  the  boy  leaves 
the  farm  for  the  school-room,  —  the  amount  of  food  should 
be  diminished  as  soon  as  the  sedentary  employment  is  com- 
menced ;  for,  under  such  circumstances,  the  appetite  will  n(»t 
guide  correctly. 

Ohservation.  It  is  a  common  observation,  that  in  academies 
and  colleges,  the  older  students  from  the  country,  who  have 
been  accustomed  to  hard  manual  labor,  sufTcr  more  frequently 
from  defective  digestion  and  impaired  health  than  the  youngci 
and  feebler  students  from  the  larger  towns  or  cities. 

165.  The  food  aids  in  supporting  the  icarmth  of  the  body. 
This  is  the  reason  why  the  apjsetite  for  food  is  keener  in  the 
winter  than  in  the  summer.  It  follows,  then,  that  the  system 
requires  more  food  in  cold  than  in  hot  weather. 

Observations.  1st.  Well-clothed  children  require  less  food 
in  cold  weather  than  those  thinly  dressed.  2d.  Flocks  and 
herds  that  are  sheltered  in  winter,  will  eat  ont,  third  less  than  if 
exposed  to  the  inclemency  of  the  weather;  hence  it  is  true 
economy  to  keep  the  infeiior  animals  warm,  as  well  as  children. 

166.  In  all  instances^  the  quantity  of  food  should  have 
reference  to  the  present  condition  of  the  digestive  organs. 
If  they  are  weakened  or  diseased,  so  that  but  a  small  quantity 
of  food  can  be  properly  digested  or  changed,  that  amount  only 
should  be  taken.  Food  does  not  invigonite  the  system,  except 
it  is  changed,  as  has  been  described  in  Chap.  XI. 

167.  The  QUALITY  of  the  food  best  adapted  to  the  wants  of 

164.  When  will  not  the  appetite  guide  correctly  ?  What  observation  re- 
specting tliosc  students  that  have  been  accustomed  to  hard  manual  laboi  / 
16.5.  AVhy  is  the  appetite  for  food  keener  in  the  winter  than  in  the  sumnici  * 
Give  observation  1st.  Observation  2d.  166.  Why  should  the  present 
condition  of  the  digestive  organs  be  regarded  in  reference  to  the  quantity 
ot  food?  167.  On  what  does  the  quality  of  food  adapted  to  the  wmts  of 
the  system  depend '. 


58  aNATOMy,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

the  syf»tein  depends  upon  the  season,  climate,  age,  «S«j.,  of 
a  person.  Like  the  quantity  necessary  for  an  individual,  there 
can  be  no  fixed  law. 

168.  The  kind  of  food  lohich  is  eaten  should  be  adapted  to 
the  distensible  character  of  the  stomach  and  alimentary  canal. 
Hence  the  food  should  contain  nutritious  and  innutritious  mat- 
ter—  nutritious,  to  promote  the  growth  and  repair  the  waste  of 
the  system ;  and  innutritious,  to  distend  both  the  stomach  and 
alimentary  canal.  Consequently,  hot  flour  bread,  rich  pies,  and 
jellies,  are  not  so  good  articles  for  food,  as  the  unbolted  wheat 
bread,  ripe  fruits,  and  berries. 

169.  The  infuence  of  season  and  climate  shcvld  be  consid- 
ered in  selecting  food.  Food  of  a  highly  stimulating  character 
may  he  used  almost  with  impunity,  during  the  cold  weather  of 
a  cold  climate,  but  in  the  warm  season,  and  in  a  warm  climate, 
it  would  be  very  injurious.  Animal  food,  being  more  stimu- 
lating than  vegetable, can  be  eaten  in  the  winter;  but  vegetable 
food  should  be  used  more  freely  in  the  spring  and  summer. 

Observation.  By  abstaining  from  meats  and  stimulating 
drinks  in  warm  weather,  and  living  on  nutritious,  unstimulating 
food,  the  "season"  or  bowel  complaints  may  be,  in  a  great 
degree,  prevented. 

170.  The  age  of  persons  modifes  the  injlucnce  of  food  on  the 
system.  The  organs  of  a  child  are  more  sensitive  and  excita' 
ble  than  those  of  a  person  advanced  in  years.  Therefore 
a  vegetable_diet  would  be  most  appropriate  for  a  child,  while 
stimulating  animal  food  might  be  conducive  to  the  health  of  an 
aged  person. 

171.  The  MANNER  in  which  food  should  be  taken  is  of  much 
practical  importance ;  upon  it  the  health  of  the  digestive 
organs  depends. 

168.  What  should  all  substances  used  for  food  contain?  Why? 
169.  Should  the  season  of  the  year  influence  us  in  selecting  food  ?  Give 
observation.  170.  What  kind  of  food  is  adapted  to  the  organs  of  the  child  ? 
Why  ?  What  kind  to  a  person  advanced  in  life  ?  Why  ?  171  What  ia 
rfurt  of  ths  manner  of  taking  food  ? 


HYGIENE    OF    THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGANS.  69 

172.  Food  should  he  taken  at  regular  periods.  The  interval 
between  meals  should  be  regulated  by  the  kind  of  food,  the 
age,  health,  exercise,  and  habits  of  the  individual.  Children  re- 
quire food  more  frequently  than  adults ;  yet,  strict  regularity  and 
i/unctuality  should  be  observed  in  regard  to  their  cimes  of  eaung. 

173.  Food  should  not  be  taken  too  frequently.  If  food  is 
taken  before  the  stomach  has  regained  its  tone  and  energy  by 
repose,  or  before  the  digestion  of  the  preceding  meal  has  been 
completed,  not  only  will  the  action  of  the  stomach  be  imperfect, 
but  the  food  partially  digested  becomes  mixed  with  that  last  taken, 
inducing  irritation  or  disease.  In  general,  an  adult  should  allow 
six  hours  to  intervene  between  meals. 

174.  Food  should  be  well  masticated^  or  chewed.  All  solid 
food  should  be  reduced  to  a  state  of  comparative  fineness,  by  the 
teeth,  before  it  is  swallowed ;  the  gastric  fluid  of  the  stomach 
will  then  blend  with  it  more  readily,  and  act  more  vigorously 
m  reducing  it  to  chyme. 

175.  Mastication  should  be  moderate^  not  rapid  ;  for  the 
salivary  gland%  are  excited  to  action  in  chewing,  and  some  time 
must  elapse  before  they  can  secrete  saliva  in  sufficient  quantities 
to  moisten  the  food. 

176.  Food  should  be  masticated  and  swallowed  without 
drink.  As  the  salivary  glands  supply  fluid  to  moisten  the  dry 
food,  the  use  of  tea,  coflee,  water,  or  any  other  fluid,  is  not 
demanded  by  nature's  laws  while  taking  a  meal. 

Observation.  Were  it  customary  not  to  place  drinks  on  the 
tiible  until  the  solid  food  is  eaten,  the  evil  arising  from  drinking 
too  much  at  meals  would  be  obviated. 

177.  The  CONDITION  of  the  system  should  be  regarded 
when  food  is  taken. 

172.  How  should  food  be  taken  ?  How  shoiild  the  intervals  between 
meals  be  regulated  ?  What  should  be  observed  in  giving  food  to  children  ? 
173.  What  is  the  effect  if  food  is  taken  too  freciuently  ?  174.  Why  should 
food  be  well  masticated  i"  17o.  Why  should  we  i:ot  oat  rapidly  ?  176.  Why 
do  we  not  require  drink  while  chewing  our  f  )od  ?  177.  Should  the  con- 
dition of  the  system  be  regarded  when  food  is  taken  ? 


60  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGr,    AND    HYGIENE 

178.  Food  should  not  be  taken  immediately  after  severe  exer- 
tioiiy  either  of  the  body  or  mind  ;  for  all  ori^aiis  in  action  require 
and  receive  more  blood  and  nervous  fluid,  than  when  at  rest. 

Observation.  Tije  practice  of  students  and  accountants 
going  inuneiliately  from  severe  mental  labor  to  their  meals,  is 
a  pernicious  one,  and  a  fruitful  cause  of  indigestion  and  mental 
debility.  The  custom  of  farmers  and  mechanics  hurrying 
from  their  toil  to  the  dinner-table,  "to  save  time,"  —  which,  to 
say  the  least,  is  poor  economy,  —  does  much  to  cause  dyspepsia 
among  these  classes  in  community. 

179.  Severe  mental  or  physical  labor  should  not  be  entered 
upon  immediately  after  eating.  The  amount  of  blood  and 
nervous  fluid  supplied  to  the  stomach  and  alimentary  cana! 
during  the  digestion  of  food  is  increased,  and  a  deficiency  con- 
sequently exists  in  other  organs.  If  the  blood  is  diverted  from 
the  stomach  to  the  limbs  or  brain  by  active  exertion,  it  will  not 
only  cause  disease  of  the  digestive  organs,  but  chyle  will  not  be 
formed,  to  nourish  the  system. 

ISO.  Pure  air  is  necessary  to  give  a  keen  appetite  and  vigor- 
ous  digestion.  The  digestive  organs  not  only  need  the  stimulus 
of  blood,  but  they  absolutely  need  the  influence  of  pure  blood, 
which  cannot  exist  in  the  system,  except  when  we  breathe 
pure  air. 

Illustration.  A  manufacturer  stated  before  a  committee  of 
Ihe  British  parliament,  that  he  removed  an  arrangement  for 
ventilating  his  mill,  because  he  noticed  that  his  men  ate  much 
more  after  his  mill  was  ventilated  than  previous  to  admitting 
fresh  air  into  the  rooms.  The  apology  for  removing  the  venti- 
lators was,  that  he  could  not  afford  to  have  them  breathe 
pure  air. 


178.  Why  should  not  food  be  taken  after  severe  exertion  ?  AVhat  is  one 
cause  of  indigestion  among  students  and  accountants  ?  What  is  said  of 
farmers  and    mechanics    hurrying  from   their    toil  to    the   dinner-table  ? 

179.  Why  should  not  severe  exertion  be  made  immediately  after  eatint{  ? 

180.  Wtat  effect  has  pure  air  on  digestion  ?    Give  illustration. 


HYGIENE    OF    THE    DIGESTIVE    ORGANS.  61 

181.  Persons  should  abstain  from  eatings  at  least  three 
hours  before  retiring  for  sleep.  It  is  no  unusual  occurrenco 
for  those  persons  wlio  liave  eaten  heartily  irnmcchately  before 
retiring  for  sleep,  to  have  unpleasant  dreams,  or  to  be  aroused 
from  their  unquiet  slumber  by  colic  pains. 

Illustration.  A  healthy  farmer,  who  was  in  the  habit  of 
eating  one  fourth  of  a  mince  pie  immediately  before  going  to 
bed,  became  annoyed  with  unpleasant  dreams,  and,  among  the 
varied  images  of  his  fancy,  he  saw  that  of  his  deceased  father 
Becoming  alarmed,  he  consulted  a  physician,  who,  after  a 
patient  hearing  of  the  case,  gravely  advised  him  to  eat  halfoCa 
mince  pie,  assuring  him  that  he  would  then  see  his  grandfather. 

182.  When  the  eeneral  system  and  digestive  organs  are 
mfeebledt  mild^  unstimulating  food^  in  small  quantities,  should 
be  given.  In  the  instance  of  a  shipwrecked  and  famished 
mariner,  or  a  patient  recovering  from  disease,  but  a  small 
quantity  of  nourishment  should  be  given  at  a  time. 

183.  Water  and  most  fluids  are  removed  from  the  stomach 
in  a  very  few  mmutes,  by  the  action  of  the  veins.  In  instances 
of  great  feebleness,  the  body  can  be  strengthened  sooner  by 
liquid  than  by  solid  food. 

184.  When  travelling  in  coaches  or  cars,  the  stomach  is  not 
m  a-  state  to  digest  large  quantities  of  food.  When  food  is 
taken,  it  should  be  of  the  mildest  character,  and  small  in 
quantity. 

185.  To  prevent  disease,  it  is  as  necessary  that  the  alimen- 
tary canal  be  evacuated  regularly,  as  that  we  take  fcod  hito 
the  stomach  at  regular  periods. 

186.  Sitting,  standing,  and  walking  erect,  aid  in  keeping  the 
digestive  organs  healthy. 

181.  What  is  the  cflcct  of  eating  immediately  before  retiring  for  sleep  ? 
Haw  is  this  illustrated  in  the  case  of  a  healthy  farmer  ?  182.  IIow  should 
food  be  given  when  both  the  digestive  organs  and  general  system  are  en- 
feebled ?  183.  A\1iich  are  introduced  into  the  system  soonest,  fluids  or 
solid  food  ?  184.  What  is  said  in  regard  to  food  while  we  are  travelling  ? 
).86    Wh»t  positioB  of  the  body  aids  digestion  ? 

6 


W  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

THE    CIRCULATORY    ORGANS. 

187.  The  blood  is  distributed  lo  every  part  of  the  systeni. 
riicre  is  no  part  so  minute,  that  it  does  not  receive  this  circu- 
lating fluid.  This  distribution  is  effected  by  the  agency  of  the 
Heart,  Ar'te-ries,  Veins,  and  Cap'il-la-ries. 

ANATOMY   OF   THE    CIRCULATORY    ORGANS. 

188.  The  HEART  is  situated  in  the  chest,  between  the  lungs. 
(Fig.  53.)  It  is  a  double  organ,  or  has  two  sides,  called  right 
and  left,  which  are  separated  by  a  muscular  sep'tum,  or 
partition. 

189.  Each  side  of  the  heart  has  two  cavities.  The  upper 
cavity  is  called  the  au'ri-cle,  (deaf  ear.)  The  lower  cavity  is 
called  the  ven'tri-cle.  These  cavities  are  separated  from  each 
other  by  folds  of  membrane,  called  valves.     (Fig.  38.) 

190.  Between  the  auricle  and  ventricle  of  the  right  side  of 
the  heart,  there  are  three  valves,  called  tri-ciis'pid.  Between 
the  auricle  and  ventricle  of  the  left  side  of  the  heart,  there  are 
two  valves,  called  mi'tral. 

Observation.  To  obtain  a  clear  idea  of  the  heart  and  its 
valves,  it  is  recommended  to  examine  this  part  of  an  ox  or 
calf.      In  order  that  each  ventricle  be  opened  without  muti- 

187.  "What  is  said  of  the  distribution  of  the  blood  ?  How  is  it  effected  ? 
188—196.  Give  the  anatomy  of  the  circulatcry  organs.  188.  Describe  the 
heart.  189.  How  many  cavities  has  it  ?  What  is  the  upper  cavity  called  ? 
What  is  the  lower  cavity  called  ?  How  are  these  cavities  separated  ? 
190.  How  many  valves  between  the  right  auricle  and  ventricle,  and  what  are 
they  called  ?  How  many  valves  between  the  left  auricle  and  ventricle,  and 
«hat  are  they  called  t     How  can  an  idea  of  the  heart  be  obtained  i 


ANATOMY    OF    THE   CIRCULATORY    ORGANS. 


63 


latlng  the  parts  that  compose  its  internal  structure,  out  on  each 
side  of  the  septum  parallel  to  it.  This  may  be  easily  found 
between  the  ventricles,  as  they  diirer  in  thickness. 

191.  The  ARTERIES  are  the  vessels  that  carry  the  blood  fronj 
the  heart.  The  right  ventricle  of  the  heart  gives  rise  to  the 
ful'mo-na-ry  artery  ;  the  left  ventricle  to  a  large  artery,  called 
the  a-ort'a.  At  the  lommencemont  of  both  of  these  vessels 
are  valves,  and  from  their  shape,  they  are  called  sevi-i-lu'nar 

Fig.  38. 


Fig  38.  I,  The  descending  vein.  2,  The  ascending  vein.  3,  Tho  right  niiricle 
4  The  opening  between  the  ritiht  auricle  and  the  riglit  ventricle.  5,  The  right  ven 
tixle.  6,  The  tricuspid  val"es.  7,  The  pulmonary  artery.  8,  8,  The  branches  o? 
the  ptilinonary  artery  that  pass  to  the  right  and  left  lung.  9,  The  semihinar  valves  of 
ti.e  pulmonary  artery.  10,  The  division  between  the  two  ventricles  of  the  heart, 
li,  11,  The  pulmonary  veins.  12,  The  left  auricle.  13,  The  opening  between  tJio 
lei  auricle  and  ventricle.  14,  The  left  ventricle.  15,  The  mitral  valves.  16,  IC,  The 
aorta.    17,  The  semilunar  valves  of  the  aorta. 

Observotion.     The  parts  of  the  circulatory  organs  most  liable 
to  disease  are  the  valves  of  the  heart,  particularly  the  mitral. 

T91.  What  are  arteries  ?  Where  does  the  puhnonary  artery  take  ita 
ri«^  ?  The  aort?  ?  What  valves  ut  the  commencement  of  these  vessels  ? 
IVscribe  fig.  38.  What  parts  of  the  circulatory  organs  are  most  liable  tc 
dtv«a8e? 


T 


■^  *^ 


^' 


4' 


■f    '■ 


/ 


64 


ANATOMY,    irHYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENE. 


V^'Tien  tMese   mcmbmnous  folds  become  ossified  or  rupti'.rea 
ihe  blood  regurgitates,  and  causes  great  distress  in  breathing. 

192.  The  PULMONARY  ARTERY  conimcnccs  in  front  of  the 
aorta.  It  ascends  obliquely  to  the  under  surface  of  ihe  arch  of 
(he  aorta,  where  it  divicJcs  into  two  branches,  one  of  which 
passes  to  the  right,  the  other  to  tiic  left  lung.  This  artery 
conveys  the  dark-colored  or  "venous"  blood  to  the  lungs,  and, 
with  its  corresponding  veins,  establishes  the  pulmonic  circU' 
lalion. 


Fig.  39. 


Fig.  39.  t,  The  windpipe,  h,  The  heart,  d,  The  aorta,  p.  The  pulmonary 
aiiery.  1,  Tne  biancli  of  the  pulmonary  artery  that  divides  in  the  left  lung.  2,  The 
Dranch  that  divides  in  tlie  right  luni?. 

Tlie  divisions  of  this  artery  continue  to  divide  and  subdivide,  until  they  become  no 
larger  than  hairs  in  si/.c.  Tlie^^e  minute  vessels  pass  over  the  air-cells,  represented  by 
■mall  dark  points  around  the  margin  of  tlie  lungs. 


192.  Describe  the  pulmonary  artery.  "WTiat  is  the  function  of  this 
artery  ?  Explain  fig.  39.  What  is  said  of  the  divisions  of  the  pulmon»r.» 
trtery? 


ANATOMY    OF    THE    CIRCULATORY    ORGANS. 


QS» 


193.    The  AORTA  proceeds  from  the  left  ventricle  of  the 

heart  and  contains  the  pure  or  "arterial"  blood.     This  vessoi 

gives  off  branches,  which  divide  and  subdivide  as  they  advance 

until  they  are  distributed  to  every  part  of  the  body.     Thia 

artery,  with  its  corresponding  veins,  establishes  the  systemic 

circulation 

Fig.  40 


Fig  40.    The  aorta  and  its  branches,    a,  The  commencement  of  the  sottk. 
193.  Describe  the  aorta.    What  is  represented  by  fig.  40  ? 

6* 


66 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENE. 


1J4.  Tha  VEINS  are  the  vessels  which  return  the  blood  to 
the  auricles  of  the  heart,  after  it  has  been  circulated  by  the 
arteries  through  the  lungs  and  other  parts  of  ihe  body.  A 
certain  inter>'als,  they  are  furnished  with  valves,  which  allow 
the  blood  to  flow  toward  the  heart  only.  In  general,  they  arc 
nearer  the  surface  of  the  body  than  the  arteries. 

195.  The  CAPILLARIES  constitute  a  microscopic  net-work, 
and  are  so  distributed  through  every  part  of  the  body  as  to  ren- 
der it  impossible  to  introduce  the  smallest  needle  beneath  the 
skin  .vithout  wounding  several  of  these  fine  vessels.  They 
establish  the  communication  between  the  termination  of  the 
arteries  and  the  beginning  of  the  veins. 

196.  The  relation  of  the  capillaries  to  the  arteries  and 
veins,  is  illustrated  by  figs.  41  and  42. 


Fig.  41. 


Fig.  41.  An  ideal  view  of  a  p<.rtion  of  the  pulmonic  circulation.  1,  1,  A  branch 
•f  the  drtery  that  carries  the  impure  blood  to  the  lungs  3,  3,  Capillary  vessels 
t,  2,  A  vein  through  which  the  red  blood  is  returned  to  the  left  side  of  the  heart 

Fig.  42.  An  Ideal  view  of  a  portion  of  the  systemic  circulation  1,  i,  A  branch 
•f  the  aorta.  This  terminates  in  the  capillaries  3,  3.  2,  2,  A  vein  through  which 
the  Impure  blond  is  carried  to  the  right  side  of  the  heart. 


194  What  are  veins  ?  With  what  are  they  furnished  ?  195.  What  do 
the  Cftpillaries  constitute  ?  What  do  they  establish  ?  What  does  fig.  41 
represent?    Fig.  42? 


PRI&IOLOOY    or   THE   CIRCULATORY    OROANS.  67 


CHAPTER   XIV. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE   CIRCULATORY  GROANS. 

197.  The  walls  of  all  the  cavities  of  the  heart  are  composed 
of  muscular  fibres,  which  are  endowed  with  the  property  of  con- 
tracting and  relaxing,  like  other  parts  of  the  muscular  system 
The  contraction  and  relaxation  of  the  muscular  fibres  of  the 
heart  increase  and  diminish  the  size  of  its  ca/ities. 

198.  The  two  auricles  dilate  at  the  same  instant,  and  also 
contract  at  the  same  instant.  The  two  ventricles  cdhtract,  while 
the  auricles  dilate.  Thus  the  blood  is  forced  from  the  heart  to 
every  part  of  the  body,  and  received  again  on  its  return. 

199.  The  roTirse  of  the  blood  through  the  heart,  arteries, 
and  veins,  may  be  easily  comprehended  by  attention  to  fig.  43, 
which  gives  an  ideal  view  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 

209.  The  heart  aids  iu  forcing  the  blood  through  the  arte- 
ries, to  the  different  parts  of  the  body.  Every  time  the  heart 
contracts,  there  is  a  "  pulse,"  or  "  pulsation,"  in  the  arteries. 

Experiment.  Apply  the  fingers  upon  the  artery  at  the  wrist, 
at  two  different  points,  about  two  inches  apart ;  if  the  pressure 
be  moderately  made,  the  "pulse"  will  be  felt  at  both  points. 
Let  the  upper  point  be  pressed  firmly,  and  there  will  be  no 
pulsation  at  the  lower  point;  but  make  strong  pressure  upon 
the  lower  point  only,  and  the  pulsation  will  continue  at  the 
upper  point;  proving  that  the  blood  flows  from  the  heart,  in 
the  arteries,  to  different  parts  of  the  system, 

197—203.  Give  the  physiology  of  the  circulatory  organs.  197  What  do 
the  contraction  and  relaxation  of  the  muscular  walls  of  the  heart  produce  ? 
19^  What  is  said  of  the  contraction  and  dilatation  of  the  auricles  ?  Of 
the  ventricles  ?  200.  What  causes  the  "  pulse,"  or  •'  pulsation,"  in  the 
arterien  ?  How  is  it  proved  that  the  blood  flows  from  the  heart  in  thb 
sxteries  ? 


68  ANATOiMY,    PHYSlOLOUy,   AND    IIYaiENB. 

201.  The  frequency  of  the  pulse  varies  according  to  tht 
age,  sex,  and  degree  of  health.  In  adults,  it  is  usually  from 
seventy  to  seventy-five  "beats"  in  a  minute. 

202.  There  is  no  pulsation  in  the  veins,  and  the  return  of 
the  blood  to  the  heart  through  them  can  be  shown  by  the  fol- 
lowing experiments. 

Experiments  1st.  Press  firmly  on  one  of  the  veins  upon 
the  back  of  the  hand,  carrying  the  pressure  toward  the 
fingers ;  for  a  moment  the  vein  will  disappear.  On  removing 
the  pressure  of  the  finger,  it  will  reappear,  from  the  blood 
rushing  in  from  below. 

2d.  If  a  tape  be  tied  around  the  arm  above  the  elbow,  the 
veins  below  will  become  larger  and  more  prominent,  and  also  a 
greater  nunflber  will  be  brought  in  view.  At  this  time,  apj.Iy 
the  finger  at  the  wrist,  and  the  pulsation  of  the  arteries  still 
continues,  showing  that  ihe  blood  is  constantly  flowing  from 
the  heart,  through  the  arteries,  into  the  veins ;  and  the  increased 
size  of  the  veins  shows  that  the  pressure  of  the  tape  prevents 
its  flowing  back  to  the  heart. 

203.  From  the  right  ventricle  of  the  heart,  (2,  fig.  43?)  the 
dark,  impure  blood  is  forced  into  the  pulmonary  artery,  (3 ;) 
and  its  branches  (4,  5)  carry  the  blood  to  the  left  and  right 
lung.  In  the  capillary  vessels  (6,  6)  of  the  lungs  fixe  blood 
becomes  pure,  or  of  a  red  color,  and  is  returned  to  t'  left  auri- 
cle of  the  heart,  (9,)  by  the  veins,  (7,  8.)  From  the  left  auri- 
cle the  pure  blood  passes  into  the  left  ventricle,  (10.)  By  a 
forcible  contraction  of  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heait,  the  blood 
is  thrown  into  the  aorta,  (11.)  Its  branches  (12,  IS,  13)  carry 
the  pure  blood  to  every  organ,  or  part  of  the  body.  The 
divisions  and  sjbdivisions  of  the  aorta  terminate  in  capillary 
vessels,  represented  by  14,  14.  In  these  hair-like  vessels 
the  blood  becomes  dark-colored,  and  is  returned  to  the  right 
auricle  of  the  heart,  (1,)  by  the  ve'na  ca'va  de-scen' dens  (15) 
and  ve'na  cava  as-cen'dens^  ( 16.)  The  tricuspid  valves  ( 17)  pre- 
vent the  reflow  of  the  blood  from  the  right  ventricle  to  the  righi 


201.  What  varies  the  frequency  of  the  pulse  ?  202.  Is  there  pulsation 
in  the  veins  ?  How  is  it  proved,  by  experiment  1st,  that  the  blood  is 
returned  to  the  heart  by  the  veins  ?    By  experiment  2d  ? 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE   CIRCULATORY    ORGANS. 


69 


auricle.  The  semilunar  valves  ( 18)  prevent  the  blood  passing 
from  the  pulmonary  artery  to  the  right  ventricle.  The  mitral 
valves  (19)  prevent  the  flow  of  blood  from  the  left  ventricle  to 
the  left  auricle.  The  semilunar  valves  (20)  prevent  thr  ^eflow 
of  blt)od  from  the  aona  to  the  left  ventricle. 

Fig.  43. 


Noti^     From  fig.  43.  give  the  course  of  the  blood  thiuugh  th»  heart,  arte 
•^s,  and  veins,  or  from  anatomical  outline  plates  6  and  7. 


70  ANATOMY,    FHYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIEME. 


CHAPTER    XV. 

HYGIENE    OF   THE    CIRCULATORY    ORGANS. 

204.  The  clothing  should  he  loosely  worn.  To  have  good 
nealth^  the  blood  must  circulate  freely.  Consequently,  no  arti- 
cle of  apparel  should  be  worn  so  as  to  prevent  a  free  flow  of 
blood  through  every  organ  of  the  body. 

205.  Strings,  bands,  or  belts,  however  narrow,  should  not 
be  worn  so  tightly  as  to  cause  an  indentation  of  the  skin  of  the 
trunk,  or  extremities. 

Observations.  1st.  Inelastic  bands,  worn  upon  the  lower 
extremities,  are  a  frequent  cause  of  enlarged  veins  and  painful 
limbs.  2d.  The  fulness  and  the  crimson  tint  of  the  face,  gid- 
diness,  fainting,  and  many  derangements  in  the  functions  of 
differei-t  organs,  are  produced  by  pressure  upon  the  blood- 
ves.=els  of  the  trunk. 

206.  The  skin  should  be  kept  clean,  and  every  part  of  an 
equal  teinperature.  These  conditions  favor  free  and  vigorous 
circulation. 

Observation.  When  intending  to  ride  in  a  cold  day,  wash 
Uie  face,  hands,  and  feet,  in  cold  water,  and  rub  them  smartly 
with  a  coarse  towel.  This  is  far  better  than  to  take  spirits  into 
the  stomach,  to  keep  the  extremities  warm. 

207.  Muscular   exercise   is   important    in   maintaining    a 

204 — 214.  Give  the  hygiene  of  the  circulatory  organs.  204.  Why  should 
the  clothing  be  loosely  worn  ?  205.  What  is  said  of  bands  or  belts  ?  What 
is  the  effect  of  wearing  inelastic  bands  upon  the  lower  extremities  ?  What 
is  a  frequent  cause  of  giddiness,  faintness,  and  derangement  of  the  func- 
tions of  many  organs  ?  206.  In  what  condition  should  the  skin  be  kept? 
Give  observation.  207.  What  is  the  effect  of  muscular  exercise  apon  the 
circulatiou  uf  bluod  ? 


HYGIENE    OF    TH.S    CIRCULATORY    ORGANS  71 

nealthj    circulation.     The    muscles,   when    used,   force    the 
blood  more  rapidly  to  and  from  the  heart. 

Illustration.  The  coach-driver  and  teamster  throw  their 
arms  around  their  bodies  to  warm  them,  when  cold ;  because 
the  muscles  that  are  called  into  action  in  swingii.  g  the  arms, 
force  a  greater  quantity  of  blood  into  the  chilled  parts,  and 
n\ore  heat  is  produced. 

208.  Idle  men  and  women,  who  complain  of  cold  feet,  and 
take  "  warming  bitters  "  to  quicken  the  blood,  would  find  them- 
selves warmer  and  more  invigorated  by  culling  the  muscles  into 
action  in  the  mechanic's  shop,  or  the  kitchen,  or  in  some  active 
employment. 

Observation.  In  cold  weather,  when  travelling  in  cars,  the 
feet  will  not  become  chilled  so  readily  when  standing  as  when 
sitting.  Again,  the  feet  will  be  warmer  by  allowing  them  to 
swing,  instead  of  being  supported  the  whole  time,  because  tiie 
muscles,  called  into  action  in  swinging  them,  increase  the  cir- 
culation of  the  blood. 

209.  The  quality  and  quantity  of  the  blood  modify  the  action 
of  the  heart  and  blood-vessels.  If  this  fluid  is  abundant  and 
pure,  the  circulatory  vessels  act  with  more  energy  than  when 
it  is  deficient  in  quantity  or  defective  in  quality. 

Illustrations.  1st.  In  an  athletic  man,  whose  heart  beats 
forcibly,  and  whose  pulse  is  strong,  if  a  considerable  quantity  of 
blood  is  drawn  from  a  vein,  as  in  bleeding,  the  heart  will  beat 
feebly,  and  the  pulse  will  become  weak. 

2d.  When  the  blood  is  made  impure  by  inhaling  vitiated  air, 
the  action  of  the  heart  and  arteries  is  diminished,  which  pro- 
duces an  effect  similar  to  that  which  takes  piace  when  blood  ia 
drawn  from  a  vein. 

210.  When  large  blood-vessels  are  wounded   or  cut,  the 

Give  illustration.  208.  What  is  better  for  cold  feet  and  hands  than 
♦  warming  bitters  "  ?  Give  observation  209.  What  effect  have  the  quantity 
and  quality  of  the  blood  upon  the  circulatory  vessels  ?  Give  illustration 
1st.  Illustration  2d.  210.  What  is  necessary  when  large  blood-vesseU  aie 
wounded  or  cut  ? 


72 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 


flow  of  blood  must  be  immediately  stopped,  or  the  person 
will  soon  die.  If  a  large  artery  is  wounded,  the  blood  will  be 
thrown  out  in  jets,  or  jerks,  every  time  the  pulse  beats.  The 
flow  of  blood  can  be  stopped  until  a  surgeon  arrives,  *>4ther  by 
comp/esining  the  vessel  between  the  wound  and  the  heart,  or  by 
compressing  the  end  of  the  divided  artery  in  the  wound. 


Fig.  46. 


Fig.  44.  The  track  of  the  large  artery  of  the  ann  1,  The  collar-bone.  9, 10,  The 
•arge  artery  of  the  arm. 

Fig.  45.  B,  Tlie  manner  of  compressing  tlie  artery  near  the  collar-bone.  A,  The 
manner  of  compressing  the  large  artery  of  the  arm,  with  the  fingers.  C,  Th3  manner 
of  compressing  the  divided  extremity  of  an  artery  in  the  wound,  with  a  finger. 

21 1.  After  making  compression  with  the  fingers,  as  described 
and  illustrated,  take  a  piece  of  cloth  or  handkerchief,  twist  it 
cornerwise,  and  tie  a  hard  knot  midway  between  the  two  ends. 

"What  is  shown  by  fig.  44  ?  By  fig.  45  ?  211.  What  is  to  be  done  after 
comp'^essing  the  wound,  as  before  described  ? 


HYGIENE    OF    THE    CIRCULATORY    ORGANS. 


78 


riiis  knot  should  be  placed  over  the  artery,  between  the  wound 
and  the  heart,  and  the  ends  carried  around  the  Hmb  and  loosely 
tied.  A  stick,  five  or  six  inches  long,  should  bo  placed  under 
the  handkerchief,  which  should  be  twisted  until  the  knot  has 
made  sufficient  compression  on  the  artery  to  allow  the  removal 
of  the  fingers  without  a  return  of  bleeding.  Continue  the 
compression  until  a  surgeon  can  be  culled. 


Fig.  4G 


Fi-'.  47. 


Fig.  4C.     Tlie  nietliod  of  applying  tlie  knotted  Imndkerchiff  to  make  cotnpreastou  oa 
ihia  filter)'.     A,  IJ,  Tliu  track  of  the  larpe  artery  of  the  arm. 

TiS.  47.     A,  C,  The  track  of  the  lar^ic  artery  of  tlie  thigh.     15,  The  method  of  ap 
()lyiii^  the  kiuittcd  handkerchief  to  conipre.ss  thiM  artery. 

Observation.  When  an  artery  of  the  arm  is  cut,  elevalitig 
the  wounded  limb  above  the  head  will  tend  to  an  t  the  ilcv  of 
blood.  In  a  wound  of  a  lower  limb,  raise  the  fooi,  so  'lat  it 
shall  be  higher  than  the  hip,  until  the  bleeding  ceases. 

Illustration.  On  one  occasion,  the  distiti<j;uished  Dr.  Natliaa 
Smith  was  called  to  a  person  who  had  divided  one  of  'he  large 
arteries  below  the  knee.  After  trying  in  vain  to  find  the  I)leed- 
ing  vessel,  so  as  to  secure  it,  he  caused  the  foot  to  be  elevatd 

What  is   shown  by  figs.  46,  47  ?     Give  observation.     Relate   a  simple 
(Operation  by  Dr.  Nath.<n  Smith. 

7 


74 


ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,    AND   HYGIENE 


hiaher  than  the  hip.  At  the  first  instant,  the  blood  was  forced 
from  the  wound  about  twelve  inches;  in  a  minute,  it  was  dimin- 
ished to  three  or  four ;  and,  in  a  short  time,  the  bleeding  ceased. 
This  Dr.  S.  called  his  '•*■  great '''*  operation;  and  it  was  truly 
great  in  simplicity  and  science. 

212.  In  "  flesh  wounds,"  when  no  large  blood-vessel  ja 
divided,  wash  the  part  with  cold  water,  and,  when  bleeding 
has  ceased,  draw  the  wound  together,  and  retain  it  with  narrow 
strips  of  adhesive  plaster.  These  should  be  put  on  smoothly, 
and  a  sufficient  number  applied  to  cover  the  wound.  In  most 
:  .ances  of  domestic  practice,  the  strips  of  adhesive  plaster  are 
too  wide.  They  should  not  exceed  in  width  one  fourth  of  an 
inch.  Then  apply  a  loose  bandage,  and  avoid  all  ''  iiealmg 
salves,"  ointments,  and  washes. 


Fig.  48. 


Fig.  48.    The  manner  in  which  strips  of  adhesive  plaster  are  applied  to  wou.ids. 


213.  The  union  of  the  divided  parts  is  elfected  by  the  actioi; 
of  the  divided  blood-vessels,  and  not  by  salves  and  ointments. 
The  only  object  of  the  dressing  is  to  keep  the  parts  together, 
rnd  protect  the  wound  from  air  and  impurities.  Nature^  in  alt 
cases  of  wounds,  performs  h^r  own  cure.  Such  simple  incisions 
do  not  generally  require  a  second  dressing,  and  should  not  be 
opened  till  the  parts  are  healed.  In  removing  the  dressing 
from  a  wound,  both  ends  of  the  strips  of  plaster  should  be 
raised  and  drawn  toward  the  incision.  The  liability  of  the 
wound  re-opening  is  thus?  diminished. 

212.  How  should  *'  flesh  wounds  "  be  dressed  ?  213.  How  is  the  union  of 
the  divided  parts  eifected  ?  AVTiat  should  be  avoided  ?  Uow  should  tlw 
strips  of  plaster  be  r<^moved  from  a  wound  ? 


WYGIENE    CF   THE   CIRCULATORY    ORGANS.  75 

214.  Tne  proper  position  of  the  limbs  favors  the  unicn  of 
wounds.  If  the  wound  be  upon  the  front  part  of  the  leg, 
between  the  knee  and  ankle,  extending  the  knee  and  bending 
the  ankle  will  aid  its  closing.  If  the  wound  be  upon  the  back 
part  of  the  leg,  by  extending  the  foot  and  bending  the  knee, 
the  gaping  of  the  wound  will  be  diminished.  When  woimds 
occur  upon  tlie  trunk,  let  the  position  of  the  person  be  regarded 


Pig.  4a    a,  A,  Wounds  on  the  back  part  of  the  ami  and  fore-arm.    ft,  ft,  Wounds 
on  the  front  part  of  the  arm  and  fore-arm.    By  bending  the  elbow  and  wrist,  tho 
wounds  at  a,  a,  are  opened,  while  the  wounds  at  ft,  ft,  are  closed.    Were  the  arm  ex 
tended  at  the  elbow  and  wrist,  the  wounds  at  a,  a,  would  be  closed,  and  those  at  ft,  I 
would  be  opened. 

21^.  In  wounds  made  by  pointed  instruments,  as  a  nail,  or 
in  lacerated  wounds,  as  those  made  by  forcing  a  blunt  instrj- 
ment,  as  a  hook,  into  the  soft  parts,  there  will  be  no  dnect  and 
immediate  union.  In  these  cases,  apply  a  soothing  poultice,  as 
one  made  of  linseed  meal,  and  also  keep  the  limb  still.  It  is 
judicious  to  consult  a  physician  immediately,  in  punctured  or 
lacerated  wounds,  beciuse  they  often  induce  the  most  danger- 
ous diseases. 

214.  Does  the  proper  position  of  the  limbs  favor  the  union  of  wounds? 
216.  How  should  puncture  1  and  lacerated  wounds  be  dressed  ? 


*B  ANATOMY     PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   I^YOIENB 


CHAPTER    XVI. 

ABSORPTION. 

216.  Absorption  is  the  process  by  which  the  nutrient  por- 
lion  of  the  food  is  removed  from  the  alimentary  canal  to  bo 
conveyed  into  the  circulatory  vessels.  It  is  likewise  the  process 
by  which  the  particles  of  matter  that  have  become  injurious  or 
useless,  are  removed  from  the  mass  of  fluids  and  solids  of 
which  the  body  is  composed.  These  renovaimg  and  remov- 
ing processes  are  performed  by  two  sets  of  vessels. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  LYMPHATIC  VESSELS. 

217.  The  vessels  that  act  exclusively  for  the  growth  and 
renovation  of  the  system,  are  found  only  in  the  alimentary 
C'nal.     They  are  called   lac'te-als* 

218.  The  vessels  whose  sole  function  is  to  remove  paniclea 
of  matter  already  deposited,  are  called  lym-phat'ics.  The 
radicals,  or  commencement  of  the  veins,  in  many,  and  it  may 
be  in  all  parts  of  the  body,  perform  the  office  of  absorption 

Fig.  50.  A  reiiresentation  of  tlie  lymphatic  vessels  and  glands.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  The 
lymphatic  vcHstls  and  glands  of  the  lower  limbs.  7,  Lymphatic  glands.  8,  The 
connnencement  of  the  thoracic  duct.  9,  The  lymphatics  of  the  kidney.  10,  Of  the 
stomach.  11,  Of  the  liver.  12,  12,  The  lungs.  13,  14,  15,  The  lymphatics  and 
glands  of  the  arm.  16,  17,  18,  Of  the  face  and  neck.  19,20,  Large  veins.  21,  The 
thoracic  duct.    26,  The  lymphatics  of  the  heart. 


*  See  paragraph  142. 


216.  What  is  absorption  ?  217.  What  are  those  vessels  called  that  act 
exclusively  for  the  growth  and  renovation  of  the  body  ?  218 — 221.  Give 
the  anatomy  of  the  lymphatic  vessels.  218.  Name  those  vessels  that  remove 
the  atoms  already  deposited.  What  other  vessels  perform  the  office  of 
absorption  ?     What  does  fig.  uO  represent  ? 


ANATOMY    OP    THE    LYMPHATIC    VESSELS. 


77 


Fig.  60. 


7  • 


78  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    ITYGIKNK 

219.  The  LYMPHATIC  vessels  are  very  minute  at  their  com 
mencem^nt ;    so  much  so,  that  they  cannot  be  seen  withou 
the  aid  of  a  magnifying  glass.     As  they  proceed,  they  unite 
and  form  larger  trunks,  that  open  into  tlie  veins. 

220.  Lymphatic  vessels  are  found  in  every  part  of  the 
body,  except  the  brain,  yet,  it  is  supposed  they  exist  in  this  or- 
gan. The  knotted  appearance  of  these  vessels  is  owing  to 
llie  arrangement  of  their  internal  coats,  to  form  valves. 

22 J.  In  certain  parts  of  the  body,  us  the  neck,  these  ves- 
sels pass  through  small,  soft  bodies,  called  lymphatic  glands^ 
which  are  to  these  vessels  what  the  mesenteric  glands  are  to 
tne  lacteals. 

Observation.  Sometimes,  when  we  are  afflicted  with  a 
o^ld,  these  glands  in  the  neck  enlarge ;  they  are  usually 
called  "  kernels." 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  LYMPHATIC  VESSELS. 

222.  Though  the  lacteals  and  lymphatics  resemble  each 
otlicr  in  their  structure  and  termination,  yet  they  differ  as  to  the 
nature  of  the  fluids  which  they  convey,  as  well  as  the  nature  ot 
their  functions.  The  lacteals  open  into  the  small  intestine, 
and  possess  the  power  of  rejecting  all  substances  in  the  passing 
food  but  the  chyle. 

223.  The  lymphatics,  on  the  contrary,  not  only  imbibe,  or 
suck  up,  all  the  various  constituents  of  the  body,  both  fluid  and 
Bolid,  when  their  vitality  has  ceased,  but  they  absorb  foreign 
and  extraneous  substances  when  presented  to  their  mouths. 

Observations.  1st.  When  little  or  no  food  is  taken  into  the 
stomach,  life  is  supported  by  the  lymphatic  vessels  imbibing 

219.  Describe  the  lymphatic  vessels.  220.  Where  are  they  found  ?  To 
what  is  tne  knotted  appoarance  of  these  vessels  owing  ?  222 — 224  Give 
the  iisr  of  the  lyviphatic  vessels.  221.  What  are  lymphatic  glands?  Give 
observation.  222.  What  is  said  of  the  lacteals  and  lymphatics  ?  Give 
the  function  of  the  former.  223.  Give  the  use  of  the  lymphatics.  IIow 
ta  life  suppot  'ed  when  little  or  no  food  is  eaten  ? 


nTOIENE    OF   THE    LYMrilATIC    VESSKI.S.  79 

iho  fat,  and  roconvoying  it  into  the  circnl.ifory  vc«?so1s.  It  is 
the  removal  of  this  substance  which  causes  the  emficiation  of 
the  face  and  limbs  of  o  person  recovering  from  a  f«'ver.  In 
consumption,  the  txlreme  attenuation  of  tlie  l!mbs  is  caused  by 
the  absorption,  not  only  of  tlio  fat,  but  also  of  the  muscles  anU 
more  solid  parts  of  the  body. 

2d.  Animals  which  live  in  a  half  torpid  state  during  tho 
winter,  derive  their  nourishment  from  the  same  source.  In 
other  words,  we  may  say  the  starving  animal  lives  for  a  time 
upon  itself,  eating  up,  by  internal  absorption,  such  parts  of  tho 
body  as  can  be  spared,  under  urgent  necessity,  to  feed  these 
organs,  and  continue  those  functions  tliat  are  absolutely  essen- 
tial to  life. 

224.  The  most  important  absorbing  surfaces  are  the 
stomach,  intestines,  lungs,  and  skin.  Through  the  lungs, 
absorption  is  not  onlv    very  great,  but  extremely  rapid. 

Illustration.  In  inhaling  sulphuric  ether,  or  letheon,  it  is 
introduced  into  the  vessels  of  the  lungs  in  the  form  of  vapor, 
and  through  them  it  is  rapidly  conveyed  to  the  brain,  and  thus 
influences  the  nervous  system. 


HYGIENE  OF  THE  LYMPHATIC  VESSELS. 

225.  By  the  action  of  the  lymphatics,  substances  of  an  inju- 
rious, as  well  as  of  a  beneficial  character  may  be  conveyed 
into  the  system.  These  vessels,  under  certain  conditions,  are 
more  active  in  their  office  than  at  other  periods ;  and  i  is  of 
practical  utility  to  know  what  influences  their  action. 

228.    The  function  of  these  vessels  is  increased  by  moisture^ 

"WTiat  causes  the  extreme  atte.mation  of  the  limbs  in  consumption  ?  How 
do  those  animals  derive  their  nourishment  that  live  in  a  half  torpid  stf  te 
during  winter  ?  224.  What  are  the  most  important  absorbing  surface ;  ? 
How  is  letheon  introduced  into  the  system  ?  225 — 229.  Give  the  hygie^ie 
of  the  lymphatic  vessels.  225.  What  is  said  respecting  the  action  of  the 
lymphatic  ressels  ?    226.  What  influences  the  function  of  tliese  vessels  ? 


80  ANATOMY,    rnVSlOLOGV,    AND    HYGIENE. 

arid    lessened    hy  an  ^active   state   of  the   lacteah.     Obser 
vation  shows    that  the  ill-fcul,  and  those  persons  that  live  in 
marshy  districts,  contract  contagious  diseases  more  readily  than 
those  individuals  who   are  well   fed,  and  breathe  a  dry  and 
pure  air. 

227.  The  "(kin  and  the  apparel  of  nurses  and  watchers 
should  he  (Iran,  and  as  free  of  perspiration  as  possible.  The  air 
of  the  sick-room  should  ^so  be  dry.  The  observan  e  of  these 
conditions  tends  to  prevent  the  absorption  of  the  poisonous 
matter  of  contagious  diseases,  as  small-pox,  measles,  &c. 

Observation.  When  we  have  been  visiting,  or  aaending  on 
a  sick  person,  it  is  judicious  to  change  the  apparel  worn  in  the 
sick-room,  and  also  give  the  skin  a  thorough  bathing.  The  out- 
side garments,  also,  should  be  aired,  as  poisonous  matter  may 
have  penetrated  the  meshes  of  the  cloth. 

228.  The  stomach  should  he  supplied  with  food  of  a  nutrient 
and  digestible  character,  in  proper  quantities,  and  at  stated 
periods.  The  chyle  formed  from  the  food  stimulates  the 
lactcals  to  activity,  which  activity  is  attended  with  an  inactive 
p'atc  of  the  lymphatics  of  the  skin  and  lungs.  Thus  due  at- 
tention should  be  given  to  the  food  of  the  attendants  on  the 
sick,  and  the  children  of  the  family. 

Observation.  Many  individuals,  to  prevent  contracting  dis 
ease  that  may  be  comm\micated  from  one  person  to  another, 
use  tobacco,  either  chewed  or  smoked ;  and  sometimes  alco- 
liol,  with  decoctions  of  bitter  herbs.  These  substances  do  not 
diminish,  but  tend  to  increase  the  activity  of  the  lymphatics. 
Thus  they  make  use  of  the  means  by  which  the  poisonou* 
matter  formed  in  tlie  system  of  the  diseased  person,  may  be 
more  readily  conveyed  into  their  own. 

What  does  observation  show  ?  227.  "Why  should  the  skin  and  apparel 
of  nurses  and  watchers  be  as  free  of  perspiration  as  possible  ?  What  sug- 
gestion when  we  have  been  visiting  or  attending  on  the  sick  ?  228.  Why 
should  the  stomach  oe  supplied  with  food  of  a  nutrient  and  digestible 
character  ?  What  is  said  of  the  use  of  alcohol  or  tobacco,  in  preventing  th« 
bitroduction  of  the  poisonous  matter  of  contagious  diseases  ? 


BYOIF.NB   OF   THE    LYiMPIIATIC   VESSELS.  81 

229.  Absorption  hy  the  skin  is  most  vigorous  when  the  ex- 
ternal  layer  is  removed  by  vesication^  or  blistering.  Then, 
external  applications,  as  ointmtMita,  are  brought  in  imncdiate 
contact  with  the  orifices,  or  moullis,  of  the  lymphatics  of  tho 
skin,  and  by  them  rapidly  imbibed  and  circulated  through  tho 
ftystom.     The  same  results  follow,  if  iha  skin  is  only  j)unctured. 

Observation.  1st.  In  case  of  an  accidental  wound,  it  is  best 
immediately  to  bathe  the  part  thoroughly  in  pjre  water,  and  to 
avoid  all  irritating  applications.  In  some  instances,  it  would  be 
well  to  apply  lunar  caustic  immediately. 

2d.  When  shrouding  dead  bodies,  or  removing  the  skin 
from  animals  that  have  died  of  disease,  it  would  be  well  to 
lubricate  the  hands  with  olive-oil  or  lard.  This  aifords  pro- 
tection to  the  minute  portions  of  the  skin  from  which  ilie 
external  layer  may  be  removed. 

3d.  In  all  cases  where  there  is  an  ulcer,  or  bore,  the  p-xrt 
should  be  covered  with  something  impervious  to  fluids,  as 
couri-plaster,  before  exposing  the  system  to  any  animal,  vege- 
table, or  mineral  poison. 


'239   When  is  absorption  by  the  skin  most  Tigoroua  i    Oive  obMrvation 
Ist.    Obsenratioa  2d.    ObserTation  'M 


h 


B2  ANATOMY     PIIVSIOLOGY,   Ar4D   HYGIKNIL 


THAPTER    XVII. 

SECRETION. 

230.  In  tl  e  human  body  are  found  many  fluids  and  solids  of 
dissimilar  appearance  and  character.  These  are  produced  by 
the  action  of  organs  called  Se'cre-to-ry.  Some  of  these  organs 
are  of  simp''?  structure,  wliile  oiliers  are  ve.  y  coTipIicated  in 
their  arrangement. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  SECRETORY  ORGANS. 

231.  The  SECRETORY  ORGANS  are  of  three  kinds,  namely 
the  Ex-ha'fents^  Fol'li-cltn^  and  the  Glands. 

232.  The  exhalents  are  supposed  to  be  terminations  of  the 
arteries,  or  capillaries.  They  are  of  two  kinds,  external  and 
internal.  The  latter  terminate  on  the  surfaces  within  the  body 
and  the  former  upon  the  outside. 

Fig.  51. 


Fi^.  51.     A  secretorv  follitie.    An  artery  is  seen,  which  supplies  the  material  for  Iti 
eecretion.     Follicles  are  al3o  supplied  with  veins  iind  orgouic  nerves. 

233.  The  follicles  are  small  bags,  or  sacs,  in  the  deeper 
layer  of  the  skin  and  mucous  membrane.  The  pores  seen  on 
the  skin  are  the  outlets  of  these  bodies. 


230.  How  are  thp  fli..us  and  1 3lids  of  ♦he  5o(ly  .vod'jccd  ?  231—234.  Give 
the  anatomy  of  the  secretory  organs.  I.Jl.  Name  the  secretory  organs. 
232  Describe  tie  exhalents.  What  does  fig.  51  reprer «nt ?  233.  Define 
]oUicle&, 


PHYSIOLOGY    OP    THE    SECRETC  RY    ORGANS.  83 

234.  The  glands  are  the  chief  agent"?  of  secretion  in  the 
body.  They  are  formed  of  minute  arteries,  veins,  and  tubes, 
wound  together.  These  organs  vary  in  size  from  a  mustard- 
seed  to  th  t  of  the  hver,  which  weighs  from  two  to  four  pounds. 
Every  gland,  however  minute,  has  a  small  duct  for  collecting 
and  carrvin.f.'  off  the  secreted  fluid. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE   SECRETORY  ORGANS. 

235.  Secretion  is  one  of  the  most  obscure  and  mysterious 
functions  of  the  br'dy.  It  has  the  same  meaning  (physiologi- 
cally) as  separati  n.  Not  only  is  the  pro,>.ss  by  which  sul> 
stanccs  are  separated  from  the  blood,  called  secretion^  but  th** 
same  term  is  also  applied  to  substances  thus  separated. 


Fig.  53.  a  a,  A  iecretory  gland,  b,  b,  Minute  ducU  tLki  art  apitad  thrrmgh  the 
^iniidB.    These  coalesce  to  form  th«  main  duct,  c 

236.  All  the  fluids  of  the  body  arj  derived  from  the  blood, 
and  this  element,  when  distributed  to  the  different  glands  and 
follicles,  is  similar  in  composition  and  character:  but  the  fluids 
secreted  by  them,  vary  in  appearance  in  a  remarkable  degree. 
The  office  of  the  glands  is  principally  to  form  different  secro- 

234.  Whiit  is  said  of  the  glands  ?  Explain  fig.  52.  2;i'>— 287.  Crive  '.he 
physiology  of  the  ^cretory  orgmis.  23.5.  What  is  secretion  ?  236.  From 
what  are  all  the  fluid.s  of  the  body  dei-ved?  What  is  the  principal  office 
af  the  glands  ? 


84  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    IIVr.IENE. 

tions.  Thus  the  salivary  glatids  secrete  the  insipid  sahva;  the 
liver,  tlie  yellow,  ropy  bile ;  and  the  kidneys,  the  acrid  urine. 

2.'J7.  When  any  substance  wliich  is  not  demanded  for  nutri- 
tion, or  does  not  give  nouriq»ment  to  the  sy  tern,  is  taken  up  by 
the  lymphatic  vesbuls  vu<-\  conveyed  intD  the  blood,  it  is  dis- 
charged by  secretions. 

Tl/ustrafion.  A  few  years  since,  a  poor  inebriate  was  carried 
to  a  London  hospital  in  a  state  of  intoxication.  lie  lived  but  a 
few  hours.  On  examining  his  brain,  nearly  half  a  gill  of  fluid, 
strongly  impregnated  with  gin,  was  found  in  the  cavities  of  this 
organ.     This  was  secreted  from  the  vessels  of  the  brain. 


HYGIENE  OF  THE  SECRETORY  ORGANS. 

238.  Unless  the  secretions  are  regularly  maintained^  dis- 
ease  will  he  the  ultimate  result.  Let  the  secretions  from  the 
skin  be  suppressed,  and  fever  or  some  internal  inflammation 
will  follow.  If  tliebiie  is  impeded,  digestion  will  be  impaired. 
If  any  other  secretion  is  suppressed,  it  will  cause  a  derange- 
ment of  the  various  internal  organs. 

Ohservation.  Ardent  spirits  derange  tiie  secretions,  and 
change  the  structure  of  the  brain.  This  is  one  reason  why 
inebriates  do  not  live  to  advanced  age. 

239.  The  quantity  of  blood  injluences  the  character  of  the 
secretions.  If  it  is  lessened  to  any  great  extent,  the  "-icretiona 
will  be  lessened,  as  well  as  changed  in  character. 

Illustration.  When  a  person  has  lost  a  consider  .c  quantity 
of  blood,  tliere  is  a  sensation  of  thirst  in  the  throat,  attended 
with  a  cold,  pale,  dry  skin.     WHien  iTjaction  comes  on,  the 

237.  What  becomes  of  those  substances  which  are  taken  up  by  the 
lymphatics,  and  do  not  nourish  the  body  ?  How  is  this  illustrated  ? 
238 — 241.  Give  the  /ii/r/ic/w  of  the  secretory  organs.  238.  What  is  the  effect 
on  the  system  if  the  secretions  are  not  regularly  maintained  ?  What  ia 
a  reason  that  inebriates  do  not  live  to  an  advanced  age  ?  239.  "What  effect 
n  the  secfctions  when  the  quantitj  of  hlood  ia  lessened  ?  How  is  this 
illustrated  ? 


HYUIENE    01     THE    SECllGru.l'V    uKvJA^S  86 

perspiration    is   cold,   attended   with    nausea,   and   sometimes 
vomiting. 

240.  77ie  amount  of  action  modifies  the  condition  of  the 
secretory  organs.  When  a  secretory  offran  is  excessively 
stimulated,  its  vigor  and  energy  are  reduced.  The  subsequent 
debility  may  be  so  great  as  to  suppress  or  destroy  its  functional 
power. 

Illustrations.  1st.  In  those  sections  of  the  country  where  flax 
is  spun  on  a  "  foot-wheel,"  the  spinners  sometimes  moisten  tho 
thread  with  saliva.  This  seems  to  operate  economically  for  a 
lime,  but  debility  of  the  salivaiy  organs  soon  follows,  and  they 
are  incapfible  of  supplying  saliva  sufficient  to  moisten  the  food, 
producing,  in  a  short  time,  disease  of  the  digestive  organs 

2d.  The  habit  of  continual  spitting,  which  attends  the  chew- 
ing of  tobacoo  and  gums,  induces  debility,  not  only  of  the 
salivary  glands,  but  of  the  system  generally. 

241.  The  secretions  are  much  influenced  by  mental  emo- 
tions. If  we  smell  savory  food,  there  wili  be  an  increased  flow 
of  saliva  ;  if  we  hear  the  intelligence  of  the  death  of  a  cherished 
friend,  the  tear  will  quickly  coai.se  down  the  cheek.  • 

Observation.  Such  is  the  nice  sympathy  which  exists  be- 
tween diflerent  parts  of  the  body,  that  in  the  evenings  of  the 
warm  season,  a  chill  upon  the  impressible  skin  that  suppresses* 
the  perspiration,  is  frequently  followed  by  a  diarrhoea,  dysen- 
tery, or  cholera  morbus.  These  can  be  prevented  by  avoiding 
the   chill.     An   efficient    means  of  relief,  is,  immediately  to 

restore  the  skin  to  its  proper  action. 

5 

240.  What  is  the  effect  if  a  secretory  organ  is  excessively  stimulated  ? 
How  is  this  effect  illustrated  by  the  use  of  the  saUvary  glands  ?  241.  Door 
the  state  of  the  mind  influence  the  secretions  ?  What  is  said  of  tho  sym- 
pathy between  different  parts  of  the  body  ? 

8 


R6  ANATOTiY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

NUTRITION. 

212.  The  blood  is  the  nutritive  fluid  of  animals.  It  i's  com. 
posed  of  two  parts  —  a  watery  fluid,  called  se'rum^  and  a  solift 
portion,  called  co-ag'u-Ium,  (clot.) 

Observation.  That  portion  of  the  serum  which  remains  fluid 
after  coagulation  by  heat  has  taken  place,  is  called  se-ros'i-tt/. 
It  is  more  abundant  in  the  blood  of  old,  than  in  that  of  young 
animals  ;  and  it  forms  the  "  red  gravy  "  in  roasted  meats. 

243.  The  blood  is  not  necessarily  red.  It  may  be  white,  as 
m  the  fish ;  .transparent,  as  in  the  insect ;  or  yellowish,  as  in 
the  reptile.  There  is  no  animal  in  which  the  blood  is  red  in  all 
parts  of  the  body.  The  ligaments  and  tendons,  in  man,  are  not 
supplied  with  red,  but  with  white  blood. 

244.  Nutrition  is  the  vital  act  by  which  the  different  parts 
of  the  body  renew  the  materials  of  which  they  are  composed. 
Digestion,  circulation,  absorption,  and  respiration,  are  but  sepa- 
rate links  in  the  chain  of  nutrition,  which  would  be  destroyed 
by  the  absence  of  any  one  of  them. 

245.  The  nutritive  process  is  a  kind  of  secretion,  by  which 
particles  of  matter  are  separated  from  the  blood,  and  conveyed 
with  wonderful  accuracy  to  the  appropriate  textures,  or  parts 
of  the  body. 

246.  The  function  of  the  nutrient  vessels  antagonize  those 
of  absorption  ;  while  one  system  is  constructing,  with  beautifu! 

242.  What  is  the  nutritive  fluid  of  animals?  Of  what  is  it  composed? 
Wliat  forms  the  red  gravy  in  roasted  meat  ?  213.  Wliat  is  said  of  the  color 
of  the  blood?  244 — 248.  W/iat  remarks  respecting  nutrition*  244.  What 
ia  nutrition  ?  24.5.  Wliat  is  said  of  the  nutrit-ve  process  ?  246.  What  can 
you  say  of  the  function  of  the  nutrient  vessel*.  ? 


NuiniTioN.  87 

precision,  tlie  animal  frame,  the  other  is  diligently  employed 
in  pulling  down  this  complicated  structure.  But  amid  this 
simultaneous  renovation  and  decay,  the  form  and  beauty  of  the 
organs  are  preserved. 

Ohsenmtion  This  ever-changing  state  of  the  body  is  shown 
by  giving  animals  colored  matter,  mixed  with  their  food,  which 
in  a  short  time  tinges  their  bones  with  the  same  color  as  the 
matter  intrcHuced.  Let  it  be  withdrawn,  and  in  a  few  days 
the  bones  will  assume  their  former  color  —  evidently  from  the 
eflects  of  absorption.  The  changeful  state  of  the  body  is  fur 
Iher  shown,  by  the  losses  to  which  it  is  subjected ;  by  the 
necessity  of  aliment;  by  the  emaciation  which  follows  absti- 
nence from  food. 

247.  The  renewal  of  every  part  of  the  body  is  not  perfected 
merely  by  the  passage  of  the  blood  through  the  arteries  of  the 
systemic  circulation,  but  by  the  smallest  capillary  vessels, 
called  the  nutrient  arteries. 

248.  "  As  the  blood  goes  the  round  of  the  circulation,  the 
nutrient  capillary  vessels  select  and  secrete  those  parts  which 
are  similar  to  the  nature  of  the  structure,  and  the  other  portions 
pass  on;  so  that  every  part  takes  up  and  converts  to  its  own 
use  the  very  principles  which  it  requires  for  its  growth  ;  or,  in 
other  words,  as  the  vital  current  Uj.pioaches  each  organ,  the 
particles  appropriate  to  it  feel  its  attractive  force,  —  obey  it, — 
quit  the  stream,  —  mingle  with  the  substance  of  its  texture, — 
and  are  changed  into  its  own  true  and  proper  natuie." 

Illustration.  When  a  bone  is  broken,  or  a  ner>e  wounded, 
minute  vessels  shoot  out  from  the  living  parts,  and  immediately 
commence  their  operations,  by  depositing  bony  matter,  where  it 
IS  required  to  unite  fractured  bones,  and  nervous  substance  to 
heul  the  wounded  nerve. 

Give  a  proof  of  thr   over-chansiiif;  stntc  of  the  bod) .     Give  other  in 
stances  illui;trative  of  the  chaiigcfiil  state  oi  tlio  body.     247.   By  what  ves- 
sels is  the  reiie\^l  of  every  part  of  the  body  perfeitcd  ?    248.  What  is  said 
of  the  office  of  the  rmtrieiit  capillary  vessels  .'     When  a  bone  is  fractured, 
»i  what  pro'jess  is  it  hcalcd  ? 


88 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENK. 


Fig.  53. 


I 


Fig.  .^.  A  front  view  <iftlie  organs  within  llie  rhest  and  alidnrncn.  1,  1,  1,  I,  Th« 
muacles  of  the  chest.  2,2,2,3,  'I'he  rihs.  :<,  .1,  3,  'I'he  upper,  middle,  ami  lower 
lobes  of  the  Jiglit  lung.  4,  4,  The  <ohes  of  the  lef.  lung.  5,  The  ri^'^ht  ventricle  of 
the  heart.  G,  The  left  ventricle.  7,  The  right  auricle  of  the  heart,  8,  The  left  ami 
cle.  9,  The  pulmonary  artery.  10,  The  aorta.  11,  The  vena  sava  dcscendena. 
12,  The  trachea.  13,  The  OBsophagns,  14,  14,  14,  14,  The  pleura.  15,  15,  15,  Tha 
diaphragm  16,  16,  The  right  and  left  lobe  of  the  liver.  17,  Tlie  gall-cyst.  18,  Th« 
stomach  26,  The  spleen.  19,  19,  The  duodenum.  20,  The  ascending  colon. 
21,  The  transverse  colon.  25,  The  descending  colon.  22,  22,  S,  22,  The  small  In 
t««tine8.  23,  23,  7Ae  abdominal  walls  turned  down.  24,  The  thoracic  iuct,  openinf 
•nto  the  left  subclavian  vein,  (27.) 


ANATOMY  CF  THE  RESPIRATORY  ORGANS.        89 


CHAPTER    XIX. 

THE   RESPIRATORY    ORGANS. 

219  The  nutrient  portion  of  the  food  is  poured  into  the 
vein  at  tlie  lower  part  of  the  neck,  and  is  carried  to  the  right 
cavities  of  the  heart.  The  fluid  in  these  cavities  consists  of  the 
3hyle  mixed  with  the  venous  blood.  Neither  of  these  two 
elements  is  fitted  to  promote  the  growth  or  repair  the  waste  of 
the  body.  They  must  be  subjected  to  a  process,  by  whi.'h  the 
first  can  be  converted  into  blood,  and  the  second  freed  of  its 
impurities,  (carbonic  acid  and  water.)  This  is  effected  by 
the  Respiratory  Organs. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  llESriRATORY  ORGANS. 

250.  The  organs  of  respiration  are  the  Lungs^  (lights;) 
*he  Tra'clie-a,  (wind-pipe ;)  the  Bronch'i-a,  (subdivisions  of 
tlie  trachea ;)  and  the  Air  Ves'i-cles^  (air-cells  at  the  extrem- 
ities of  the  bronchia.)  The  Di'a-phragm,  (midriff;)  ribs,  and 
several  muscles,  also  aid  in  the  respiratory  process. 

251.  The  LUNGS  are  conical  organs,  one  on  each  side  of  the 
chest,  embracing  the  heart,  and  separated  from  each  other  by  a 
membranous  partition.  The  color  of  the  lungs  is  a  pinkish  gray, 
mottled,  and  variously  marked  with  black.  They  are  com- 
posed of  air-cells  and  tubes,  beside  many  small  blood-vessels. 

252.  Each  lung  is  surrounded  by  a  membrane,  called   the 

249.  What  f  \ids  are  conveyed  into  the  right  cavities  cf  the  heart  ?  What 
is  necessary  before  they  can  be  adapted  to  the  wants  of  the  body  ?  By  what 
organs  are  these  changes  effected  ?  250 — 256.  Gii'e  the  anatomy  of  th» 
espiratory  organs.  2.'30.  Name  the  respiratory  organs,  WTiat  organs  also 
aid  in  the  respiratory  process  ?  251.  Describe  the  lungs.  2.52.  Describe 
the  pleura. 

8» 


90  ANATOMY,    niYSIOLOGY,    AND    n\'OIENX. 

r 

pleura^  wliicli  not  only  surrounds  those  organs,  but  is  reflected 
upon  the  walls  of  the  chfst.  The  lungs,  liowever,  are  on  the 
outside  of  the  pleura,  in  the  same  way  as  the  head  is  on  tlie 
outside  of  a  cap  doubled  upon  itself. 

Observation.  When  this  membrane,  tliat  covers  the  lunTs, 
and  also  lines  the  chest,  is  inflamed,  the  disease  is  called 
"  pleurisy." 

SoS.  The  TRACHEA  is  situated  in  the  front  part  of  the  neck, 
and  extends  from  the  mouth  to  tlie  lungs.  It  is  composed  of 
cartilaginous  rings,  which  are  very  elastic. 

254.  The  bronchia  are  the  divisions  of  the  trachea  at  its 
lower  extremity,  behind  the  upper  part  of  the  heart.  One 
bmnch  r^isses  to  the  right  lung,  and  the  other  to  the  left. 
These  brinches,  upon  entering  the  lung,  divide  into  an  almost 
infinity  of  smaller  branches. 

IHustratinn.  The  trachea  may  be  compared  to  the  trunk  of 
a  tree ;  the  bronchia  to  two  large  branches ;  the  subdivisions  of 
the  bronchia  to  the  branchlets  and  twigs ;  the  air-cells  to  the 
buds  seen  on  the  twigs  in  the  spring. 

255.  The  air-cells  are  very  small  sacs,  or  bladders,  at  the 
end  of  the  minute  divisions  of  the  bronchia.  Their  walls  are 
extremely  thin,  the  interior  of  which,  as  well  as  the  trachea 
and  bronchia,  are  lined  by  mucous  membrane.  These  cells 
are  variable  in  size,  and  are  most  numerous  in  the  middle  and 
lower  part  of  the  lungs. 

Ohserration.     When  the  mucous  membrane  of  a  few  of  the 

larger  branches  of  the  wind-pipe  is  slightly  inflamed,  it  is  called 

a  "  cold ; "  when  the  inflammation  is  greater,  and  extends  to  the 

lesser  air-tubes,  it  is  called  bronchitis.     Coughing  is  a  violent 

expulsory  effort,  by  which  air  is  suddenly  forced   through  the 

bronchia  and  trachea  to  remove  offending  matter. 

» 

"WTiat  is  tho  disease  called  when  this  membrane  is  inflamed  ?  253.  De- 
sciioe  the  trachea.  2'54.  What  are  the  bronchia?  To  what  may  tlie 
trachea  and  branches  be  compared  ?  2'5o.  Describe  the  air-cells.  Wh«re 
are  tlicy  tht  most  numerous  ?  Mention  some  diseases  of  the  membrane 
that  lines  the  bronchia. 


ANATOMY  OF  THE  KESPIRArORY  ORGANS. 


d1 


Observation.  Tho  structure  of  the  tracliea  nnfl  liinps  may 
bo  illustrated  by  taking  those  parts  of  a  calf  or  sheep,  and 
.nflating  the  bronchial  tubes  by  forcing:;  air  into  the  wind-pipe 
V'\th  a  pipe  or  quill.  Tho  internal  structure  may  then  bo 
seen  by  opening  tho  dillbrent  parts. 


Fig.  64. 


Fig.  54.  A  representation  of  the  larynx,  trachea,  bronchia,  and  air-cells  1,  1 , 1,  An 
luitline  of  the  right  lung.  2,2,2,  An  outline  of  the  left  lung,  3,  Tho  larjnx. 
i,  The  trachcii.  .5,  The  right  hronchial  tube.  6,  The  left  bronchial  tube.  7,  7,  7, 
P,  8,  8,  Bronchial  tubes  of  riglit  and  left  lung.    9,  9,  9,  9,  9,  9,  Air-colls. 

256.   The  diaphragm  is  a  flexible,  circular  partition,  that  sep- 
antes  the  respiratory  from  the  digestive  organs,  and  the  chest 


How  can  the  structure  of  the  trachea  and  lungs  be  illustrated  ?     256.  De- 
scribe the  diaphragm. 


92 


ANATOMY,    niYSIOLOGV,    AND   IIYPWENE. 


from  tlje  alHlomcn.  Its  margin  is  attached  to  the  spina!  column 
the  sternum,  and  cartilages  of  the  Utwer  ribs.  In  a  state  of  re« 
pose,  Its  centre  rises  into  the  chest  in  the  form  of  an  arch. 
When  air  is  forcibly  expelled  from  the  lungs,  its  upper  point 
reaches  as  high  as  I  he  fourth  rib.  It  is  depressed  as  low  as  the 
seventh  rib,  when  air  is  drawn  into  the  lungs. 


Fig.  55. 


Fig.  56. 


Fig  55i  A  section  of  tlie  clicst  when  the  lungs  are  inflated.  1,  The  diaphragm. 
a.  The  muscular  walls  of  the  abdomen. 

Fig.  .W.  A  section  of  the  cheai  when  the  lungs  are  ccmtrnrted.  1,  The  diaphragm, 
in  common  expiration.  2,  2,  The  muscular  walls  of  the  ahdomnn.  3,  The  positioa 
of  the  diaphragm  in  forced  expiration. 

These  engravings  show  the  dinphrngm  to  he  more  convex,  and  the  walls  of  tha 
abdomen  more  flattened,  when  the  lungs  are  collapsed,  than  when  they  are  inflatCo. 


What  is  its  form  when  not  in  action  ?  How  high  does  its  central  poition 
rise  in  forced  expiration  ?  How  low  does  it  descend  when  air  is  drawn  into 
the  lungs  ?    What  do  figs.  55  and  56  illustrate  ? 


I'UYHIOLOUY    OF    illE    RESPlRATORy    OIIGANS.  93 


CHAPTER    XX. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    RESPIRATORY 

ORGANS. 

257.  Respiration,  or  brenthinjjj,  is  that  process  by  which 
air  is  drawn  into  tliu  kings  and  expelled  from  ihein.  The  prin- 
cipal object  in  breathing,  in  animals,  is  to  free  the  dark  blood 
of  one  of  tiie  princi|)ai  substances  that  com[)ose  the  old  and 
useless  particles  of  the  body. 

258.  When  air  is  drawn  into  the  lungs,  the  muscular  margin 
of  the  diaphragm  contmcts,  which  depresses  its  central  portion ; 
the  chest  is  then  enlarged  at  the  expense  of  .'he  abdomen.  At 
the  same  time  that  the  diaphragm  is  depresv-ed,  the  ribs  are 
thrust  forward  and  upward  by  means  of  nmscles  placed  be- 
tween and  on  them.  Thus  the  chest  is  enlarged  in  every 
direction. 

259.  The  lungs  follow  the  variations  of  capacity  in  the  chest, 
expanding  their  air-cells  when  tl»e  latter  is  enlarged,  and  con- 
tracting when  the  chest  is  diminished.  Thus,  when  the  chest 
Is  expanded,  the  lungs  follow,  and  consequently  a  vacuum  is 
produced  in  their  air-cells.  The  air  then  rushes  through  the 
mouth  and  nose  into  the  trachea  and  its  branches,  and  fills  the 
vacuum  as  fast  as  it  is  made.  This  mechanical  process 
constitutes  inspiration. 

260.  After  the  expansion  of  the  chest,  the  muscles  that  ele- 
vated the  ribs  relax,  together  with  tiie  diai)liragm.  The  (ilas- 
ticity  of  the  cartilages  of  the   ribs  depresses   tliom,  and  the 

257 — 266    Give  the  vsc  of  the  respiratory  orrjan.i.    207.  Mliat  is  rcspira 
tion?     What  is  the  principal  objrct  in  breathing  ?     2-5S.    Dpsrribe  how  the 
chest  is  enlarged  in  respiration  ?     'L'i'^.   Do   tlic  lungs  follmv  the  variations 
uf  capacity  in  the  chest  ?     What  constitutes  inspiration  ?     260.  How  is  the 
air  expelled  I'loiu  the  lungs  ? 


•maa^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-S) 


V 


// 


:/ 


5r     ^/^ 


1.0     Iritt  IIIIIM 


I.I 


'"  lift 

■^       140 

U2      Mb 


1.25  ! 


1.4 


M 

2.2 

III  2.0 

1.6 


V] 


<^ 


/i 


// 


^3 


w/    ""^  "^' 


'^' 


'/ 


"%, 


Photographic 

Sdences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  NY.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


V 


\ 


a^ 


^^V^ 


%^^\.  ^r^^  WrC<^' 


<i3 


^ 
^ 


'Q) 


rt^ 


94 


ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AJiD   HYGIENE. 


cavity  of  the  cliest  is  diminished,  attended  by  tho  sxpulsion  of 
a  portion  of  the  air  from  the  lungs.  At  the  same  time,  the 
muscles  that  form  the  front  walls  of  the  abcbminal  cavity,  con- 
tract and  press  the  alimentary  canal,  stomach,  and  liver,  up- 
ward against  the  diaphragm  ;  this,  being  relaxed,  yields  to  llie 
pressure,  rises  upward,  and  presses  upon  the  lung£;  which  re- 
treat before  it,  and  another  portion  of  uir  is  expelJed  from  theso 
or^^uns.     This  process  is  called  expiration. 

Fig.  67. 


Fig.  57.  A  Tront  view  of  the  chest  and  abduineii  in  respiration.  1,  1,  The  poeitioB 
of  the  w'ulls  of  tile  cliest  in  inspirntion.  2,  2,  2,  The  [losition  of  the  diaphragm  in 
Inspiration.  3,  3,  The  position  of  the  walls  of  the  chest  in  expiration.  4,  4,  4,  The 
pouition  of  'ho  dinphrugin  in  expirntion.  5,  5,  The  position  of  the  walls  of  U\e  abdo- 
men in  inspiration.    6,  6,  The  position  of  the  walls  of  the  abdomen  in  expiration. 

261.   Thus  it  is  obvious  that  the  enlargement  of  the  cheSt, 
or  inspiration,  is  produced  in  two  ways — 1st.   By  the  d«pres- 


What  does  this  constitute  ?    Explain  fig.  57. 
Jk«  cheat  enl  uged  i    Name  them. 


261.  In  how  many  vays  is 


PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    RESPIRATOHY    ORfJAJMS.  95 

xon  of  the  central,  arched  portion  of  the  diaphragm.  2d  By 
the  elevation  of  the  ribs.  On  the  contrary,  the  contraction  of  the 
chest,  or  expiration,  is  produced  by  the  depression  of  the  riba 
and  elevation  of  the  central  part  of  the  diaphragm.  These 
movements  are  successive  during  life,  and  constitute  res- 
piration. 

Experiment.  Pjace  the  ear  upon  the  chest  of  a  person,  and 
a  murmuring  sound  will  be  heard,  somewhat  like  the  soft  sigh- 
ings  of  the  wmd  through  forest  trees.  This  sound  is  caused 
by  the  air  rushing  in  and  out  of  the  lungs,  and  is  peculiarly 
distinct  in  the  child. 

262.  As  before  mentioned,  the  dark,  impure  blood,  that 
passes  from  the  heart  to  the  lungs,  is  unfit  to  sustain  the  vita) 
action  of  the  various  organs  of  the  body.  Its  impurities  must 
be  removed.  When  this  is  done,  the  blood  loses  its  blackish 
red  color,  and  becomes  of  a  bright  scarlet  red. 

263.  The  dark  color  of  the  blood  is  owing  to  the  presence 
of  carbonic  gas.  This  is  formed  in  the  blood-vessels  by  the 
union  of  carbon  (the  principal  element  of  the  dead,  waste 
atoms)  and  oxygen. 

264.  There  is  also,  mixed  with  the  dark  blood,  hydrogen, 
which,  when  united  with  oxygen,  forms  water.  Both  carbon  and 
hydrogen  are  supplied  to  the  blood  through  the  food.  They 
are  carried  out  of  the  system  not  only  by  the  lungs,  but  by  the 
skin  and  othei*  organs. 

Observation.  The  presence  of  carbonic  acid  and  watery 
vapor  in  the  expired  air,  can  be  proved  by  the  following 
experiments.  1st.  Breathe  into  lime-water,  and  in  a  few 
minutes  it  will  become  of  a  milk-white  color.  This  is  owing 
to  the  carbonic  acid  of  the  breath  unitmg  witli  the  lime, 
forming  the  carbonate  of  lime. 

How  is  it  conlraoted  ?  Wliat  do  these  successive  movements  cob- 
■titute  ?  Give  an  experiment,  262.  What  change  must  be  made  in  the 
blood  before  it  can  sustain  Mfe  ?  263.  To  what  is  f>»e  dark  color  of  the 
blood  owing?  Where  is  tais  gas  formed?  264.  What  element  beside 
•■rbon  la  found  in  the  bluod  ?    What  dues  it  form  w^en  united  with  oxygen  ? 


90  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   /ND   HYGIENE. 

2d.  Breathe  upon  a  cold,  dry  mirror,  for  a  few  minutes,  and 
it  will  be  covered  with  moisture.  This  is  condensed  vapor 
from  the  lungs.  In  warm  weather,  this  watery  vapor  is  invisible 
ill  the  expired  air  ;  but,  in  a  cold,  dry  morning  in  winter,  the  suc- 
cessive jets  of  vapor  issuing  from  the  mouth  and  nose  are 
BufTiciently  obvious. 

265.  Atmospheric  air,  or  tha  which  fills  the  air-cells  of  the 
lungs,  is  composed  of  two  gases,  ox'y-gen  and  ni'tro-gen.  Oxy- 
gen has  the  property  o!  supposing  life,  while  nitrogen  alone 
would  destroy  it.  But  combined  with  the  former  gas,  it  serves 
to  neutralize  the  otherwise  irritating  action  of  the  oxygen. 


Pig.  58.    1,  .-  bronchial  tube   divided    into   three   branches.     2, 2, 2,  Air  cells. 

3,  Branches  of  the  puhnona/y  artery,  that  spread  over  the  a.r-cells.    Through  the 
pulmonary  artery,  the  dark,  impure  blood  is  carried  to  the   xir-cells  of  the  lungs. 

4,  Rranciies  of  the  pulmonary  vein,  that  commence  at  the  minutt^  terminations  of  the 
pulmonary  artery.  Through  the  pulmonary  vein,  the  red  blood  is  returned  to  the  heart. 

266.  We  will  now  pass  to  the  change  which  the  air  effects 
when  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  blood  in  the  lungs.  As  the 
impure  blood  is  passing  in  the  minute  vessels  over  the  air-cells, 
the  oxygen  passes  through  th^  extreme  thin  coats  of  the  air- 
cells  and  blood-vessels,  and  unites  with  the  blood.  At  the  same 
time,  the  carbonic  acid  and  watery  vapor  leave  the  blood,  and 
pass  through  the  coats  of  the  blood-vessels  and  air-cells,  and 
irix  with  the  air  in  the  cells.     These  are  expelled  from  the  air- 

^ow  are  these  elements  supplied  to  the  blood  ?     How  may  the  presonco 

o.     Trbonic  acid  in  the  expired  air  be  proved  ?    The  presence  of  watery 

vapor  ?    265.  Of  what  is  the  air  composed  "*    "What  property  has  oxygen  ? 

Has  nitrogen  ?    266.  Explaiu  how  the  blood  is  changed  by  the  action  of 

oe  air. 


■-«s^: 


PHVSIOLOGY    OF    THE    RESPIRATORY    ORGANS. 


97 


cells  every  time  we  breathe.     This  interchange  of  gases  pro- 
duces the  change  in  the  color  of  the  blood. 

Eicperimenl.  To  show  that  gases  may  be  interchanged 
through  membranes,  fill  a  bladder  with  dark  blood  drawn  from 
any  ^nimal.  Tie  the  bladder  closely,  and  suspend  it  in  the 
air.  In  a  few  hours,  the  blood  next  the  membrane  will  have 
become  of  a  bright  red  color.  This  is  owing  to  the  oxygen 
from  the  air  passing  through  the  bladder,  and  unit>»>g  with  the 
blood,  while  the  carbonic  acid  has  escaped  through  ihr  mi^^t*. 

branc. 

Fig.  69. 


Pif  .59.  An  ideal  view  of  the  pulmonary  cirriilntion.  1,  1,  The  lipht  luuR. 
2,  a,  The  left  lung.  3,  The  tiiichea.  4,  The  hplit  hronrhiai  tube.  5,  Tttti  U'tt 
bronchial  tube.  6.  C,  6,  G,  Air-rells.  7,  The  right  auricle.  8,  The  riglit  ventricle. 
9,  Tne  iricuspia  vaIv3B.  10,  The  p\ilinonary  artery.  II,  The  branch  to  the  rifsht 
lung.  12,  The  branch  to  the  left  lung.  13,  The  right  pulmonary  vein.  14,  The 
left  pulinonmy  vein.  15,  The  left  auricle.  16,  The  left  ventricle.  17.  TIm 
mitral  valves. 


yote.     Let  a  /eview  of  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  respiratory 
organs  be  given  from  figs.  5'S,  f)\),  or  fiom  outline  anatomical  plates  5  and  7 

9 


98  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AlsD   HYGIENE. 


CHAPTER    XXI. 

HYGIENE    OF   THE   RESPIRATORY    ORGANS 

267.  For  man  to  enjoy  the  highest  degree  of  health,  it  is 
necessary  that  the  impure  "  venous  "  blood  be  properly  changed. 
As  this  is  eftected  in  the  lungs  by  the  action  of  the  air,  it  follows 
that  this  element,  when  breathed,  should  be  pure,  or  contain 
twenty-one  per  cent,  of  oxygen  to  about  seventy-nine  per 
cent,  of  nitrogen. 

268.  The  quality  or  purity  of  the  air  is  affected  by  every 
respiration.  The  quantity  of  nitrogen  is  nearly  the  same  in 
the  expired,  as  in  the  inspired  air.  But  the  quantity  of  oxygen 
is  diminished,  and  that  of  carbonic  acid  is  increased.  Thus, 
every  time  we  force  air  from  the  lungs,  it  becomes  unfit  u>  be 
breathed  again. 

Experiment.  Sink  a  glass  jar  that  has  a  stop-cock,  or  one 
with  a  glass  stopper,  into  a  pail  of  water,  until  the  air  is  expelled 
from  the  jar.  Fill  the  lungs  with  air,  and  retain  it  in  the  chest 
a  short  time,  and  then  breathe,  into  the  jar,  and  instantly  close 
the  stop-cock.  Close  the  opening  of  the  jar  that  is  under  the 
water  with  a  piece  of  paper  laid  on  a  plate  of  sufficient  size  to 
cover  the  opening,  invert  the  jar,  and  sink  into  it  a  lighted  candle. 
The  flame  will  be  extinguished  as  quickly  as  if  put  in  water.* 


•  As  a  aubatitute  for  a  jar  with  a  stop-cock,  take  a  piece  of  lead 
pipe  bent  in  the  form  of  a  siphon,  and  insert  it  in  the  mouth  of  a 
reversed  J£ir.  This  experiment  is  as  conclusive  whether  the  air  is  in- 
h;ilcd  once  only,  or  breathed  many  times. 

267 — 285.  Give  the  hygietw  of  the  respiratory  organs.  267.  What  is  ne- 
cessary that  man  may  enjoy  the  highest  degree  of  health  ?  AVhat  propor- 
t'on  of  oxygen  and  nitrogen  should  the  inspired  air  contain  ?  268.  What 
iB  the  differrtnoe  bet^veen  inspired  and  expired  air  ?  How  can  this  differ- 
ence be  shown  i 


HYGIENE    OF   THE   RESPIRATORY    ORGANS.  99 

Remove  the  carbonic  acid  by  inverting  the  jar,  and  place  i  lighted 
candle  in  it,  and  the  flame  will  be  as  clear  as  when  out  of  the  jar. 

ObservaHon.  It  is  familiarly  known  that  a  taper  will  not 
burn  where  carbonic  acid  exists  in  any  considerable  quantity, 
or  when  there  is  a  marked  deficiency  of  oxygen.  From  this 
originated  the  judicious  practice  of  sinking  a  lighted  candle  into 
a  well  or  pit  before  descending  into  it.  If  the  flame  is  extin* 
(juished,  respiration  cannot  there  be  maintained,  and  life  would 
be  sacrificed  should  a  person  venture  in  until  the  noxious  air 
is  removed. 

269.  Air,  in  which  lamps  will  not  huin  with  brilliancy,  is 
unfitted  for  respiration.  In  crowded  rooms,  which  are  not 
ventilated,  the  air  is  vitiated,  not  ouly  by  a  decrease  of  oxygen 
and  an  increase  of  carbonic  aci<i,  but  by  the  waste,  injurious 
atoms  thrown  out  from  the  lungs  and  skin  of  tlie  audience. 
The  burning  lamps,  under  fmch  circumstances,  emit  but  a  feeble 
light.  Let  t!ie  oxygen  gas  be  more  and  more  expended,  and 
the  lamps  will  burn  more  and  more  feebly,  until  nearly  ex- 
tinguished. 

Illustrations.  1st.  The  effects  of  breathing  the  same  air 
again  and  again,  are  well  illustrated  by  an  incident  that  occurred 
in  one  of  our  halls  of  learning.  A  large  audience  had  assembled 
in  an  ill-ventilated  room,  to  listen  to  a  lecture  ;  soon  the  lamps 
burned  so  dimly  that  the  speaker  and  audience  were  nearly  en- 
veloped in  darkness.  The  oppression,  dizziness,  and  faintness, 
experienced  by  many  of  the  audience,  induced  them  to  leave ; 
and  in  a  few  minutes  after,  the  lamps  were  observed  to  rekindle, 
owing  to  the  exchange  of  pure  air  on  opening  the  door,  which 
supplied  to  them  oxygen. 

2d.  The  "  Blacl:  Hole  of  Calcutta  "  received  its  name  from 
the  fact,  that  one  hundred  and  forty-six  Englishmen  were  shut 

"Why  should  a  lighted  candle  be  sunk  in  a  well  or  pit  before  a  person 
descends  into  it  ?  269.  How  is  the  air  of  crowded,  unventilated  roomt 
Titiated  ?  What  effect  has  such  air  upon  the  burning  lamps  ?  Give  an 
incident  that  illustrates  the  effects  of  impure  air  upon  burning  lamps. 


MtMBMillMlWIlH 


iOO  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY^,   AND   HYGIENE. 

up  in  a  room  eighteen  feet  square,  with  only  two  small  windows 
on  the  same  side  to  admit  air.  On  opening  this  dungeon,  ten 
hours  after  their  imprisonment,  only  twenty-three  were  alive. 
The  others  had  died  from  breathing  impure  air,  that  contained 
animal  matter  from  their  own  bodies. 

270.  Churches,  concert-halls,  and  school-rooms  should  he 
leeU  ventilated.  If  they  are  not,  the  persons  assembled  in  them 
will  be  restless,  and  complain  of  languor,  and  perhaps  head- 
ache. These  unpleasant  sensations  are  caused  by  a  want  of 
pure  air,  to  give  an  adequate  supply  of  oxygen  to  the  lungs. 

Observation.  In  all  school-rooms,  where  there  is  nol  ade- 
quate ventilation,  it  is  advisable  to  have  a  recess  of  five  or  ten 
minutes  each  hour.  During  this  time,  let  the  pupils  braathe 
fresh  air,  and  open  the  doors  and  windows,  so  that  the  air  of  the 
room  shall  be  completely  changed. 

271.  While  occupying  a  room,  we  are  insensible  to  the  grad- 
ual  vitiation  of  the  air.  This  is  the  result  of  the  diminished 
sensibility  of  the  nervous  system,  and  gradual  adaptation  of  the 
organs  to  blood  of  a  less  stimulating  character. 

272.  In  the  construction  of  every  inhabited  room,  there 
should  be  adequate  means  of  ventilation,  as  well  as  warming. 
No  room  ie  well  ventilated,  unless  as  much  pure  air  is  brought 
into  it,  as  the  occupants  vitiate  at  every  respiration.  This  can 
be  efiected  by  making  an  aperture  in  the  ceiling  of  the  room, 
or  by  constructing  a  ventilating  flue  in  the  chimney.  This 
should  be  in  contact  with  the  flues  for  the  escape  of  smoke,  but 
separated  from  them  by  a  thin  brick  partition. 

273.  Provision  should  also  be  made,  by  which  pure  air 
may  be  constantly  coining  into  the  room,  as  the  crevices  of  the 

Of  the  effects  of  brcn tiling  impure  air.  270.  Why  should  churches  and 
Bchool-rooms  be  well  ventilated  ?  "W  hat  suggestion  when  a  school-room  ia 
not  well  ventilated  ?  271.  Why  are  we  insensible  of  the  vitiation  of  the 
air  of  the  room  in  which  we  are  seated  ?  272.  What  is  very  important  in 
the  construction  of  every  inhabited  room  ?  Eow  can  a  room  be  well  venti- 
mted  ?  273.  Should  provision  be  made  to  have  pure  air  introduced  into 
a  room? 


HYGIENE   OF   THE    RESPIRATORY   ORGANS. 


101 


doors  and  windows  are  not  sufTicient.  There  should  be  an 
aperture  at  or  near  the  floor,  to  connect  with  the  outer  walls  of 
the  building  or  external  air, 

274.  The  sick-room,  particularly,  should  be  so  arranged  that 
the  impure  air  may  escape,  and  pure  air  be  constantly  coming 
into  the  room.  Curtains  around  the  bed,  and  the  sheet  over  the 
face,  are  injurious.  The  efiect  is  similar  to  the*  produced  by 
sleeping  in  a  small,  unventilated  room. 

275.  The  change  that  is  effected  in  the  blood  while  passing 
through  the  lungs,  not  only  depends  upon  the  purity  of  the  air, 
but  the  amount  inspired.  The  quantity  varies  according  to  the 
.  '^e  of  the  chest,  and  the  movement  of  the  ribs  and  diaphragm. 


Fig.  60. 


Fig.  61. 


Fig.  60.    The  skeleton  of  a  deformed  chest. 
Fig.  61.    The  skeleton  of  a  well-formed  chest. 

276.  The  size  of  the  chest  and  lungs  can  be  diminished  by 
moderate  and  continued  pressure.  This  is  most  easily  done  in 
infancy,  when  the  cartilages  and  ribs  are  very  pliant ;  yet  it 
can  be  effected  at  more  advanced  periods  of  life. 

Observations.  1st.  The  Chinese,  by  compressing  the  feet  of 
female  children,  prevent  their  growth ;  so  tha.  the  foot  of  a 

274.  What  rooms  particularly  should  be  well  ventilated  ?    "Why  are  cur- 
tains around  abed  injurious?    275.  What  varies  the  amount  of  air  received 
Into  the  lungs  ?    276.  How  can  the  size  of  the  chest  be  diminished  ?    What 
does  fig.  60  represent  ?    Fig.  61  ?    Give  observation  Ist. 
0» 


102 


ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,    AND   HYGIENE. 


Chinese  belle  is  not  larger  than  the  fool  of  an  American  girl  of 
five  years. 

2d.  The  American  women  compress  their  chests,  to  prevent 
their  growtli ;  so  that  the  chest  of  an  American  belle  is  not 
laryor  than  the  chest  of  a  Chinese  girl  of  five  years.  Which 
country,  in  this  respect,  exhibits  the  greater  intelligence  ? 

3d.  The  chest  can  be  deformed  by  making  the  linings  of  the 
waists  of  the  dresses  tight,  as  well  as  by  corsets.  Tight  vesta, 
upon  ihe  same  principle,  are  also  injurious. 

Fig.  62.  Fig.  63. 


F  {.  6SL  A  correct  outline  of  the  Venus  do  Medici,  the  heau  ideal  of  female  lym 
metry. 

Fig.  63.  An  outline  of  a  well-corseted  modern  beauty.  One  hai  an  artificial 
'nsect  waist ;  the  other,  a  nntnrni  waist.  One  has  sloping  shoulders,  while  the  shoul 
ders  of  the  other  are  comparativeiy  elevated,  square,  and  angu.lnr.  The  proportion  of 
Jhe  corseted  female  below  the  waist,  is  also  a  departure  frcx  the  sy^rmetry  of  nature 

277.   In  children,  who  have  never  worn  close  garments,  the 
circumference  of  the  chest  is  generally  about  equi.1  to  that  of 

Give  observation  2(1.  How  may  the  chest  be  defortred  as  given  by  obser- 
tetion  3d  ?  277.  What  is  the  size  of  the  chest  of  a  child  that  haa  always 
von  loose  clothing  t 


HYGIENE    OF   THE    RESriRATORY    ORGANS.  103 

Jie  body  at  the  hips ;  and  similar  proportions  would  exiHt 
through  life,  if  there  were  no  improper  pressure  of  the  clothmg. 
Those  persons  that  have  large,  full  chests,  particularly  at  the 
lower  part,  are  not  so  liable  to  diseases  of  the  lungs,  as  those 
who  have  narrow,  contracted  chests. 

278.  A  contracted  chest,  caused  either  by  injudicious  dress- 
ing, or  by  any  other  means,  can  be  enlarged,  although  the 
person  is  thirty  years  of  age,  by  permitting  the  muscles  hat 
elevate  the  ribs  and  diaphragm  to  perform  their  proper  function. 

Observation.  Scholars,  and  persons  who  sit  much  of  the 
time,  should  frequently,  during  the  day,  breathe  full  and  deep, 
BO  that  the  smallest  air-cells  may  be  fully  filled  with  air.  While 
exercising  the  lungs,  the  shoulders  should  be  thrown  back  and 
the  head  held  erect. 

279  When  the  lungs  are  properly  filled  with  air,  the  chest 
is  enlarged  in  every  direction.  If  any  article  of  apparel  is 
wc :"  so  tight  as  to  prevent  the  full  expansion  of  the  chest  and 
abdomen,  the  lungs,  in  consequence,  do  not  receive  air  sufii- 
cient  to  purify  the  blood.  The  penalty  for  thus  violating  a 
law  of  our  being,  is  disease  and  suffering. 

Observation.  Many  individuals  do  not  realize  the  small 
amount  of  pressure  that  will  prevent  the  enlargement  of  the 
chest.  This  can  be  shown  by  drawing  a  tape  tightly  around 
the  lower  part  of  the  chest  of  a  vigorous  adult,  and  confining  it 
with  the  thumb  and  finger.  Then  endeavor  fully  to  inflate  the 
lungs,  and  the  movement  of  the  ribs  will  be  much  restricted. 

280.  The  position  in  standing  and  sitting  injluences  the 
movement  of  the  ribs  and  diaphragm.  When  the  shoulders  are 
thrown  back,  and  when  a  person  stands  or  sits  erect,  the  dia- 

What  persons  are  most  free  from  diseases  of  the  lungs  ?  278.  Cam 
narrow,  contracted  chests  be  enlarged  ?  How  ?  What  practice  is  recoTi- 
mended  to  scholars  and  sedentary  persons  ?  279.  What  is  the  efl'ect  if  tne 
apparel  is  worn  so  tight  as  to  prevent  the  full  expansion  of  the  chest  ?  H  .  w 
can  the  amount  of  pressure  necessary  to  prevent  the  enlargement  of  f.ie 
chest  be  shown  ?  280.  Shaw  the  effect  of  position  on  the  movement  of  th« 
riba  and  diaphragm. 


»04  ANATOMV,    PUYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENE. 

phragm  and  ribs  Imve  more  frecflom  of  motion,  and  the  abdomi- 
nal muscles  act  mor«  efricienty  ;  thus  the  lungs  have  broader 
range  of  movement,  than  vkrhen  the  shoulders  incline  forward, 
and  the  body  is  stooping. 

281.  The  state  of  the  mind  exercises  a  great  influence  upon 
respiration.  If  we  are  depressed  by  grief,  or  feel  anxious 
about  friends  or  property,  the  diaphragm  and  muscles  that  ele- 
vate the  ribs  will  not  contract  with  the  same  energy  as  when  the 
mind  is  influer  ce(!  by  joy,  mirth,  and  other  enlivening  emotions. 
Consequently,  our  breathing  is  not,  as  frequent  and  full  in  the 
"ormer  as  in  the  latter  condition. 

282.  To  recover  persons  apj)arently  droumed^  it  is  necessary 
o  press  the  chest,  suddenly  and  forcibly,  downward  and  back- 
ward, and  instantly  discontinue  the  pressure.  Repeat  this 
without  intermission,  until  a  pair  of  bellows  can  be  procured. 
When  the  bellows  are  obtained,  introduce  the  nozzle  well  upon 
the  base  of  the  tongue,  and  surround  the  Jth  and  nose  with 
a  towel  or  handkerchief,  to  close  them.  Let  another  person  press 
upon  the  projecting  part  of  the  neck,  called  "Adam's  apple," 
while  air  is  introtiuced  into  the  lungs  through  t'  bellows.  Then 
press  upon  the  chest,  to  force  the  air  from  the  lungs,  tc  imitate 
natural  breathing. 

283.  Continue  the  use  of  the  bellows,  and  forcing  the  air  out 
of  the  chest,  for  an  hour  at  least,  unless  signs  of  natural  breath- 
ing come  on.  Wrap  the  body  in  warm,  dry  blankets,  aud  place 
it  near  the  fire,  to  preserve  the  natural  warmth,  as  weU  as  to 
impart  artificial  heat.  Every  thing,  however,  is  secon'^ary  to 
filling  the  lungs  with  air.  Avoid  all  friction  until  breathing  is 
restored.     Send  for  medical  aid  immediately. 

28'1.  In  cases  of  apparent  death  from  hanging  or  stran- 
gling, the  knot  should  be  untied  or  cut  immediately  ;  thm  uso 
artificial  respiration,  or  breathing,  as  directed  in  apparent  death 

281.  Does  the  state  of  the  mind  influence  our  breathing?  285V  How 
should  persons  apparently  drowned  be  tieated  ?  284.  How  should  V*pa- 
rent  death  from  strangling  be  managed  ? 


HTGlfiNE    OF   THE    RESPIRATORY    ORGANS.     '  lOA 

from  drowning.  In  asphyxia  from  electricity,  (lightning,)  luti- 
ficial  respiration  slioutd  1x3  resorted  to. 

Observation.  It  is  a  common  impression,  in  many  sections 
of  ihe  country,  that  tlie  law  will  not  allow  the  removal  of  the 
cord  from  the  neck  of  a  body  found  suspended,  unless  the  cor- 
oner be  present.  It  is  therefore  proper  to  say,  that  no  such 
delay  is  necessary,  and  that  no  time  should  be  lost  in  attempting 
to  resuscitate  the  a*.rangled  person. 

285.  When  life  is  apparently  suspended,  from  breathing 
carbonic  acid  gas,  the  person  should  be  carried  into  the  open 
air.  The  head  and  shoulders  should  be  slightly  elevated,  the 
face  and  chest  should  be  sponged  or  sprinkled  with  cold  water, 
or  cold  vinegar  and  water.  Apply  fricl'jn  to  the  skin,  with  a 
coarse  cloth  or  flesh-brush,  and  resort  to  artificial  respiration. 

Observation.  1st.  Many  persons  have  died  from  breathing 
carbonic  acid  that  was  formed  by  burning  charcoal  in  an  open 
pan  or  portable  furnace,  for  the  purpose  of  warming  their 
sleeping-rooms. 

2d.  In  resuscitating  persons  apparently  dead  from  the  already 
mentioned  causes,  if  a  pair  of  bellows  cannot  be  procured  im- 
mediately, let  their  lungs  be  inflated  by  air  expelled  from  the 
lungs  of  some  person  present.  To  have  the  expired  air  as  pure 
as  possible,  the  person  should  quickly  inflate  his  lungs,  and  in- 
stantly expel  the  air  into  those  of  the  asphyxiated  person.  Place 
the  patient  in  pure  air^  admit  attendants  only  into  the  apartment, 
and  send  for  a  'physician  without  delay. 

What  treatment  should  be  adopted  in  asphyxia  from  lightninp*  What 
is  8P.id  of  the  impression,  common  in  some  sections  of  the  country  whrni 
a  body  is  found  suspended?  285.  What  should  be  done  when  carbonk 
acid  has  been  inhaled  ?  What  sad  results  frequently  follow  the  burning  of 
charcoal  in  a  close  room  ?    Give  the  2d  observation. 


106  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENS 


CHAPTER    XXII. 

ANIMAL   HEAT.  "" 

286.  The  true  sources  of  animal  heat  are  still  imperfecrt'y 
known.  We  see  certain  phenomena,  but  the  causes  are  hidden 
from  our  view.  Its  regular  production,  to  a  certain  degree,  is 
essential  both  to  animal  and  vegetable  life. 

287.  The  temperature}  of  the  human  body  is  about  ninety- 
eight  degrees,  whether  we  examine  it  in  the  Icelander  in  his 
snowy  hut,  or  the  Negro  under  an  equatorial  sun. 

288.  To  enable  man  to  maintain  an  equilibrium  of  temper- 
ature under  such  extremes  of  heat  and  cold,  naturally  suggests 
two  inquiries.  1st.  By  what  organs  is  animal  heat  generated  ? 
2d.    By  what  means  is  its  uniformity  maintained  ? 

289.  In  combustion,  or  burning  of  wood,  coal,  oil,  dec,  tlie 
oxygen  of  the  atmosphere  unites  with  the  carbon  and  hydrogen 
of  these  substances,  and  carbonic  acid  and  watery  vapor  are 
produced.  This  process  is  attended  with  the  disengagement 
of  heat. 

290.  The  quantity  of  heat  disengaged  in  combustion  is 
always  in  proportion  to  the  amount  of  carbon  and  hydrogen 
consumed  ;  thus  a  piece  of  wood  weighing  one  pound,  in 
burning  slowly,  would  give  out  the  same  quantity  of  heat  as  a 
pound  of  shavings  of  the  same  wood,  in  burning  rapidly.  Upon 
the  principle  of  combustion,  the  production  of  animal  heat  may 
be  understood. 

286 — 296.  What  is  said  res]>ectmg  animal  heat  f  286.  lathe  true  source 
of  animal  heat  known  ?  287.  What  is  the  temperature  of  the  human  body  ? 
288.  What  i-^quiries  are  naturally  suggested  ?  289.  What  takes  place  in  the 
combustion,  or  burning  of  wood,  oil,  &c.  ?  290.  Upon  what  does  the  quan- 
tity ol  heat  disengnged  in  combustion  depend  ?    How  is  tb'«  illustratei  ? 


ANIMAL    HEAT.  10^ 

291.  As  Defore  mentioned,  the  fcx>d  contains  CArbon  aad 
hydrogen.  These  exist  in  the  chyle.  The  old  and  waste 
atoms  of  the  body,  Hkewise,  contain  the  same  elements.  It  ia 
now  supposed  that  the  oxygen  of  the  inspired  air  enters  the 
capillary  vessels  of  the  lungs,  and  mingles  with  the  blood,  with 
which  it  is  carried  to  the  heart,  and  from  thence  to  the  nutrient 
capillary  vessels  of  every  part  of  the  system. 

292.  In  the  capillary  vessels,  the   oxygen  of  the  arterial 
blood  uiiites  with  the  carbon  and  hydrogen  of  the  waste  atoms 
(which  are  conveyed  into  the  blood  by  the  lymphatics,)  and 
carbonic  acid  and  water  are  formed. 

293.  This  change  of  state  among  the  particles  of  bodiaa 
is  attended  with  the  disengagement  of  heat.  The  carbonic 
acid  and  water  are  returned  to  the  lungs  in  the  blo.jd,  and  car- 
ried out  of  the  body  by  the  expired  air.  The  inference  is,  that 
heat  is  generated  in  every  part  of  the  body. 

294.  Our  next  inquiry  is,  by  what  means  is  the  uniformity 
of  temperature  in  the  body  maintained  ?  It  has  been  ascer- 
taitied  that  the  principal  agent  in  keeping  the  body  at  a  uni- 
form temperature,  is  the  immense  evaporation  that  takes  place 
from  the  skin  and  lungs. 

295._  When  cold  air  comes  in  contact  with  these  membranes, 
heat  is  given  off  to  restore  the  equilibrium.  The  quantity  de- 
pends somewhat  on  the  rapidity  of  the  change  of  air.  And 
this  is  greatest  v/hen  we  are  in  a  current  of  dry  air,  or  a  brisk 
wind  is  blowing  upon  us. 

296.  The  skin,  in  an  ordinary  state,  is  constantly  giving  out 
a  watery  fluid,  which  is  converted  into  vapcj  and  carried  off  by 
the  surrounding  air.  To  effect  this,  heat  is  taken  from  the 
system,  and   the   conversion   of  the   perspiration   into  vapor 

291.  From  what  source  are  the  carbor  and  hydrogen  in  the  body  derived  ? 
The  oxygen  ?  292.  Show  how  heat  may  be  produced  in  every  part  of  the 
body.  294.  Wliat  is  the  principal  agent  by  which  a  uniform  tempersi 
ture  of  the  body  is  maintained  ?  295.  What  is  the  effect  when  cold  Bit 
comes  in  contact  with  these  membranes  ?  When  is  the  greatest  amouut 
*f  heat  given  off?    296.  How  is  the  surplus  heat  of  the  body  remotftd. 


lOlJ?  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 

conveys  a  large  proporlion  of  the  surplus  heat  frotn  the  body; 
and  in  consequence,  the  temperature  is  maintained  at  ninety- 
eight  degrees. 

Ohseniations.  1st.  In  all  ages  and  climes,  it  has  been 
observed,  that  the  increased  temperature  of  the  skin  and 
system  in  fevers,  is  abated  as  soon  as  free  perspiration  is 
restored. 

2d.  In  damp,  close  weather,  as  during  the  sultry  days  of 
August,  we  feel  a  disagreeable  sensation  of  heat,  because  the 
saturation  of  the  air  by  moisture  prevents  the  escape  of  heat 
through  the  lungs  and  skin. 


HYGIENE  OF  ANIMAL  HEAT. 

297.  The  amount  of  heat  generated  in  the  human  system 
depends  upon  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  food,  age,  exer- 
cise, the  amount  and  character  of  the  inspired  air,  condition  of 
the  brain,  skin,  and  general  system. 

298.  Animal  heat  is  modijied  by  the  proportion  of  carbon 
which  the  food  contains^  and  by  the  quantity  consumed.  As 
the  kind  of  fuel  that  contains  the  greatest  amount  of  combus- 
tible material  gives  ofT  the  most  heat  when  burned,  so  those 
articles  of  food  that  contain  the  greatest  quantity  of  carbon  pro- 
Himo  the  most  heat  when  converted  into  blood. 

299.  Age  is  another  injtuence  that  modifies  the  generation 
of  animal  heat.  The  vital  forces  of  the  child  being  feeble,  less 
heat  is  generated  in  its  system  than  in  that  of  an  adult.  Hence 
the  young  child,  and  the  enfeebled,  aged  person,  need  more 
clothing  than  the  vigorous  individual  of  middle  age.  - 

What  has  been  observed  in  all  ages  and  climes  ?  Why  do  %ve  feel  a  dis- 
agreeable sensation  of  heat  in  the  sultry  days  of  August  ?  297 — 304.  O'im 
the  hygiene  ofam'tnal  heat.  297.  On  what  does  the  amount  of  heat  gener- 
ated in  the  human  system  depend  ?  298.  What  element  o?  the  food  m- 
Guences  the  generation  of  heat  ?  299.  Does  age  modify  the  feneration  of 
aeat  ?    What  persons  need  the  most  clothing  ? 


'.1'\  '■  ■ 


HYGIENE  OF  ANIMAL  HEAT.  109 

300.  Exercise  is  an  injluence  that  modifies  the  generation 
pf  animal  heat.  Whatever  increases  the  llow  of  blood  in  the 
system,  increases  also  the  deposition  of  new  atoms  of  matter, 
and  the  removal  of  the  waste  particles.  This  ciiange  among  the 
particles  of  matter  is  attended  with  an  elevation  of  temperature. 
For  this  reason,  a  person  in  action  is  warmer  than  in  a  slate 
of  repose. 

301.  Tlie  amount  and  character  of  the  air  which  is  breathed^ 
modify  the  heat  of  the  system.  In  the  generation  of  heat  in 
a  stove,  air,  or  oxygen,  is  as  essential  as  the  wood  or  coal.  It 
IS  equally  so  in  the  production  of  animal  heat.  The  oxygen 
of  the  inspired  air  should  be  in  proportion  to  the  carbon  and 
hydrogen  to  be  consumed.  This  requires  capacious  lungs,  to- 
gether with  free  movements  of  the  ribs  and  diaphragm. 

302.  The  condition  of  the  brain  and  nervous  system  affects 
the  generation  of  animal  heat.  If  the  mind  is  aroused  from 
fear,  the  breathing  becomes  slow,  and  a  chilliness  peivades  the 
body,  particularly  the  extremities ;  while,  on  the  other  hand, 
joyous  and  agreeable  emotions  quicken  the  circulation  of  the 
blood,  and  this  increases  the  generation  of  heat. 

303.  During  sleep,  when  the  brain  is  partially  inactive,  less 
heat  is  generated  than  when  awake.  This  is  one  reason  why 
an  individual  who  sleeps  in  the  same  clothing  that  was  ade- 
quate to  prevent  chills  while  awake,  contracts  a  cold,  unless  ho 
throws  over  him  an  additional  covering. 

30'4.  The  system  suffers  less  when  the  change  of  tempera^ 
ture  is  gradual.  The  change  in  the  production  of  heat,  as 
well  as  in  the  evaporation  of  fluids  from  the  system,  is  gradual, 
when  not  influenced  by  foreign  causes.  By  this  means,  the 
fx)dy  IS  enabled  to  endure  tropical  heat  and  polar  cold. 

300.  What  effect  has  exercise  on  animal  heat  ?  301.  To  -^hat  should  the 
oxygen  of  the  inspired  air  be  proportional  ?  302.  Mention  the  effeota  of 
some  of  the  emotions  on  animal  heat.  303.  Why  dp  we  need  more  cloth> 
ing  when  asleep  than  when  awake  ?  304.  How  is  the  body  enabled  to  en- 
dire  tropical  heat  and  polar  cold  ? 

10 


110  ANATOMY.   PUTSIOLOQY,  AND  HYOIUNB. 


CHATTER    XXIII. 

THE    VOICE. 

305  The  beautiful  mechanism  of  tlie  vocal  instrument, 
<vl)ich  produces  every  variety  of  sound,  from  a  harsh,  un- 
melodious  tone,  to  a  soft,  sweet,  flute-like  sound,  can  never  be 
imitated  by  art.  It  has  been  compared,  by  many  physiologists, 
to  a  wind,  reed,  and  stringed  instrument.  This  inimitable,  yet 
simple  instrument,  is  the  Larynx. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  VOCAL  ORGANS. 

306.  The  LARYNX  (Adam's  apple)  is  a  kind  of  cartilaginous 
tube,  wl  ch,  taken  as  a  whole,  has  the  general  form  of  a  hollow 
reversed  ne,  with  its  base  upward  toward  the  tongue,  in  the 
shape  of  an  expanded  triangle. 

307.  It  is  composed  of  several  pieces  of  cartilage,  that 
aot  only  connect  with  each  other,  but  with  the  tongue, 
lower  jaw,  and  trachea. 

308.  There  are  stretched  across  the  cavity  formed  by 
these  cartilages,  four  folds  of  membrane,  two  on  each  side, 
called  vocal  cords. 

309.  The  space  between  the  cords  on  each  side  is  called 
the  glot'tis^  or  chink  of  the  glottis.  The  cavity  between  the 
upper  and  lower  vocal  cords  is  called  the  ventricle  of  the 
larynx. 

30"'i — 310.  Give  the  anntomy  of  the  vocal  organs.  305.  What  is  said  ot  the 
Btructiire  of  the  vocal  iui-trumcnt  ?  What  instruments  have  physiologists 
compared  it  with  ?  What  is  the  vocal  instrument  called  ?  106.  Describo 
the  larynx.  307.  Of  what  is  it  composed  ?  308.  Describe  the  ior*l  cordsi 
109.  What  is  the  space  between  these  cords  called  ? 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE  VOCAL  ORGANS. 


Ill 


310.  Behind  the  base  of  the  tongue,  is  a  piece  of  car- 
tilage, resembling  a  leaf  of  parsley,  called  the  ep-i-glot'tis. 
The  duty  of  this  sentinel  is  to  keep  the  food  and  drink 
from  passing  into  the  air-passage,  or  trachea. 


PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE   VOCAL  ORGANS. 

311.  In  the  for'^i.ation  of  the  voice,  each  part  already  de- 
scribed performs  an  important  office.  The  cartilages  give  form 
and  stability  to  the  larynx,  and  by  the  action  of  muscles  attached 
to  them,  the  width  of  the  glottis  is  varied. 


Fig.  63. 


Fig.  63. 


Fig.  63.  A  side  view  o  the  cartilaf^en  of  the  larynx.  I,  The  bone  at  th«  root  of 
th)  tongue.    3,  4,  5,  6,  I  cartilages  of  the  larynx.    7,  The  trachea. 

Fig.  63.  A  section  of  tlie  larynx.  1,1,  The  upper  vocal  cords.  3,  2,  The  lowet 
vocal  cords.    3,  3,  The  glottis.    4,  4,  The  ventricles  of  the  larynx. 

312.  When  air  is  forcibly  driven  from  the  lungs  through 
the  glottis,  it  causes  a  vibration,  or  trembling  of  the  vocal 
cords.  This  produces  sound  ;  and  it  is  varied  by  the  tongue, 
the  teeth,  and  the  lips. 

810  Where  is  the  epiglottis  situated?  311,  313.  Give  tht  function  of 
the  vocal  organs.  311.  Of  what  use  are  the  cartilages  of  the  larynx* 
What  does  fig.  62  represent  ?    Fig.  63?    312.  How  is  sound  oroduccd? 


112  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

313.  The  size  of  the  larynx,  the  capacity  and  health  cf  the 
lungs,  the  condit'cn  of  the  throat  and  nasal  passages,  the  eleva- 
tion and  depression  of  the  chin  and  tongue,  and  the  state  of  the 
mind,  influence  the  modulations  of  sound. 


HYGIENE  OF  THE  VO^  AL  ORGANS. 

314.  Common  observation  shows  that  the  voice  can  !;"» 
clianged  and  modified  by  the  habits;  sailors,  smiths,  and 
others,  who  are  engaged  in  noisy  occupations,  exert  their 
vocal  organs  more  strongly  than  those  of  more  quiet  pursuits. 
This  not  only  affects  the  structure  of  the  vocal  organs,  but 
varies  the  intonations  of  the  voice. 

315.  The  voice  is  strong  in  proportion  to  the  development 
of  the  larynx^  and  the  capacity  of  the  chest.  Singing  and 
reading  aloud,  improve  and  strengthen  the  vocal  organs,  and 
give  a  healthy  expansion  to  the  cliest.  The  enunciation  of  the 
elementary  sounds  of  the  English  language,  aids  in  developing 
the  vor^al  organs,  as  well  as  preventing  disease  of  the  ihroat 
and  lungs,  {laryngitis  and  bronchitis.) 

316.  The  attitude  also  affects  the  modulation  of  the  voice^ 
When  an  individual  stands  or  sits  with  the  head  and  trunk  erect, 
the  movements  of  the  whole  respiratory  apparatus  are  most 
free  and  effective.  Sound,  in  consequence,  is  more  clear  and 
distinct. 

Experiment.  Read  with  the  head  bowed  forward  and  the 
chin  depressed  ;  then  read  with  the  head  erect  and  the  chin  ele- 
vated, and  the  difference  in  the  movement  of  the  vocal  organs, 
together  with  the  difference  in  the  voice,  will  be  manifest 


bl3.  What  influences  the  modulation  of  sound?  314 — 321.  Give  the 
hygiene  of  the  vocal  organs.  314.  What  does  observation  show  in  refeience 
to  the  Toice  ?  315.  How  may  the  voice  be  strengthened  ?  316.  "NVTiat 
effect  has  the  erect  attitude  upon  tht  modulations  of  the  voice  ?  State 
*he  experiment. 


-  H    •■<•<    ■^1.>WW' 


HYGIENE    OF   THE   VOCAL   OHOj^NS. 


113 


Fig.  64. 


Fig.  65. 


Fig.  64.  An  improper  position,  but  one  not  iinfrequently  seen  in  some  of  our  com- 
II  on  schools,  and  in  some  of  our  public  speakers. 

Fig.  65.    The  proper  position  for  reading,  spealcing,  and  singing. 

317.  The  muscles  of  the  neck  should  not  he  vompressed. 
If  the  muscles  of  the  neck  and  larynx  are  compressed  by  a 
high  cravat,  or  other  close  dressing,  not  only  will  the  free  and 
forcible  use  of  these  parts  be  impeded,  but  the  tones,  instead  of 
being  clear  and  varied,  will  be  feeble  and  ineffective. 

Ohservati^ns.  1st.  The  loss  of  voice  which  is  prevalent 
among   public  speakers,  may  be  ascribed  in  part  to  the  in- 

What  is  represented  by  fig.  64  ?  By  fig.  65  ?  317.  Why  should  not  th« 
musclea  of  the  neck  be  comprp  1  ?  What  is  a  common  cause  of  loss  of 
Toice'  V 

10  • 


114  ANATOMY,   niYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE, 

judicious  dressing  of  ihe  neck,  and  improper  position  whtn 
standing. 

2d.  When  individuals  hove  been  addressing  an  audience  in 
a  warjp  room,  or  engaged  in  sinr  ^,  they  should  avoid  all 
imprcsoions  of  a  cold  atmosphere,  unless  adequately  protected 
by  an  extia  garment. 

318.  2'he  opening  of  the  jaws^  and  condition  of  the  nasal 
passages  and  throaty  modify  the  voice.  The  enunciation  of 
words  is  rendered  more  or  less  distinct,  in  proportion  as  the 
jaws  are  separated  in  speaking,  and  the  throat  and  nasal  pas- 
sages are  free  from  obstruction. 

319.  Repetition  is  essential  to  distinct  articulation  of 
words.  In  teachmg  a  child  to  articulate  a  letter  or  word,  in 
the  first  instance,  make  an  effort  to  induce  a  proper  state  of 
the  vocal  organs  by  which  the  particular  sound  is  produced. 
Repeat  the  letter  or  word  again  and  again,  until  it  can  be 
uttered  with  accuracy. 

Observation.  The  drawling  method  of  talking  to  young 
children,  as  well  as  using  words  that  are  not  found  in  any 
written  language,  (called  hahy  talk,)  is  decidedly  wrong.  A 
child  will  pronounce  and  understand  the  application  of  a  cor- 
rect word  £is  quickly  as  an  incorrect  one. 

320.  When  foreign  bodies,  such  as  cherry-stones,  buttons, 
&c.,  get  into  the  throat,  they  cause  excessive  irritation,  and 
sometimes  death.  It  is  not  necessary  to  ascertain  which  pas- 
sage the  foreign  body  is  in,  for  the  immediate  treatment  ought 
in  either  case  to  be  the  same. 

321.  Some  person  should  place  one  hand  on  the  front  of 
the  chest  of  the  sufferer,  and,  with  the  other,  give  two  or  three 
smart  blows  upon  the  back,  allowing  a  few  seconds  to  inter- 
vene between  them. 

Give  2d  observation.  318.  Does  the  condition  of  the  throat  and  nasal 
passages  modify  the  voice  ?  319,  Is  repetition  essential  to  distinct  articu- 
lation ?  What  method  i  suggested  in  teaching  a  child  to  articulate  letters 
cr  words  ?  Give  observation.  32).  What  should  be  done  wherv  f  >reiga 
bodies  get  into   he  throat  ? 


ANATOMY   OF   THE    SKIN. 


115 


CHAPTER    XXIV. 


THE    SKIN. 


33S.  The  skin  is  a  membranous  covering,  enveloping  the 
\>*jf\es  and  other  parts  of  the  system.  In  youth,  and  in  females 
particularly,  it  is  smooth,  soft,  and  elastic.  In  middle  age,  and 
in  inales,  it  is  firm,  and  rough  to  the  touch.  In  old  age,  in 
pcrAons  who  are  emaciated,  and  about  the  flexions  of  the  joints, 
it  M  thrown  into  folds. 


ANATOMY  OF  THE   SKIN. 

3J3.  The  skin  of  the  human  body  is  composed  of  two 
layers  of  membrane,  namely,  the  cu'ti-de^  and  the  cu'tis  vefra^ 
or  true  skin. 

324.  The  cuticle,  or  that  part  of  the  nkin  which  is  seen  by 
the  eye,  is,  at  first,  a  fluid  thrown  out  by  the  blood-vessels  over 
the  internal  layer  of  this  membrane. 

325.  While  layers  of  this  fluid  are  continually  forming 
on  the  upper  surface  of  the  true  skin,  the  external  layers  of 
li.e  fluid  become  dry,  and  resemble  small  scales. 

Illustrations.  The  cuticle  is  that  part  of  the  skin  which  is 
raised  by  a  blister.  Sometimes  from  disease,  as  erysipelas,  or 
fever,  it  comes  off"  from  the  surface  of  the  body  in  pieces  of 
considerable  size. 

322.  What  is  the  skin  ?    Mention  its  different  appearances  in  its  differ- 
ent conditions  in  the  human  frame.    323 — 336.  Give  the  anatomy  of  the 
tkin.    323.  How  many  layers  of  membrane  has  the  skin  ?    What  are  they 
called  ?    324.  How  is  the  cuticle  first  formed  ?    325.  What  is  the  appear 
tnce  of  the  external  layers  ?    Give  illustration. 


w.- 


16 


ANATOMV,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HTGIENK. 


326.  The  arrangement  of  the  cuticle,  in  difTcrcnt  parts  of 
the  huriiun  body,  is  worthy  of  notice.  Where  feelinj;  is  most 
acute,  the  cuticle  is  delicate  and  thin.  Where  there  is  motion, 
as  over  the  joints,  it  is  lax  and  movable.  Where  it  is  in  con- 
stant use,  it  becomes  harder  and  thicker. 

Illustration.  The  soleri  of  the  feet  and  the  palms  of  the 
hands  afford  good  examples.^  of  the  cuticle  thickened  by  use. 

327.  This  part  of  the  skir.  has  no  blood-vessels  or  nerves ; 
consequently,  a  needle  may  ..e  passed  under  it,  to  some  extent, 
and  cause  no  pain,  nor  will  iny  blood  ooze  from  it. 

Fig.  66. 


Fig.  66.  1, 1,  The  cuticle.  2, 2,  The  colored  layer  of  the  ciiticlo  4,  4,  The  iiet- 
nork  of  nerves.  5,  5,  The  true  skin.  6,  6,  6,  Three  nerves  that  d'"ide  to  form  the 
net-work,  (J,  4.) 

328.  The  cuticle,  when  clean,  looks  like  a  thii  shaving  of 

soft,  clear  horn ;  but  when  filled  with  dust  and  other  foul 
matter,  it  becomes  dark-colored. 

Observation.     The  hair  and  nails,  also  the  hoofs  •'f  animals, 


326.  Mention  the  arrangement  of  the  cuticle  in  different  pw:*s  of  the 
bndy.  What  parts  of  the  body  afford  examples  of  the  cuticle  thiclj^ned  by 
ut>e?  327.  Has  the  cuticle  blood-vessels  or  nerves?  328.  Wuat  i*  th* 
<ener2il appearance  of  the  cuticle?    Qire  observation. 


i,»ll>HI  — i"U  11     ■         I  ip^p^—t>»^T»-~^»g^r-^»^pi>^H^T^^—^^p»"»^^t^»lw^— ^ 


ANATOMY    OF   THE    SKIN.  IH 

are  appendages  of  the  skin.     They  are  so  connected  vntli  the 
cuticle,  that  by  scalding  they  come  off  with  this  tissue- 

329.  -^n  the  inner  and  newly-formed  layers  of  the  .  jle, 
there  exists  a  peculiar  kind  of  paint.  This  colored  layer,  in  the 
Negro,  is  black ;  in  the  hidian,  copper-colored  ;  in  t'.ie  Euro- 
pean, It  is  very  light,  diflbring,  however,  in  ditlerent  persons. 

330.  The  cutis  vera,  or  true  skin,  is  so  called,  because 
it  is  the  most  essential  of  the  two  layers  of  the  skin.  It 
contains  several  sets  of  vessels,  namely.  Arteries,  Veins,  and 
Lijvipliatics.  Beside  these  vessels,  there  are  found  both  0*7 
and  Perspiratory  (sweat)  Glands,  and  Nerves. 

331.  The  ARTERIES  and  veins  form  a  net-work  upon  the 
surface  of  the  true  skin ;  hence,  cut  any  part  of  this  layer  of  the 
skin,  and  it  will  bleed.     By  the  arteries  the  skin  is  nourished. 

Observation.  When  this  layer  of  the  skin  is  destroyed  by 
cuts  or  burns,  it  is  never  formed  again,  and  produces  scars 
which  do  not  disappear. 

332.  The  nerves,  like  the  blood-vessels,  are  very  numer- 
ous, for  no  part  of  the  skin  can  be  pricked  or  cut  without 
giving  pain.  The  minute  extremities  of  these  nerves,  together 
with  the  capillary  vessels,  form  small,  conical  prominences, 
called  pa-pil'lcB.     (Fig.  68.) 

Observation.  These  prominences  can  be  seen  in  the  palm 
of  the  hand  and  sole  of  the  foot.  On  the  ends  of  the  fingers 
they  are  curiously  arranged  ;  some  in  concentric  ovals ;  others 
pursue  a  serpentine  course. 

333.  The  lymphatics  are  those  small  vessels  which  open 
upon  the  inner  layers  of  the  cuticle.     These  vessels  are  called 

329.  What  is  found  in  the  inner  and  newly-fonmed  layers  of  the  cuticle  ? 
What  color  is  it  in  the  Negro  ?  Indian  ?  European  ?  330.  Why  is  the  cutis 
vera  so  called  ?  What  does  it  contain  ?  What  vessels  exist  in  this  layer 
beside  the  last  raer»tioned  ?  ?31.  What  do  the  arteries  and  veins  form 
upon  the  true  skin  i  By  what  vessel  is  the  skin  supplied  with  blood  ? 
What  is  formed  when  the  true  skin  is  destroyed  by  cuts  or  burns? 
832.  What  is  said  of  the  nerves  of  the  trie  Hkin  ?  How  arc  the  papillae 
formed  ?  Where  may  they  be  seen  ?  333  What  are  the  lymphatics  of  the 
»kiu?  .,--,-  _  „^. 


118 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOOY,    AND   HYGIENE. 


into  action  when  ointments  are  rubbed  on  the  skin ;  and  also  ir 
vacciiiation,  to  prevent  the  small-pox. 

334.  The  perspiratory  apparatus  consists  of  minute  tubes, 
which  pass  inward  through  the  cuticle,  and  terminate  in  the 
deeper  meshes  of  the  truo  skin.  In  their  course,  each  little 
tube  forms  a  beautiful  spiral  coil ;  and,  on  arriving  at  its  desti- 
nation, coils  upon  itself  in  such  a  way  as  to  constitute  an  ovul- 
shupcd,  or  globular  ball,  called  the  perspiratory  gland. 

335.  The  oil-glands  are  small  bodies  embe  Ided  'n  the  true 
skin.  They  connect  with  the  surface  of  the  skin  '  y  small 
tubes,  which  traverse  the  cuticle.  In  some  pans  iheao  glands 
are  wanting ;  in  others,  where  their  office  is  most  needful,  they 
are  abundant ;  as  on  the  nose,  the  head,  and  the  ears. 

Fig.  67. 


FiR.  67.    1,  9,  3,  Oil-glnnda  and  tubes  from  diflerent  parts  of  tlie  body.    A   A,  A, 
Glands.     B,  B,  B,   The  ducts  of  these  glands.    4,  An  oil-gland,  and  tube  from  th« 
■calp.    The  glands  (A)  form  a  cluster  around  the  tube  cf  the  hair,  (C.)    These  ducU 
open  Into  the  shcatb  of  the  hair,  (B.)    The  figures,  from  1  to  4  are  roaguifled  ib  Jty 
eight  diameters. 

Observation.     When  there  is  an  unnatural  ac  simulation  of 
oil  in  the  tubes,  it  producos  the  "  worm,"  or  "  grub." 

834.  Of  what  does  the  perspiratory  apparatus  consist  ?  335.  Uescrib« 
the  oil-glands.  What  is  said  of  thoir  distributi;>n  ?  Explain  fig.  67 
What  does  an  unnatural  accumulation  uf  this  oily  matter  produce  i 


HMiiiilii 


mrsioLoav  or  the  skin  119 


CHAPTER    XXV. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    SKIN. 

336.  The  skin  invests  the  whole  of  the  external  surface  of 
the  body,  following  all  its  prominences  and  curves,  and  gives 
protection  to  all  the  organs  it  encloses,  while  each  of  its  several 
parts  has  a  distinct  use. 

337.  The  cuticle  is  insensible,  and  serves  as  a  sheath  of  pro- 
tection to  the  highly  sensitive  skir.  (cutis  vera)  situated  beneath 
It.  The  latter  feels;  but  the  former  blunts  the  impression 
which  occasions  feeling. 

338.  The  cuticle,  also,  prevents  disease,  by  impeding  the 
evaporation  of  the  fluids  of  the  true  skin,  and  the  absorption  of 
the  poisonous  vapors,  which  necessarily  attend  various  employ- 
ments. It,  however,  affords  protection  to  the  system  only  when 
unbroken,  and  then  to  the  greatest  degree,  when  covered  with 
a  proper  amount  of  oily  secretion  from  tlie  oil-glands. 

339.  The  nerves  of  the  skin  ure  the  organs  of  the  sense  of 
touch  and  feeling.  Through  them  we  receive  many  impressions 
that  increase  our  pleasures  ;  as,  the  grateful  sensations  imparted 
by  the  cooling  breeze  in  a  warm  day.  In  consequence  of  their 
sensitiveness,  we  are  individually  protected,  by  being  warned 
of  the  nearness  of  destructive  agents. 

340.  A  large  proportion  of  the  waste  of  the  body  passes 
through  the  outlets  of  the  skin;  s^int  portions  in  the  form  of 
oil,  others  in  the  form  of  watery  vapor  and  carbonic  acid. 

336—346.  Give  the  physiology  of  the  skin.  336.  What  is  said  of  the  skin  ? 
887.  Mention  a  function  of  the  catirle.  338.  Give  another  use  of  the 
euticle.  339  Of  wnat  use  are  the  nervf  s  of  the  skin  ?  340.  Through 
what  membrane  does  a  large  proportion  of  the  waste  atoms  of  the  body  pass  ^ 


120 


ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY.    AND   HYfilKNE. 


341.  llie  oily  fluid  with  which  tlie  skin  is  bedewed,  is  sepa- 
rated from  the  blood  by  means  of  the  oil-glands.  This  secre- 
tion is  spread  over  those  parts  of  the  skin  most  exposed  to  the 
changes  of  temperature  and  moisture.  The  action  of  these 
glands  rendfHs  the  skin  soft,  and  it  is  also  one  source  by  which 
the  blood  is  purified. 

342.  The  perspiratory  glands  separate  from  the  blood  tho 
perspiration,  or  sweat.  There  are  more  than  two  thousand  of 
these  glands,  v,'ith  ducts,  in  every  square  inch  of  skin,  and  more 
than  five  million  of  them  in  this  natural  covering  of  the  body. 


Fig.  68. 


Fig.  1)8.  1, 1,  The  lines  or  ridges  of  the  cuticle,  cut  perpendicularly.  2,  'i,  2,  2,  2,  The 
ftirrows  or  wrinkles  of  the  same.  3,  The  cuticle.  4,  4,  The  colored  layer  of  th« 
cuticle.  5,  5,  The  culis  vera.  6,  G,  6,  fi,  6,  Tl'o  papilte,  each  of  which  ansv.'era  to 
the  lines  on  the  ex'yrnal  surface  of  the  skin.  7,  7,  Small  fu:-rowa  between  the  pa- 
pilltB,  8,  8,  8,  8,  The  deeper  furrows  between  each  couple  of  the  ;>!ipilItD.  9,  9,  l^ells 
filled  wit!<  fat.  10,  10, 10,  The  adipose  layer,  with  numerous  fat  vesicles.  19,  Two 
hairs  13,  A  perspiratory  gland,  with  its  spiral  duct.  '4,  Another  perspirator>' gland, 
with  a  duct  less  spiral.  15,  15,  Oil-glands  with  ducts  opening  into  the  sheath  of  th« 
hair,  (12.) 

341.  Wliat  is  the  use  of  the  oil-glands  ?  342.  What  is  the  use  of  the 
perspiratory  ghinds  ?  How  mauy  of  these  glauds  with  ducts  upon  every 
square  inch  of  skin  f 


PHTSIOLOaY    OF   THE    SKIN.  121. 

343.  In  hialth,  these  glands  are  in  constant  action,  and  the 
skin  is  moist.  When  this  moisture  cannot  be  seen,  it  is  called 
insensible  perspiration.  When  it  can  be  seen  in  drops,  it  in 
called  sensible  perspiration. 

Experiment.  Put  the  hand  into  a  cold,  dry,  glass  jar,  or  any 
glass  vessel,  and  wind  arou:  r  the  wrist  and  mouth  of  the  jar  a 
handkerchief.  In  a  few  minutes,  the  inside  of  the  jar  will  be 
covered  with  moisture  from  the  hand. 

344.  The  function  of  these  gl!\n<ls  is  very  necessary  to 
health.  During  twenty-four  hours,  from  twenty  to  thirty  ounces 
of  waste,  useless  matter  pusses  out  of  the  body  by  these  ducts, 
or  through  the  pores  of  the  skin. 

345.  If  perspiration  is  suppressed  from  disorder  of  the  skin 
or  cold,  the  whole  of  this  injurious  matter  is  circulated  through 
the  system  by  the  blood,  disturbing  the  action  of  the  lungs, 
stomach,  and  other  organs. 

346.  Many  cases  of  chronic  coughs,  headache,  dyspepsia, 
and  diarrhoea,  originate  in  this  way.  If  any  one  organ  of  tno 
system  has  been  weakened,  this  organ  is  more  susceptible  of 
disease  than  others.  Ji  persons  whose  lungs  are  weak  or 
diseased,  a  chill  will  immediately  cause  an  irritation  and  often 
inflammation  of  these  organs.  If  an  individual  is  predisposed 
to  stiffness  of  the  joints  and  rheumatic  pains,  a  chill  will  affect 
these  diseased  parto. 

343.  When  is  perspiration  called  insensible  ?  When  ser  siblc  ?  344.  How 
many  ounces  of  waste  matter  pass  through  the  skin  in  twenty-four  hours  ? 
"'''^5.  What  is  the  effect  if  perspiration  is  "  checked  "  ?  34<J.  What  is  the 
result  if  any  oigz-u  of  the  body  is  weakened  or  diseased  ? 

Note.  Let  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  skin  be  reviewed  from 
fig.  es.  or  froao  anatomical  outline  plate  9. 

u 


122  ANATOMY^   FHlSIOLOtY,    AND   BTG1£N1. 


CHAPTER    XXVI. 

HYGIENE    OF   THE    SKIN. 

347.  The  sensibility  of  the  skin,  and  the  activity  of  the  oil 
and  perspiratory  glands,  are  modified  by  the  condition  of  the 
cuticle,  the  temperature  of  the  skin  and  body,  the  purity  and 
warmth  of  the  air,  and  the  character  of  tba  light  to  which  the 
body  is  exposed. 

348.  To  maintain  a  healthy  action  of  every  part  r  is 
membrane,  attention  to  clothing,  bathing,  light.,  c  ad  air,  ^  of 
great  practical  importance. 

349.  Clothing,  in  itself,  does  not  bestow  heat,  but  is  chiefly 
useful  in  preventing  the  escape  of  heat  from  the  body,  and  in 
defending  it  from  the  temperature  of  the  atmosphere.  In  select- 
hig  and  applying  clothing  to  our  persons,  the  following  sugges- 
tions should  be  observed. 

350.  The  material  for  clothing  should  be  a  bad  conductor  of 
heat ;  tha  i  is,  it  should  have  little  tendency  to  conduct,  or  remove 
heat  from  the  body.  This  depends  on  the  property  possessed 
by  the  material  in  retaining  atmospheric  air  in  its  meshes. 

351.  Moisture  renders  clothing  a  good  conductor  of  heat 
Thus  all  articles  of  apparel  should  not  only  be  non-conductors 
of  heat,  but  should  not  possess  the  property  of  absorbing  and 
retammg  moisture. 


347—373.  Give  the  hygient  of  the  akin.  347.  "What  influences  modify 
the  action  of  the  oil  and  perspiratory  glands  ?  348.  To  what  must  atten« 
tion  be  given  to  maintain  a  healthy  action  of  the  skin  ?  349.  Does  clothing 
bestow  heat  ?  What  is  its  use  ?  350.  Mention  a  property  that  the  vnaterial 
for  clothing  should  possess  ?  351.  What  property  in  the  selection  of 
elothing  should  we  aroid? 


"'M».^ii  ).  p,w*Li  ■  "^  T^TT  ■Mi'rT  ;irT»^'T"^T^^v^'  ^ ' 


HYGIENE    OF   ?HE   SKIN.  123 

352.  Woollen  cloth  retains  more  a'r  in  its  meshes  ihdii  any 
other  article  except  furs,  and  it  absorbs  but  very  little  moisture. 
Consequently,  it  is  an  excellent  article  for  clothing. 

353.  Cotton  contains  less  air  in  its  meshes  than  woollen,  but 
much  more  than  linen.  In  texture,  it  is  smoother  than  wool, 
and  less  liable  to  irritate  the  skin.  This  fabric  absorbs  moisture 
in  a  small  degree.  In  all  respects,  it  is  well  adapted  for  gar- 
ments worn  next  the  skin. 

354.  The  clothing  should  be  of  a  porous  character.  The 
skin  is  not  only  an  important  agent  in  separating  from  the  blood 
those  impurities  that  otherwise  would  oppress  the  system  and 
occasion  death,  but  it  exercises  great  influence  in  respiration. 
Consequently,  the  apparel  should  be  made  of  a  material  that 
will  permit  the  air  to  pass  through  its  meshes. 

355.  Thi  clothing  should  be  not  only  porous^  but  fitted 
loosely.  The  garments  should  retain  a  layer  of  air  between 
them  and  the  body.  Every  one  is  practically  aware  that  a 
loose  dress  is  much  warmer  than  one  which  fits  closely ;  that 
a  loose  glove,  boot  or  shoe,  afford  greater  warmth  than  those  of 
smaller  dimensions. 

356.  More  clothing  is  necessary  when  a  vital  organ  is 
diseased.  When  vital  organs,  as  the  lungs,  heart,  «Sic.,  are 
diseased,  less  heat  is  generated  in  the  body.  For  this  reason, 
in  consumption,  dyspepsia,  and  even  headache,  the  skin  is  pale 
and  the  extremities  cold. 

357.  Mfire  clothing  is  required  in  the  evening  than  during 
the  day.  In  the  evening  we  have  less  vital  energy,  and,  there- 
fore, less  heat  is  generated  in  the  system,  than  in  the  early  part 
of  the  day  ;  beside,  the  atmosphere  is  damp,  the  skin  has 
become  moist  from  perspiration,  and  heat,  in  consequence,  ia 
rapidly  removed  from  the  body.     For  this  reason,  when  re« 

352.  Give  the  properties  of  woollen  cloth.  353.  What  are  the  quali- 
ties of  cotton  as  an  articlo  of  dress  ?  3.54.  Why  should  4he  material  for 
clothing  he  porous  ?  3.55.  W  hy  should  garments  be  fitted  loosely  ? 
8.56.  Why  do  we  need  more  clothing  when  the  lungs  or  brain  is  diseased? 
867.  Why  uo  we  need  more  clothing  in  the  eveniuij  than  during  the  day  ? 


.  .. JJWJfJWi 


124  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   ANI'    HYGIENE. 

turning  from  crowded  assemblies,  we  should  be  provided  with 
an  extra  garment. 

358.  A  person  of  active  habits  requires  less  clothing  tha* 
one  of  sedentary  employments ;  for  exercise  increases  the  cir 
culation  of  the  blood,  which  is  always  attended  with  the  disen 
gagcment  of  a   greater   quantity  of  heat;   consequently,   an 
increase  of  warmth  is  felt  throughout  the  system. 

359.  An  excessive^  as  well  as  an  insufficient,  amount  of 
clothing  is  alike  injurious.     The  custom  of  wearing  an  undue 
amount  on  some  parts  of  the  body,  and  leaving  exposed  the 
arms  and   upper  part   of   the  chest,  cannot  be   too   highly 
censured. 

360.  The  clothing  should  he  kept  clean.  No  article  of  ap- 
parel is  entirely  free  from  absorption  ;  even  wool  and  cotton 
possess  it  in  a  small  degree.  They  take  up  a  portion  of  the 
perspired  fluids,  and  thus  the  fibres  of  the  cloth  become  covered 
with  the  waste  matter  contained  in  the  perspiration.  A  neglect 
of  a  frequent  change  of  apparel,  is  one  cause  of  disease  with 
many  pei*sons,  particularly  the  poorer  classes  in  the  community. 

361.  The  clothing  in  which  loe  sleeps  as  well  as  beds  and 
bed-clothes,  should  be  aired  every  day.  If  this  is  not  done,  the 
moist  bedding  will  cause  a  chill,  and  the  perspired  matter  may 
be  carried  into  the  system  of  the  next  occupant.  Many  dis- 
eases are  thus  contracted. 

362.  When  the  clothing  has  become  wet,  it  is  best  to  change 
it  immediately.  The  skin  should  then  be  nibbed  with  a  dry, 
crash  towel,  until  reaction,  indicated  by  redness,  is  produced. 
If  the  garments  are  not  changed,  the  person  should  exercise 
moderately,  so  that  sufficient  heat  may  continue  to  be  generated 
in  the  system  to  dry  the  clothing  and  skin  without  a  chill. 

358,  Why  does  the  active  lahorer  require  less  clothing  than  a  person  of 
sedentary  employment  ?  3;39,  Is  too  much  as  well  as  too  little  clothing 
injurious  ?  360.  Why  should  the  clothing  be  kept  clean  ?  What  arises 
from  neglect  of  a  frequent  change  of  apparel  ?  361.  Why  should  beds  and 
bed-clothes  that  arc  used  be  aired  everv  day  ?  302.  What  ia  neoessaxy 
when  the  clothing  has  become  wet 


HYGIENE    OF   THE    SKIN  LA» 

^3.  Changes  of  dress^from  thick  to  thin^  should  always  he 
made  in  the  mornings  for  then  the  vital  powers  are  in  full  play. 
Sudden  changes  in  wearing  apparel,  as  well  as  in  food  and 
general  habits,  are  attended  with  hazard  ;  and  this  is  propor- 
tionate to  the  weakness  or  exhaustion  of  the  body  when  the 
change  is  J^ade. 

364.  Kathing  is  necessary,  in  order  that  the  perspirable 
matter  may  pass  freely  through  the  "  pores"  of  the  skin. 
The  whole  body  should  be  bathed  frequently,  as  perspira- 
tion is  not  confined  to  the  face  and  hands. 

365.  Cold  water — or  water  at  about  seventy  degrees  in 
summer,  and  eighty  degrees  in  winter  —  is  more  strengthening 
to  the  system  than  water  that  is  warmer. 

366.  No  person  should  bathe  when  the  body  is  fatigued, 
either  by  mental  or  physical  labor,  or  immediately  after  a 
meal.  The  best  time  for  bathing,  particularly  for  sick  per- 
sons, is  about  two  hours  after  breakfast.  Persons  in  hcallii 
may  bathe  in  the  morning,  or  in  the  evening. 

367.  The  sponge  bath  is,  perhaps,  the  simplest  and  best 
method  of  bathing.  In  this  but  a  small  portion  of  the  surface 
of  the  skin  is  exposed  to  the  air,  and  the  brisk  rubbing  that 
immediately  follows  the  wet  sponge,  prevents  a  chiil  of  the 
skin.  No  colds  would  be  contracted  in  bathing,  if  persons 
.vould  wipe  dry,  and  use  friction  with  a  coarse  towel  or  flesh- 
brush,  until  redness  or  warmth  of  the  skin  is  produced. 

368.  The  air  is  an  agent  of  importance  in  the  functions  of 
the  skin.  It  imparts  to  this  membrane  oxygen,  and  receives 
from  it  carbonic  acid.  It  also  removes  from  it  a  large  portion 
of  the  perspiration  and  the  more  fluid  portions /)f  the  oily  mat- 
ter.    In  order  that  the  air  may  accomplish  these  ends,  it  is 

363.  When  should  changes  in  Jresa  from  thick  to  thin  be  made  ?  Why  ? 
864.  What  is  said  of  the  necessity  of  bathing  ?  36.5.  What  temperature  of 
water  is  best  for  the  system  ?  3G6.  When  should  persons  not  bathe  ? 
When  is  the  best  time  for  b...tiing?  367.  What  method  is  the  simplest 
for  bathing  ?  How  are  colds  prevented  when  bathing  ?  368.  What  is  said 
of  the  influerce  of  the  air  on  the  functions  of  tte  skin  ? 

.    .^       11  ♦     ,    . 


12'>  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOG\      iWD    HYGIENE. 

neiessary  that  it  come  in  contact  with  the  body.  This  is  one 
of  the  many  reasons  why  we  sliould  wear  loose  and  porous 
clothing. 

3H9.  LiRHT  exercises  a  salutary  inPuence  upon  the  skin. 
Thus  wo  see,  that  those  individuals  who  labor  in  low,  damp, 
dark  rooms,  are  pale  and  sickly.  The  light,  permeating  the 
skin,  not  only  exercises  a  salutary  influence  upon  this  mem- 
brane, but  upon  the  blood,  and,  through  this  fluid,  upon  tho 
whole  system. 

370.  This  established  fact  shows  how  important  it  is  that 
school-houses,  mechanics'  shops,  kitchens,  and  sitting-rooms, 
be  not  only  well  ventilated,  but  favorably  situated  to  receive 
light.  For  the  same  reasons,  the  kitchen  and  the  sitting-room, 
which  are  the  apartments  most  used  by  ladies,  should  be  se- 
lected from  the  most  pleasant  and  well-lighted  rooms  in  the 
house. 

371.  When  any  portion  of  the  skin  has  been  frozen,  apply 
ice,  snow,  or  cold  water.  The  fire  and  a  warm  room  should 
be  avoided.  If  the  frozen  parts  blister,  treat  them  as  you 
would  burns. 

372.  In  scalds  and  burns,  when  there  is  no  blister,  or  if  one 
is  formed,  and  the  external  skin  is  not  broken,  apply  cold  water, 
as  Lng  as  the  smarting  pain  continues.  After  the  pain  has 
subsided,  cover  the  blistered  part  with  a  patch  of  cotton  or  linen 
cloth,  on  which  is  spread  lard  and  bees-wax. 

373.  If  the  external  skin  is  removed,  apply  lime-walei 
mixed  with  "sweet  oil,"  fresh  cream,  or  lard  and  bees-wax. 
When  the  dressings  are  applied,  they  should  not  be  removed 
until  they  become  dry  and  hard. 

369.  Show  the  effect  of  light  on  the  skin.  370.  What  is  said  of  the  se- 
lection of  those  rooms  that  are  the  most  used?  371.  What  should  ue 
applied  when  th9  skin  is  frozen?  What  should  be  avoided?  372.  In 
scalds  or  burns,  what  is  necessary  if  a  blister  is  formed  ?  373.  What  la 
necessary  if  the  oxte-nal  skin  is  removed?  How  often  should  the  dre»» 
lings  be  removed  ? 


ANATOMY   OF   THE   NERVOUS   SYSTEM.  127 


CHAPTER    XXVII. 

THE   NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 

374.  In  the  precediug  chapters,  the  structure  and  use  of  the 
bones  and  muscles  have  been  explained,  the  process  by  which 
the  food  is  converted  into  chyle  and  mixed  with  the  blood, 
together  with  the  manner  by  which  this  fluid  is  conveyed  to 
every  part  of  the  body,  has  been  described. 

375.  It  has  also  been  shown,  that  lymphatic  aosorption  com- 
mences as  soon  as  nutrition  is  completed,  and  conveys  the 
useless,  worn-out  particles  of  the  different  parts  back  into  the 
circulating  fluid ;  while  the  respiratory  organs  and  secretory 
glands  perform  the  work  of  preparing  the  waste  atoms  to  be 
conveyed  from  the  body.  These  functions  must  succeed  each 
other  in  proper  order ;  and  such  is  the  mutual  dependence  of 
these  processes,  that  a  medium  of  communication  is  necessary 
from  one  organ  to  another.  This  is  effected  by  means  of  the 
Nervous  System. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

376.  The  nervous  system  is  composed  of  the  Brain^ 
Cranial  Nerves,  Spinal  Cord,  Spinal  Nerves,  and  the  Sym- 
pathetic  Nerve. 

377.  The  brain  is  a  pulpy  organ  v.^ithin  the  skull-bones. 
The  upper  and  front  portion  is  called  the  Cer'e-brum.  The 
lower  portion,  situated  at  the  back  part  of  the  skull,  is  callt^d 
the  Cer-e-bel'lum. 

874.  "What  has  heen  described  in  the  preceding  chapters?  375.  Wlat 
has  also  been  shown  ?  376 — 388.  Give  the  anatomy  of  the  nervous  system 
376.  Of  what  is  the  nenrous  system  composed  ?    377.  Describe  the  brain 


J2b 


ANATOMY,    rilVSIOLOGV,    AND    IITQIENB. 


378.  The  cerebrum,  or  larger  portion  of  the  brain,  is  com 
posed  of  a  whitish  suhstancc,  with  an  irregular  border  of  gray 
matter  around  its  edges. 

379.  The  cerebellum  is  also  composed  of  white  and  gray 
matter,  but  the  latter  constitutes  the  largest  portion.  The  white 
matter  is  so  arranged,  that  when  cut  vertically,  the  appearance 
of  tba  trunk  and  branches  of  a  tree  {ar'hor  vi'ta)  is  presented 

Fig.  6'?. 


Fig  69.  a,  a,  The  scalp  turned  down.  A,  h,  b,  The  cut  ed^es  of  the  bones  cf  Ilia 
Hkiill.  c,  Tbe  external  membrane  of  the  brain  suspended  by  a  hook,  d,  The  left  8ia<; 
of  the  brain,  showing  its  convolutions. 

380.  The  brain  is  surrounded  by  three  membranes.  The 
external  membrane  is  thick  and  firm ;  the  middle  membrane  is 
thin,  and  looks  somewhat  like  a  spider's  web  ;  the  inner  mem* 
brane  consists  of  a  net-work  of  blood-vessels. 


378,  Describe  the  cerebrum.     379.  Describe  the  cerebellum.    380.  Wbat 
is  taid  of  the  membranes  of  the  brain  ?    What  does  fig.  69  represent  ? 


ANATOMY    OF   THE    NERVOUS    SYSTEM. 


1211 


381.  On  removing  the  upj)er  part  of  the  sku.l-honcs  and 
f^einbranes,  the  brain  presents  an  undulating,  folded  appear- 
ance.    These  ridges  are  called  con-vo-lu'tions. 

382.  The  spinal  cord  is  composed  of  a  whitish  substance, 
similar  to  that  of  the  brain.  It  is  covered  with  a  sheath,  or 
membrane,  and  extends  from  the  brain  tli rough  the  whole 
length  of  the  spinal  column.  The  upper  portion,  within  tlw» 
filiull-bones,  is  called  the  me-duVla  oh-lon-ga'ta. 

Fig.  70. 


Fig.  70.  A  section  of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord,  showing  the  relation  of  the  cmntaJ 
nerves  to  these  organs.  1,  The  cerebrum.  2,  Tlie  cerebellum,  with  its  arbor  vitM 
rtpresfnted.  3,  The  medulla  oblongata.  4,  The  spinal  cord.  6  The  first  pair,  ot 
nerve  of  smell.  7,  The  second  pair,  or  nerve  of  siglit.  9,  10,  12,  The  third,  fourth, 
and  sixth  pairs  of  nerves.  Tlicse  pass  to  the  muscles  of  the  eye.  II,  The  fiflh  pair, 
cr  nerve  of  taste,  and  also  the  sensitive  nerve  of  the  teeth.  13,  i'he  seventh  pair 
This  passes  to  the  muscles  of  the  face.  14,  The  eighth  pair,  or  nerve  of  hearing 
15,  16,  18,  19,  The  ninth,  tenth,  eleventh  and  twelfth  pairs.  These  pass  to  th*.  tODgu«, 
larynx,  and  neck.    20,  Two  spinal  nerves.  ^ 


381.  What  is  the  appearance  of  the  brain  when  the  skull-bones  anJ  n»era« 
branes  are  removed  ?  What  are  they  called  ?  382.  Describe  the  spinal 
oord.    What  is  the  medulla  oblongata  ?    Explain  fig.  70. 


130 


ANATCMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENE. 


383.  The  nerves  are  small,  while  cords,  that  pass  from  the 
biain  and  spinal  cord.  They  are  distributed  to  ev^  ;y  part  of 
the  human  system. 

38-4.  The  ckanial  nerves,  that  connect  with  the  base  of  the 
brain,  are  arranged  in  twelve  pairs.  Tliey  are  generally  dis- 
tributed to  the  parts  about  the  face. 

385.  The  spinal  nerves,  that  connect  with  the  spinal  cord, 
are  arranged  in  thirty-one  pairs,  each  arising  by  two  roots ;  uu 
anterior,  or  motor  root ;,  and  a  posterior,  or  sensitv^e  root. 


Fig.  71.  A,  The  spinal  cord,  surrounded  by  its  sheath,  (E,  E.)  B,  A  spinal  nerve, 
foriiied  by  the  union  of  the  motor  rixit,  (C,)  and  the  sensitive  root,  (D.)  At  D,  th« 
gaiiglioM,  or  linot,  upon  tliis  root  is  seen. 

38G.  Every  nerve,  however  small,  contains  two  distinct  cords 
of  nervous  matter.  One  gives  feeling,  while  the  other  is  used 
in  the  motion  of  the  part  to  which  they  are  distributed. 

^•^T.    The    SYMPATiiKTic    nerve    consists   of    a    series    of 
^'  .„gli-ay  or  knots,  extending  each  side  of  the  spinal  column, 
forming  a  chain  its  whole  length.     It  communicates  with  both 
the  cranial  and  spinal  nerves,  and  likewise  distributes  branchen 
to  all  the  intc'  nal  organs. 


383.  What  are  nerves?  384.  What  is  said  of  the  cranial  nerves? 
385.  "What  is  said  respecting  the  spinal  nerves  ?  386.  What  does  every 
aerre  contala  ?    Describe  fig.  71.    387.  Describe  the  sympathetic  nerve. 


rRTAIOLOGY    OF   THE    NERVOUS   SYUTEM  131 


CHAPTER   XXVIII. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OF   THE    NERVOUS    SYSTEM 

388.  The  brain  is  the  organ  of  the  mind.  To  the  cc^bnim, 
01  large  brain,  the  facuhies  of  thinkings  memory^  and  the  will, 
arc  ascribed.  In  the  human  body,  this  part  of  the  bmin  extends 
so  far  backward  as  to  cover  the  whole  of  the  cerebellum.  To 
the  cerebellum,  or  little  brain,  is  ascribed  the  seat  of  the  animal^ 
or  loicer  propensities. 

389.  The  brain  is  the  seat  of  sensation.  It  perceives  tho 
impressions  made  on  all  parts  of  the  body,  through  the  medium 
of  the  sensitive  nerves.  That  the  impressions  of  external 
objects,  made  on  these  nerves,  be  communicated  to  the  brain, 
where  sensation  is  perceived,  it  is  necessary  that  they  be  not 
diseased  or  injured. 

390.  There  is  a  plain  distinction  between  sensations  and  im- 
pressions ;  the  latter  are  the  changes  produced  in  the  extremiiies 
of  the  nerve ;  the  former,  the  changes  produced  in  the  brain 
and  communicated  to  the  mind. 

391.  What  part  of  the  brain  receives  the  impressions,  or  has 
the  most  intimate  relation  with  the  intellectual  faculties,  is  un- 
known. Some  portions,  however,  are  of  greater  importance 
than  others.  Pif;ces  of  both  the  white  and  gray  matter,  have 
been  removed  by  injuries  without  impairing  the  intellect  or 
destroying  life. 


388—394.  Give  the  Junctions  of  the  brain.  388.  "What  is  said  of  the  brain  ? 
What  is  ascribed  to  the  cerebrum  ?  To  the  cerebellum  ?  389.  Wherr  i« 
sensation  peiceived  ?  Through  what  medium  are  the  impressions  of  exter- 
nal objects  conveyed  to  the  brain  ?  390.  What  is  the  difference  between 
oenaations  and  impressions?  391.  Is  it  known  what  part  of  the  brain  kM 
the  most  intimate  relation  with  the  intellectual  faculties  i 


182  ANATOMY,    PJIYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYQIENK. 

392.  This  or^aii,  ullhough  it  tukes  cogni/ruicc  of  every  sen* 
Ballon,  is,  of  itself,  but  slightly  sensible.  It  may  be  cut  oi 
removed  wilhout  pain,  and  the  individual,  at  tlie  satne  time, 
retain  his  consciousue^s.  The  medulla  oblongata,  unlike  the 
brain,  ia  highly  s'.;nsitive ;  if  slightly  punctured,  convulsions 
follow ;  if  much  injured,  respiration,  or  breathings  immediately 
ceases 

393  The  brain  is  the  seat  of  the  vnll.  The  contraction,  or 
TiKivernent  of  the  muscles,  is  caused  by  an  influence  sent  from 
the  brain  by  the  act  of  the  mind,  or  the  will.  The  medium  of 
communication  from  this  organ  to  tlio  muscles,  is  the  motor 
nerves.  If  the  brain  is  in  a  state  of  repose,  the  muscles  are  at 
rest;  if,  by  an  act  of  the  will,  the  brtiin  sends  a  portion  of 
nervous  influence  to  a  muscle,  it  immediately  ci.iiracts,  and 
those  parts  to  which  the  muscle  is  attached,  move. 

394.  The  sympathetic  nerve,  although  it  confers,  neither 
Bensibility  nor  power  of  movement,  yet  it  gives  vitality,  or  life, 
to  all  the  important  parts  of  the  system.  Every  portion  of  the 
body  is,  to  a  certain  extent,  under  its  influence,  as  filaments 
from  this  system  of  nerves  accompany  the  blood-vessels  through- 
out their  course.  This  establislies  a  union,  or  sympathy,  with 
the  dilTerent  organs  of  the  body. 

Uluslralion.  When  the  brain  is  jarred  by  a  blow,  nausea 
an<l  vomiting  follow.  Again,  when  food  is  taken  that  irritates  the 
nerves  of  the  stomacii,  it  produces  headache,  from  the  sympathy 
of  the  brain  with  the  stomach,  through  this  system  of  nerves. 

Pig.  72.  A  back  view  of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord.  1,  The  cerebrum.  2,  Ths 
cerebellum.  3,  The  spiiiai  cord.  4,  Nervea  of  the  face.  5,  The  brachial  plexus,  or 
Huiiiu  of  nerves.  6,  7,  8,  9,  Nerves  of  the  arm.  10,  Nerves  i\\^„  pass  ureter  the  ribs. 
11,  The  lumbar  plexus  of  nervea.  12,  The  aacral  plexus  of  nervea.  l'  14, 1$,  16, 
Nervea  of  the  lower  limba. 

392.  What  is  said  of  the  sensibility  of  this  organ  ?  Of  the  medulla 
oblongata  ?  393.  Describe  how  the  contraction  of  a  muscle  is  effected. 
294.    What  is  said  of  the  sympathetic  nerve  ?    Explain  fig.  72. 

Note.    Let  the  anatomy  and   physiology  of  the  nervous  systeit  be  re 
newed  from  fig.  72,  or  anatomical  outline  plate  8. 


IMATOMT  or  run  NKUVOUS  BVaXUM 


133 


Fig.  72. 


IS4  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND    HYGIENE. 


CHAPTER     XXIX. 

HYGIENE  OF  THE  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

395.  As  the  different  organs  of  the  system  are  dependent  on 
l/je  brain  and  spinal  cord  for  efficient  functional  action,  and  as 
the  mind  and  brain  are  closely  connected  during  life,  the  former 
acting  in  strict  obedience  to  the  laws  which  regulate  the  latter, 
it  becomes  an  object  of  great  importance  in  education  to  dis- 
cover what  these  laws  are,  and  escape  the  numerous  evils  con- 
sequent on  their  violation. 

396.  For  healthy  and  efficient  action^  the  brain  should  Jc, 
primarily^  sound ;  as  this  organ  is  subject  to  the  same  general 
laws  as  other  parts  of  the  body.  If  the  brain  of  the  child  is 
free  from  defects  at  birth,  and  acquires  no  improper  impressions 
m  infancy,  it  will  not  easily  become  diseased  in  after  life. 

397.  The  brain  requires  a  due  supply  of  jmre  blood.  It  is 
estimated  that  one  teuth  of  all  the  blood  sent  from  the  heart 
goes  to  this  organ.  If  the  arterial  blood  be  altogether  vv^ith- 
drawn,  or  a  person  breathes  air  that  is  filled  with  carbonic  gas, 
the  brain  ceases  its  proper  action,  and  sensibility  with  con- 
sciousness become  extinct.  The  effects  of  slight  differences  in 
the  quality  of  the  blood  upon  the  action  of  the  brain,  are  not  so 
easily  recognized. 

Illustration.  Let  a  person  remain,  for  a  time,  in  a  crowded, 
ill-ventilated  hall  or  ch  -ch,  and  headache  or  faintness  is  gen- 
emlly  produced.  This  is  caused  by  the  action  of  impure  blood 
upon  the  brain. 

89o — 408.  Give  the  hygiene  of  the  nervous  system.  39.5.  Why  is  it  im- 
portant to  know  the  laws  which  regulate  the  action  of  the  brain  ?  396.  "V\^^a♦ 
is  necessary  that  ihe  action  of  the  brain  be  healthy  s.r\d  efficient  ?  397.  Why 
does  the  brai;j  require  a  due  supply  of  pure  blood  i  How  is  th^  Ulu»> 
trated> 


HYGIENE    OF    THE    NERVOUS    Si'STEM.  135 

Ohservalion.  if  a  school-teacher  wishes  to  have  his  pupils, 
on  the  day  of  examination,  appear  creditably,  he  will  bo  care- 
ful to  have  the  room  well  ventilated.  Ventilating  churches 
might  prevent  the  inattention  and  sleepiness  that  are  observed 
during  the  afternoon  sorvice. 

398.  Tlie  brain  should  be  called  into  action.  This  organ, 
like  the  muscles,  should  be  used,  and  then  allowed  to  rest,  or 
cease  from  vigorous  thought.  When  the  brain  is  properly 
called  into  action  by  moderate  study,  it  increases  in  size  and 
strength ;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  if  it  is  not  used,  the  action 
of  this  organ  is  enfeebled,  thereby  diminishing  the  function  of 
all  parts  of  the  body. 

399.  The  number  of  hours  that  the  brain  should  be  vigor- 
ously used,  depends  on  its  development,  and  the  general 
he'ilth  of  the  body.  The  child  with  a  large  brain  and  an  active 
mind,  should  not  be  induced  to  pursue  studies  above  the 
capacity  of  children  generally.  On  the  other  hand,  children 
of  sluggish  minds,  particularly  if  they  have  good  health,  should 
be  incited  to  study. 

400.  Excessive  and  continued  mental  exertion  is  injurious 
at  any  time  of  life ;  but  in  infancy  and  early  youth,  when  the 
structure  of  the  brain  is  still  immature  and  delicate,  permanent 
injury  is  more  easily  produced  by  incorrect  treatment  than  al 
nny  subsequent  period. 

Observation.  It  is  no  unusual  occurrence,  that  on  "  'xam- 
ination  day,"  the  best  scholars  appear  indiflerently.  Th's.  is 
the  result  of  riervous  exhaustion,  produced  by  extra  mental 
effort  in  preparing  for  the  final  examination.  Such  pupils 
should  divert  their  ninds  from  study,  for  a  few  days  previous 
to  examination.  During  this  time,  indulge  in  light  read'ng  and 
physical  recreation. 

Give  a  practical  observation.  39.S.  AVHiy  slioiild  the  brain  be  called  into 
tction  ?  What  is  the  effect  if  the  brain  is  not  used  ?  399.  How  long  should 
the  brain  be  actively  used  ?  What  is  said  respecting  the  child  fith  a  large 
brain?  Those  of  sluggish  minds  ?  4(J0.  When  is  excessive  and  continued 
mental  exeTtion  particularly  injurious  ?    Give  observation. 


136  ANATOMY,    I'HYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 

401.  We  should  not  enter  upon  continued  mental  exertion^ 
or  arouse  deep  feelings  immediately  after  a  full  meal.  Such 
is  the  connection  between  the  mind  and  body,  that  even  in  a 
perfectly  heahhy  person,  unwelcome  news,  sudden  anxiety,  or 
mental  excitement,  occurring  soon  after  eating,  will  impede 
digestion,  and  cause  the  stomach  to  loathe  the  masticated  food. 

402.  We  should  engage  in  intense  study  in  the  early  part 
of  the  day.  Studies  that  require  close  application  shouid  ae 
pursued  in  the  morning.  The  evening  should  be  devoted  to 
entertaining  conversation,  music,  and  light  reading.  This  will 
fit  the  system  of  the  student  for  quiet  and  refreshing  sleeo. 

Observation.  The  idea  of  gathering  wisdom  by  burning  the 
"  midnight  oil "  is  more  poetical  than  profitable  The  best  time 
to  use  the  brain  is  during  the  day. 

403.  Those  whose  employment  is  arduous,  and  the  groioing 
childy  need  more  sleep  than  the  idler  or  the  adult.  As  sleep  is 
the  natural  repose  of  all  organs,  it  follows  that  the  more  all  the 
organs  of  the  system  are  employed,  the  more  repose  they 
require  The  organs  of  the  child,  beside  sustaining  their  proper 
functions,  are  busy  in  promoting  its  growth.  This  nutritive 
process  is  attended  with  a  certain  degree  of  exhaustion. 

404.  The  condition  of  the  brain  is  modified  by  changing 
the  action  of  the  mind.  If  we  think  intensely  of  a  subject, 
the  face  will  become  flushed,  and  dizziness  or  pain  of  the 
head  will  be  induced.  Change  our  thoughts  to  something 
of  a  more  trifling  character,  and  these  peculiar  sensations 
will  cease. 

405.  The  brain  can  exercise  its  full  power  vvon  only  one 
object  at  a  time.  If  its  energies  are  directed  to  two  oi  more 
opemtions,  neither  will  receive  that  full  power  of  exertion  that 
It  would,  if  only  one  object  had  engaged  the  mind. 

401.  Why  should  we  not  arouse  deep  feeling  immediately  after  a  full 
meal  ?  402.  When  should  we  engage  in  intense  study  ?  Give  observation. 
403.  What  persons  require  the  most  sleep  ?  404.  Show  how  the  action  of 
the  mind  modifies  the  condition  of  the  brain.  405.  Why  cannot  tne  biaia 
exercise  its  full  powers  on  more  than  one  object  at  a  time  ? 


HTGIENE    OP    THE    NERVOUS    SYSTEM.  13^ 

406.  Regularity  is  of  great  importance  in  calling  the  hrain 
into  action.  Let  us  take  our  dinner  at  a  certain  hour  for  m  v- 
eral  successive  weeks,  and  we  at  last  find  our  appetites  indi- 
cating its  approach  with  the  greatest  regularity.  The  same  is 
true  of  the  nervous  system  ;  call  it  into  action  at  regular  periods, 
and  without  previous  thought,  we  enter  upon  that  mode  of 
action  when  the  time  approaches.  The  formation  of  "  habits  " 
are  promoted  by  this  principle. 

407.  Repetition  is  necessary  to  make  a  durable  imvression 
on  the  mind.  Repetition  of  mental  action  is  as  important  aa 
repetition  of  muscul'^r  action.  It  is  by  this  means  that  thoughts 
are  durably  impressed  upon  the  brain.  This  principle  has  been 
too  much  neglected  in  the  moral  and  intellectual  education  of 
children. 

408.  !n  injuries  of  the  brain,  the  person  is  generally  insen- 
sible, the  extremities  are  pale  and  cold,  the  pulse  feeble,  and 
the  breathing  is  less  frequent  and  full.  When  these  symptoms 
exist,  the  patient  should  be  placed  in  pure  air.  Friction,  with 
dry  warmth,  should  be  applied  to  the  extremities,  to  restore 
proper  circulation  in  the  blood-vessels.  There  should  be  no 
bleeding  until  the  skin  of  the  extremities  becomes  warm. 

406.  Should  the  brain  be  called  into  action  at  regular  periods  ?  407.  Why 
is  repetition  of  mental  action  necessary  ?  408.  What  is  the  effect  on  the 
system  when  the  brain  is  injured  ?  What  is  necessary  to  be  done  when 
Buoh  lymptoms  exist? 

12  • 


138        ANATOMY,  PHYSIOLOGY,  AND  HYGIENE. 


CHAPTER    XXX. 

SENSE    OF   TOUCH. 

409  Sensation  is  an  impression  made  upon  the  mind 
through  the  medium  of  the  senses.  There  are  five  senses, 
namely,  Touchy  Taste,  Smell,  Hearing,  and   Vision. 

410.  Touch  is  the  sense  that  enables  us  to  tell  whether  a 
body  is  rough  or  smooth,  cold  or  hot,  sharp  or  blunt.  This 
sense  and  feeling  reside  in  the  nerves  of  the  skin. 

411.  The  nerves  that  contribute  to  the  sense  of  touch,  pro- 
ceed from  the  anterior  half  of  the  spinal  cord.  Where  sensa- 
tion is  most  acute,  we  find  th  .  greatest  number  of  nervous 
filaments,  and  those  of  the  largest  size,  as  at  the  ends  of  the 
fingers  and  lips. 

Observation.  The  sense  of  touch  varies  in  different  persons, 
and  also  in  individuals  of  different  ages.  Thus  the  sensibilities 
of  the  child  are  rrnore  acute  than  those  of  the  adult. 

412.  This  sense  is  modified  by  the  condition  of  the  braui 
and  nerves ,  by  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  blood  supplied 
to  the  skin  ^  by  the  thickness  of  the  cuticle ;  and  by  cultivation. 

Ohsenmtion.  Blind  persons,  by  whom  the  beauties  of  the 
external  world  cannot  be  seen,  cultivate  this  sense  to  such  a 
degree  that  they  can  distinguish  objects  with  great  accuracy ; 
and  the  rapidity  with  which  they  read  books  prepared  for  their 
use,  is  a  convincing  proof  of  the  niceness  and  extent  to  which 
the  cultivation  of  this  sense  can  be  carried. 

409.  Through  what  medium  are  sensations  received  ?  Name  the  senses. 
410 — 412.  \VJuit  is  said  of  the  sense  of  touch f  410.  What  is  touch? 
411.  Why  is  sensation  acute  at  the  ends  of  the  fingeis  and  lips?  What 
Is  said  respecting  the  sense  of  touch  in  different  persons  ?  412.  What 
modify  this  sense  ?    What  is  said  of  blind  persons  ? 


SENSE    OF   TASTB. 


139 


SENSE    OF    TASTE. 


413.  Taste  is  \he  sense  by  which  ws  perceive  the  flavor  or 
relish  of  a  thing.  The  tongue  is  the  principal  organ  of  taste, 
though  the  sides  of  the  cheeks,  and  upper  part  of  the  throat, 
snare  in  this  function. 

414.  The  surface  of  the  tongue  is  thickly  studded  with 
papillae,  or  points ;  these  give  this  organ  a  velvety  appearance. 

To  these  points  the  gust'a-to-ry,  or  nerve  of  taste,  is  distributed. 

• 

Fig.  73. 


Pig.  73.  The  distribution  of  the  fifth  pair  of  nerves.  1,  The  orbit  for  the  ey 
9,  The  upper  Jaw.  3,  The  tongue.  4,  The  lower  jaw.  5,  Tlie  fifth  pair  of  nerves 
6,  The  first  branch  of  tliis  nerve,  that  passes  tt  the  eye.  9,  10,  11,  19,  13,  14,  Divi* 
ions  of  this  branch.  7,  The  second  branch  that  p.tsses  to  tlie  teeth  of  the  tipper  Jaw 
J.*,  16,  17,  18,  19,  20,  Divisions  of  this  branch.  8,  Tlie  third  branch  that  is  distributed 
to  the  tongue  and  teeth  of  the  lower  jaw.  33,  The  division  of  (his  branch,  callea 
g\j;tatory,    24,  The  division  that  is  distributed  to  the  teeth  of  the  lower  jaw. 

4l<3 — 419.  What  is  said  respecting  the  sense  of  taste  f  413.  Define  taste. 
What  is  the  principal  organ  of  taste  ?  414.  Where  is  the  nerve  of  taata 
distributed  ?    Explain  fig.  73. 


l-tO  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

Observation.  By  applying  strong  acids,  as  vinegar,  to  the 
tongue,  with  a  hair-pencil,  these  points  will  become  curiously 
lengthened. 

415.  Substances,  to  be  tasted,  nnust  be  either  naturally  fluid, 
or  partially  dissolved  by  the  saliva.  When  fluids  are  taken  into 
the  n\outh  the  papillas  dilate  and  erect  themselves,  and  the 
particular  sensation  excited  is  carried  to  the  brain  by  the  nerve 
of  taste.  But  if  dry,  solid  food  is  taken,  it  must  be  acted  upon 
by  the  saliva  before  the  impression  is  perceived. 

416.  The  use  of  taste  is  to  guide  men  and  animals  in  the  se- 
lection of  their  food,  and  to  warn  ihem  against  the  introduction 
of  injurious  articles  into  the  stomach.  This  sense  lias  been  made 
to  vaiy  more  than  any  other  by  the  refinements  of  social  life. 

417.  The  Indian's  like  or  dislike  to  particular  kinds  of  food, 
generally  extends  to  every  person  of  the  same  tribe  ;  but  among 
civilized  men,  no  two  individuals  can  be  found  alike  in  all  their 
tastes. 

418.  This  sense  is  modified  by  habit,  and  not  unfrequenily 
those  articles  which  at  first  were  disgusting,  become  highly 
agreeable,  by  persevering  in  the  use  of  them  ;  as  in  learning  to 
chew  tobacco,  &c. 

419.  Taste,  as  well  as  touch,  may  be  improved  in  acuteness. 
Those  persons  whose  business  leads  them  to  judge  of  the  quality 
of  an  article  by  their  taste,  can  discriminate  shades  of  flavor 
not  perceivable  by  ordinary  persons.  Epicures,  and  tasters  of 
wines  and  teas,  afford  examples. 

Observation.  Many  persons  impair  their  taste  by  bad  habits, 
as  chewing  or  smoking  tobacco,  and  using  stimulating  drinks, 
&c.  These  indulgences  lessen  the  sensibility  of  the  nerve,  and 
destroy  the  natural  relish  for  food. 

How  can  these  points  upon  the  tongue  be  seen  ?  415.  How  must  sub- 
stances be,  in  order  to  be  tasted  ?  Show  how  the  taste  of  substances  ia 
perceived  by  the  brain,  416.  What  is  the  use  of  taste  ?  What  is  said  of 
the  difference  among  persons  as  regards  taste  ?  418.  What  effect  has  habit 
on  this  sense  ?  419.  What  effect  has  cultivation  ?  Give  illustrative  er- 
unplefl.    How  may  the  taste  be  impaired  ? 


'-T"T7'"^^^n7"'''^*'*^'''"*'r7"r 


SENSE   OF    SMELL. 


14J 


SENSE   OF    SMELL. 


420.  Smell  is  the  sense  that  enables  us  to  discern  the  odor, 
or  scent,  of  a  thing.  This  sense  is  located  in  the  air  passages 
of  the  nose. 

421.  The  air  passages,  or  nostrils,  are  lined  by  mucous 
membrane,  which  is  continuous  with  the  skin  exte/nally,  and 
with  the  lining  membrane  of  othor  cavities  which  communicate 
with  theni.  To  this  membrane  the  ol-facl'o-ry^  or  nerve  of 
smell,  is  distributed. 

422.  To  protect  the  delicate  filaments  of  the  nerve  of  smell, 
thus  freely  exposed  to  the  air  and  to  the  painful  stimulus  of 
sharp,  pungent  odors,  the  membrane  is  kept  constantly  moisi 
by  a  fluid  secreted  by  the  glands,  with  which  it  is  provided. 

Fig.  74. 


Fig.  74.  A  side  view  of  the  passages  or  the  nostrils,  and  Hie  distribution  of  the  first 
bdir  of  nerves.  4,  The  olfactory  nerve  5,  The  fine  and  curious  divisions  of  this 
nerve  on  the  membrane  of  the  nose. 

423.   When  substances  are   presented  to  the  nose,  the  air 
that  is  passing  through  the  nostrils  brings  the  odoriferous  parti- 

420—427.  TMiat  is  said  in  reference  to  smell  f  420.  What  is  smell  ?  Wher? 
is  this  sense  located?  421.  Describe  the  air  passages  of  the  nose.  422.  How 
are  the  filaments  of  the  nerve  of  smell  protected  from  pungent  odors  ? 
Wliat  does  fig.  74  represent  ?  42ii.  llow  is  the  odor  of  substance9  carried 
to  the  brain  ? 


142  ANATOMF,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

cle8  of  matter  in  contact  with  the  filaments  of  tlie  nerve  of 
smell,  that  are  spread  upon  the  membrane  that  lines  the  air 
passages,  and  the  impression  is  then  carried  to  the  brain. 

424.  This  sense  is  closely  connected  with  that  of  taste,  and 
aids  man,  as  well  as  the  inferior  animals,  in  selecting  proper 
food.  It  also  gives  us  pleasure  by  the  inhalation  of  agreeable 
odors. 

425.  The  sense  of  smell,  like  taste  and  touch,  may  be  im- 
proved by  cultivation.  Thus  the  North  American  Indians  can 
easily  distinguish  different  tribes,  and  different  persons  of  lie 
same  tribe,  by  the  odor  of  their  bodies. 

426.  This  sense  is  seen  to  be  remarkably  acute  in  the  dog ; 
he  will  trace  his  master's  footsteps  through  thickly-crowded 
streets,  and  distinguish  them  from  thousands  of  others ;  he  will 
track  the  hare  over  the  ground  for  miles,  guided  only  by  the 
odor  that  it  leaves  in  its  flight. 

427.  Acuteness  of  smell  requires  that  the  brain  and  nerve 
of  smell  be  healthy,  and  that  the  membrane  that  lines  the  nose 
be  thin  and  moist.  Any  influence  that  diminishes  the  sensibility 
of  the  nervous  filaments,  thickens  the  membrane,  or  renders  it 
dry,  impairs  this  sense. 

Observation.  Snvff,  when  introduced  into  the  nose,  not  only 
diminishes  the  sensibility  of  the  nerve,  but  thickens  the  lining 
membrane.  This  thickening  of  the  membrane  obstructs  tlie 
passage  of  air  through  the  nostrils,  and  thus  obliges  "  snuff- 
takers"  to  open  their  mouths  when  they  breathe. 

424.  What  is  the  use  of  this  sense  ?  425.  What  is  said  of  this  sense 
among  the  North  American  Indians  ?  426.  In  the  dog  ?  427.  What  does 
acuteness  of  smell  require  ?  What  will  irapaj:  this  sense  ?  What  efiect 
nas  imuff  upon  the  nasal  organ  ? 


8ENS£   OF   VI&ION.  143 


CHAPTER    XXXI. 

SENSE    OF    VISION. 

428.  This  sense  contributes  more  to  the  enjoyment  and  hap- 
piness of  man  than  any  of  the  other  senses.  By  it,  we  per- 
ceive the  form,  color,  size,  and  position  of  objects  that  surround 
us.     The  beautiful  organ  of  vision,  or  sight,  is  the  Eye. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  VISION. 

429.  The  eye  is  shaped  like  a  globe,  and  is  placed  in  a 
cavity  in  front  of  the  skull.  The  sides  of  the  globes  are  com- 
posed of  three  coats^  or  membranes.  The  interior  of  the  globe 
is  filled  with  certain  substances  called  Hu'mors. 

430.  The  coats  are  three  in  number :  Ist.  ^/The  ScU-roi'ic 
and  Corn'e-a.  2d.  The  Cho'roid,  Tris,  and  Cil'ia-ry  processes, 
3d.   The  Ret'i-na. 

431.  The  HUMORS  are  also  three  in  number:  1st.  The 
A*qvI-^\iSy  or  watery.  2d.  The  Crys'tal-line.  3d.  The 
Vit're-ous^  or  glassy. 

432.  The  sclerotic  coat  is  firm,  and  its  color  white ;  hence, 
It  is  frequently  called  the  "  white  of  the  eye."  From  its  tough- 
ness, it  forms  the  principal  support  to  this  organ.  This  mem- 
brane, with  the  cornea  in  front,  encloses  the  eye. 

433.  The  cornea  is  the  transparent  part  of  the  eye  in  front, 
which  projects  -nore  than  the  rest  of  the  globe.  It  is  shaped 
like  the  crystal  of  a  watch,  and,  in  health,  gives  the  eye  its 
sparkling  brilliancy. 

428 — 449.  Crive  the  structure  of  the  different  parts  of  the  eye.  429.  De- 
joribe  the  eye.  430.  Name  the  coats  of  the  eye.  431.  Name  the  humors 
of  the  eye.  432.  Describe  the  sclerutic  coat.  433.  Where  is  the  cornea 
situated  ? 


144  ANATOy.Y,   PI1Y3I0L0GY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

434.  The  CHOROID  coat  is  of  a  dark  color  upon  its  inner 
surface.  It  contains  a  great  number  of  blood-vessels,  which 
give  nourishment  to  diiFerent  parts  of  the  eye. 

435.  The  iris  is  situated  a  short  distance  behind  the  cornea. 
It  is  the  most  delicate  of  all  the  muscles  of  the  body.  This 
pait  gives  the  blue,  gray,  or  black  color  to  the  eye. 

436.  In  the  centre  of  the  iris  is  ar.  opening  called  the  jni'fi'd* 
which  enlarges  or  contracts,  according  to  the  quantity  of  liglit 
that  falls  upon  the  eye. 

Fig.  76. 


Fig.  75.  A  section  of  the  eye,  Been  il^om  witliin  1,  The  divided  edge  of  the  thre« 
conifl.  2,  Tlie  pupil.  3,  The  iria.  4,  The  ciliary  procedses.  5,  The  acollopedl  u>rdei 
of  the  retina. 

437.  On  viewing  the  part  of  the  eye  near  the  pupil,  small 
Hnes,  of  a  lighter  color,  will  be  seen  passing  to  the  outer  part  of 
the  iris ;  these  are  called  ciliary  processes.  They  are  about 
sixty  in  number. 

438.  The  retina  is  the  innermost  coat  of  the  eye.     It  is 


*  From  pu  pa,  Latin,  a  babe ;  because  it  reflccta  the  diminisliecl 
image  of  the  person  who  looks  \ipon  it. 

434.  Describe  the  choroid  coat.  43<'5.  Where  is  the  iris  situated?  What 
ia  said  of  this  coat  ?  436.  Wliere  is  the  pupil  of  the  eye  ?  Explain  fig. 
76.  437-  Describe  the  ciliary  processes.  43S.  Give  the  structure  of  the  in* 
nermost  coat  of  the  eye. 


SENSE    OF    VISION. 


i4ft 


formed,  in  part,  by  an  expansion  of  the  optic  nerve  over  the 
botton'  of  the  eye,  where  ihe  sense  of  vision  is  first  received 

439.  The  aqueous  humor  occupies  the  space  between  tho 
coinea  and  crystalline  humor,  both  before  and  behind  the  iria. 

440.  The  crystalline  humor  (lens)  lies  behind  tho  aque- 
ous humor  and  pupil.  Its  form  is  different  on  the  two  sides. 
When  boiled,  it  may  be  separated  into  layers  like  those  of  aii 
onion 

Observations.     1st.   The  lens  in  tho  eye  of  a  fish  is  ro'ind 
like  a  gl<>be,  and  when  boiled,  it  may  be  separated  into  layers, 
resembUnjjf  those  of  the  liuman  eye. 

Fig.  76. 


Pig.  7C.  A  section  of  the  (jlobe  of  the  eye.  1,  The  sclerotic  cont.  2,  The  cornoa. 
A  liU  coiiiiL-cis  with  the  sclerotic  co.-it  by  a  bevelled  edge.  3,  Tlie  choroid  coat,  d,  0,  The 
.ris.  7,  The  pupil.  8,  Tlie  retina.  10,  11,  II,  Chambers,  or  c.ivities  of  the  eye  thiit 
contain  the  aqueous  humor.  13,  The  crystalline  lens.  13,  The  vitreous  buniur. 
25,  The  optic  nerve.    14,  16,  One  of  the  arteries  of  the  eye. 

2d.  When  the  crystalline  lens,  or  the  membrane  which  sur- 
rounds it,  is  changed  in  structure,  so  as  to  prevent  the  rays  of 
light  passing  to  the  retina,  the  afToction  is  called  a  cataract. 

441.    The  VITREOUS  humor  is  situated  in  tlie  back  part  of 


439.  Whei)  is  the  aqueous  humor  found?  440.  The  crystalline  humor  ? 
How  can  the  structure  of  this  lens  be  seen  ?  Explain  fig.  76  441.  Wliere 
\m  the  vitreous  humor  situated  ? 

13 


146  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGlENB. 

the  eye.     It  occupies  more  llian  two  thirds  of  the  whole  iuto. 
rior  of  the  globe  of  the  eye. 

Observation.  The  structure  of  this  organ  can  be  seen,  by 
first  freezing  the  eye  of  a  sheep,  or  un  ox ;  it  then  can  be  cut 
in  various  directions,  and  each  part  separately  examined. 

442.  The  optic  nekve,  or  nerve  of  vision,  extends  from 
tl'.o  brain  to  the  back  part  of  the  eye,  wliere  it  expands  on  a 
portion  of  the  cliuroid  coat.  On  this  expansion  the  iinige  of 
objects  arc  first  formed. 


Fig.  77. 


Fig.  77.  The  second  pair  of  nerves.  1, 1,  The  gh)l)e  of  the  eye.  The  one  on  Um 
loft  is  perfect,  but  the  sclerotic  coat  has  been  removed  from  tiio  one  on  the  k'ght,  to 
•liow  the  retina.  3,  The  croHsing  of  the  optic  nerve.  3,  4,  The  brain.  5,  6,  The 
C4tininenceinent  of  the  spinal  cord.    7,8,  9, 10,  11, 12, 13,  The  cranial  nerves. 

4 '.3.  The  EYEBROWS  and  eyelids  protect  the  eye  from  too 
strong  impressions  of  light,  and  also  prevent  particles  of  dust 
and  perspiration  from  falling  into  it. 

How  can  the  structure  of  the  eye  be  seen  ?  442.  What  is  said  of  the 
optic  nerve  ?  AVhat  is  represented  by  tig.  77  ?  443.  What  is  the  use  ot  tha 
vyebrows  and  eyelids  ? 


_,:;.■.    -.-^KJi-'tr^^ 


SENSE    OF   VISION. 


147 


44-1.  The  EYELASHES  are  attached  to  the  eyelids  •  and  wlmn 
iho  eye  is  closed,  they  interlace,  and  thus  prevent  particles  of 
matter  from  injuring  this  delicate  organ.  They  add  very 
greatlv  to  the  expression  of  the  eye. 

445.  The  eyelids  not  only  protect  the  eye,  by  closing  it  in 
front,  from  too  brilliant  rays  of  light  and  from  dust,  but  dis- 
tribute eqtiiUy  over  the  globe  of  the  eye  a  watery  fluid  secreted 
by  glands,  with  which  they  are  provided. 

4-46.  Beside  this,  there  is  another  fluid,  (tears,)  secreted  by 
the  lacli'ry-rnal,  or  tear-gland,  above  the  eye.  The  tears  flow  to 
the  eye  by  several  minute  ducts.  As  this  fluid  passes  over  the 
eye,  the  small  atoms  of  dust  are  swept  away,  by  the  process 
of  "winking,"  and  with  the  tears  pass  into  two  ducts  at  the 
inner  corner  of  both  eyelids. 

Fig.  78. 


Fig.  78.  1,  The  tear-gland.  9,  The  ducts  tliat  pass  from  this  glard  to  the  eys 
3,  3,  DucU  at  the  inner  corner  of  the  eyelids.    4,  The  duct  tliat  opens  into  the  nose. 

447.  These  small  ducts  usjally  convey  the  tears  away  as  quick- 
.y  as  they  are  formed  ;  but  when  the  eye  is  irritated,  or  the  mind 

444.  "What  is  the  use  of  the  eyelashes  ?  445.  Give  another  use  of  these 
protecting  parts  of  the  eye.  416  Where  are  tears  formeJ  ?  Wliat  is  the 
tne  of  tears?  What  does  fig.  78  represent  ?  447.  What  is  the  effect  when 
the  eye  is  irritated  ? 


148 


ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENA 


affected  bj-  various  emotions,  they  flow  to  the  eye  too  iipidlj  to 
oe  conveyed  to  the  nose,  and  they  then  course  down  the  cheek. 

448.  The  ORBIT,  or  bony  cavity,  m  which  the  globe  of  the 
eye  is  placed,  is  hned  with  a  thick  cushion  of  fat,  in  order  that 
the  eye  may  move  in  all  directions,  with  perfect  freedom  ana 
without  friction.    • 

449.  The  eye  is  moved  by  six  muscles,  one  extremity  of 
which  is  attached  to  the  bones  of  the  orbit ;  the  other  extrem- 
ity to  the  globe  of  the  eye. 

Fig.  79. 


Pig  79.    A  view  of  the  eye  and  Its  muscles,    a,  b,  e,  d,  e,  Five  of  these  muscles. 
/,  The  optic  nerve.    The  bono  is  seen  above  and  below  the  eye. 

Observation.  If  the  external  muscle  is  too  short,  the  eye  is 
turned  out,  producing  the  "wall  eye."  If  the  internal  muscle 
is  contracted,  the  eye  is  turned  inward  toward  the  nose.  It  \a 
then  called  a  "  cross  eye." 


448.  How  lire  the  raoverncnts  of  the  eye  facilitated  ?  449.  How  many 
muscles  move  the  <^ye  ?  Wluit  is  the  effect  if  the  external  muscle  is  con* 
Iracted  ?    The  iiiteruul  muscle  ? 


"^ 


PHYSIOLOGY   OF   THE    ORGANS    OF   VISION. 


149 


CHAPTER    XXXII. 

PHYSIOLOGY    OF    THE    ORGANS    OF    VISION. 

450.  As  the  eye  is  strictly  an  optical  instniment,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  know  the  laws  that  regulate  the  transmission  of  light, 
before  the  use  of  the  different  parts  of  this  organ  can  bo 
understood. 

451.  It  is  a  law  of  optics,  that  the  rays  of  light,  while  passing 
through  the  same  medium,  proceed  in  straight  lines ;  but  that 
they  are  turned  out  of  their  course  when  they  pass  from  one 
medium  to  another  of  different  density.  They  are  then  said  to 
be  refracted. 

Kg.  80. 


Fig  90.  The  course  of  the  ray«  of  light  coming  fVom  an  object  and  passing  through 
the  eye.  A,  A  pen,  an  inverted  image  of  which  is  painted  on  the  retina  of  the  eye, 
at  B. 

452.  Another  law  is,  that  the  rays  of  light,  as  they  become 
more  distant  from  the  luminous  body,  diverge,  or  extend  farther 
from  each  other.  We  would  also  add,  that  the  rays  of  light 
f-om  an  object,  in  passing  through  the  eye,  cross  each  other. 
Hence,  the  image  of  the  object  is  inverted  on  the  retina. 


450 — 454.     G-ive  the  ph/swIo<jy  of  the  organs  of  vision.    450.  What  is 
necessary  before  the  use  of  the  different  parts  of  the  eye  can  be  understood  ? 

451.  Give  the  first  law  in  reference  to  light.     What  is  represented  by  fig.  80  ? 

452.  The  secord  law.    Why  is  the  image  of  objects  inverted  on  the  retina? 

13  • 


150  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 

453.  \\  e  will  now  pass  to  the  use  of  the  diflcrent  parts  of 
the  eye.  The  eyebrows,  eyelids,  and  eyelashes,  are  pro* 
tooting  organs  to  tnis  delicate  instrument ;  while  the  coats  give 
form  and  protection  to  the  more  delicate  parts  within. 

4M.  The  transparent  cornea  and  humors  are  mediums  of 
diflerent  density ;  so  that  the  direction  of  the  rays  of  light  that 
leave  the  object  at  which  we  look,  are  refracted  and  form  upon 
the  retina  a  small,  but  clear  image  of  that  object.  The  im- 
pression of  the  image  upon  the  retina,  is  then  carried  to  the 
brain  by  the  optic  nerve. 

Observations.  1st.  When  the  cornea  and  crystalline  lens 
become  flattened,  as  in  old  age,  the  image  is  loimed  beyond 
the  retina.     This  defect  is  remedied  by  wearing  convex  glasses. 

2d.  When  the  cornea  and  crystalline  lens  are  too  convex, 
hn  image  of  the  object  will  be  formed  before  the  retina.  This 
defect  of  the  eye  is  called  near-sightedness.  To  give  such 
persons  longer  vision,  it  is  necessary  to  wear  concave  glasses. 


HYGIENE  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  VISION. 

455.  The  eye,  like  other  organs  of  the  hody,  should  be  used^ 
and  then  rested.  If  we  look  intently  at  an  object  for  a  long 
time,  the  eye  becomes  wearied,  and  the  power  of  vision  dimin- 
i.«hed.  On  the  contrary,  if  the  eye  is  not  called  into  action,  its 
functions  are  enfeebled. 

4.56.  Sudden  transitions  of  light  should  be  avoided.  The 
irii  enlarges  or  contracts,  as  the  light  that  falls  upon  the  eye  is 
faint  or  strong;  but  the  change  is  not  instantaneous.     Hence  the 

453.  ^Vhat  parts  of  the  eye  are  used  to  protect  this  aelicate  organ  ? 
To  give  it  form  ?  454.  What  is  said  of  the  use  of  the  cornea  and  humors  ? 
Whntt  do  persons  need  convex  glasses  ?  When  concave  ?  455 — 461.  Give 
the  h"jiene  of  the  organs  of  vision.  455.  How  should  the  eye  be  used  ? 
What  '8  the  eflect  of  using  the  eye  too  long  ?  Of  not  calling  it  into  action  ? 
456.  What  should  be  avoided  in  using  the  eye  ? 

JVr>'«i.  Review  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  eye  from  €g.  76, 
or  fio->u  anatomical  outline  plate  10. 


/ 

/■/ 

:   r 

1 

f 

<■ 

> 

,' 

> 

HYGIENE    OF    THE    ORGANS    OF   VISION.  151 

imperfect  vision  in  passing  from  a  strong  to  a  dim  light,  and  the 
overwhelming  sensation  experienced  on  goiig  from  a  dimly 
lighted  room  to  one  brilliantly  lighted. 

457.  As  far  as  possible^  avoid  all  oblique  positions  of  the 
eye,  when  viewing  objects.  If  the  eye  is  turned  obliquely  in 
viewing  objects,  it  may  produce  an  unnatural  contraction  of  the 
muscle  called  into  action.  This  contraction  of  the  muscle  is 
called  strabismus;  or  cross-eye. 

458.  Children  should  be  trained  to  use  the  eye  upon  objects 
at  dijerent  distances.  This  is  necessary,  in  order  that  the 
vision  may  be  correct  when  objects  at  various  distances  are 
viewed,  as  the  eye  accommodates  itself  to  receive  impressions 
from  objects  remote  as  well  as  near. 

459.  When  particles  of  dust  get  upon  the  eye,  the  individual 
should  be  placed  before  a  strong  light,  the  lids  held  open,  and 
the  particles  removed  with  the  corner  of  a  fine  linen  or  silk 
handkerchief.  Sometimes  the  substance  is  concealed  under 
the  upper  eyelid,  and  it  may  be  then  exposed  by  turning  back 
the  lid  in  the  following  manner. 

460.  Take  a  knitting-needle,  or  small,  slender  piece  of  stick, 
which  is  perfectly  smooth,  and  place  it  over  the  upper  lid,  in 
contact  with  and  just  under  the  edge  of  the  orbit ;  then,  holding 
it  firmly,  seize  the  lashes  with  the  fingers  of  the  disengaged 
hand,  and  gently  turn  the  lid  back  over  the  stick. 

461.  Too  many  trials  ought  not  to  be  made,  if  unsucoesstUi, 
as  much  inflammation  may  be  induced ;  but  a  surgeon  ought 
to  be  consulted  as  soon  as  possible.  Eye-stones  ought  never 
to  be  placed  in  the  eye,  as  they  often  cause  more  irritation 
than   the  evil  which  they  are  intended  to  remedy. 

457.  Wliat  should  be  avoided  in  viewing  objects  ?  458.  Why  should  we 
▼lew  objects  at  different  distances  ?  4"59.  What  should  be  done  whfa 
particles  of  dust  get  npon  the  eye  ?  460.  How  can  particles  of  dust  b» 
removed  from  the  upper  eyelid  ?    461.  What  should  be  avoided  ? 


152  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENB. 


CHAPTER    XXXIII. 

SENSE    OF   HEARING. 

462.  The  sense  of  hearing  is  next  in  importance  to  that  of 
vision.  Through  this  sense  we  are  enabled  to  perceive  sounds, 
that  not  only  subserve  to  our  connfort  and  pleasure,  but  are 
instrumental  to  our  intellectual  enjoyments.  The  organ  of 
hearing,  or  the  Ear^  is  one  of  the  most  complicated  in  the 
human  body. 

ANATOMY  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  HEARING. 

463.  The  ear  is  composed  of  three  parts:  1st.  The  Ex- 
ter'nal  ear.  2d.  The  Tym'pan-um^  or  middle  ear.  3d.  The 
Lah'y-rinth^  or  internal  ear. 

464.  The  external  ear  presents  many  ridges  and  furrows, 
arising  from  the  folds  of  the  cartilage  that  form  it.  A  ftT.nel- 
shaped  tube  extends  from  the  external  to  the  middle  ear. 

Observation.  Many  animals  have  small  muscles  that  move 
the  external  ear,  in  order  to  catch  sounds  from  every  direction. 
The  hare,  rabbit,  and  horse,  afford  good  examples. 

465.  At  the  internal  extremity  of  the  tube,  is  a  thin,  semi- 
transparent  membrane,  that  separates  the  external  from  the 
middle  ear.  It  is  called  mem'hra-na  tym'pan-i^  or  drum  of 
tlie  ear.  This  and  the  bitter  wax  found  around  the  hairs  in  the 
tube,  prevent  insects  from  entering  the  head. 

466.  The  middle  ear  is  connected  with  the  internal  and 

■  '  ^    '  ■  ■  ■  '~  III     —    I  —    —I       I  .       I  M 

462.  What  is  said  of  the  sense  of  hearing  ?  463 — 478.  Give  the  anatomy 
of  the  cn-gans  of  hearing .  463.  Name  the  parts  of  the  ear.  464.  Describe  th« 
external  ear.  What  is  said  of  the  ears  of  horses,  rabbits,  &c.  ?  465,  De- 
scribe the  drum  of  the  ear.  4o6.  How  is  the  m.ddle  ear  connected  TritA 
.He  internal  cavity  ? 


ANATOMY    OF   THE    ORGANS    OF    HEARING. 


153 


most  important  cavity,  by  four  small  bones,  which  are  the  most 
delicate  and  beautifully  shaped  bones  in  the  body.  These  are 
so  arranged,  as  to  form  a  chain  from  the  drum  of  the  ear  to 
the  labyrinth. 

467.  From  the  middle  ear,  a  tube  opens  Into  the  back  part 
of  the  throat,  called  Eu-sta'chi-an^  which  admits  air  into  this 
part  of  the  ear.  If  this  tube  is  closed  by  disease  of  the  throat, 
hearing  is  impaired. 


Fig.  81. 


Fig.  81.  a,  The  external  ear.  e,  The  tube  that  leads  to  the  middle  ear  g,  The 
drum  of  the  ear.  «,  K,  The  middle  ear.  ft,  /,  A,  The  internal  ear.  i,  The  tube  tha« 
leads  U'  the  throat    d,  The  auditory  nerve. 

468.  The  internal  ear  is  very  intricate,  and  the  uses  of 
Its  various  parts  are  not  well  known.  It  is  called  the  labyrinth^ 
from  its  many  windings.  This  part  of  the  ear  is  composed  of 
a  three-cornered  cavity,  called  the  ves'ti-bule.,  the  coch'le-a^ 
(fPDin  its  resembling  a  snail  shell,)  and  the  sew- i-ct>'cM-/ar  canals. 


467.  What  tube  opens  into  the  middle  ear  ?    What  is  its  use  ?    Explaii 
fig.  81.    468    Describe  the  internal  ear. 


\b4 


ANATOIttY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE 


4'/<9.  The  internal  ear  is  the  only  part  that  is  absolutely 
essential  in  hearing.  Other  parts,  already  described,  may  be 
removed,  and  yet  the  person  may  hear. 

Fig.  82. 


Fig.  fi?.    A  view  of  the  labyrinth  laid  open.    This  figure  Is  highly  magnified 

I,  1,  Tlie  coclilea.    Q,  2,3,  3,  Two  channels,  that  wind  two  and  a  half  turns  around 
B  central  point,  (5.)    7,  The  central  portion  of  the  labyrinth,  called  the  vestibule. 

II,  12,  13, 14, 15,  16, 17, 18,  The  semicircular  canals.    The  cochlea  and  semicircular 
canals  open  into  the  vestibule. 

470.  The  auditory  nerve,  or  nerve  of  hearing,  proceeds 
from  the  brain,  and  expands  upon  the  membrane  that  lines  the 
internal  ear,  similar  to  the  expansion  of  the  optic  nerve. 


469.  Wliat  part  of  the  ear  is  absolutely  essential  in  hearing  ?    What  does 
fig.  82  represent  ?    470.  Describe  the  auditory  nerre. 


.    ^ 


PHT3T01.OOY    OF   THE   ORGANS    OP    HEARING  155 


CHAPTER    XXXIV. 

PHYSIOLOGY  OF  THE   ORGANS  OF  HEARING 

471.  Hearing  is  that  function  by  which  we  ootain  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  vibratory  motions  of  bodies,  which  constitute 
sounds.  The  precise  function  of  all  the  different  parts  of  the 
ear  are  not  known. 

472.  The  function  of  the  external  ear,  is  to  collect  sounds 
and  reflect  them  into  the  tube  that  connects  the  external  with 
the  middle  ear.  The  "  membrana  tympani  "  receives  all  the 
impressions  of  the  air  which  enter  the  tube,  and  conveys  them 
to  the  bones  of  the  ear.  It  also  serves  to  moderate  the  in- 
iensity  of  sound. 

473.  The  supposed  office  of  the  middle  ear,  is  to  carry  the 
vibrations  made  on  the  membrana  tympani  to  the  internal  ear. 
This  is  effected  by  the  air  which  it  contains,  and  by  the  chain 
of  small  bones  that  are  enclosed  in  this  cavity. 

474.  But  little  is  known  of  the  functions  of  the  internal  ear ; 
its  parts  are  filled  with  a  watery  f\uid  in  which  the  filaments  of 
the  auditory  nerve  terminate. 

475.  The  auditory  nerve,  like  the  optic,  has  but  one  function, 
that  of  special  sensibility,  or  transmitting  sound  to  the  brain. 
The  nerves  which  furnish  the  ear  with  ordinary  sensibility, 
proceed  from  the  fifth  pair. 

476.  The  transmission  of  sound  through  the  different  parts 

471 — 476.     Give  the  use  of  the  organs  of  hearing.    471.  "Wliat  is  hearing  ? 

472.  What  is  the  function  of  the  external  car  ?     Of  the  drum  of  the  ear  \ 

473.  "What  is  the  use  of  the  middle  ear  ?    474.  What  is  said  of  the  func- 
^ons  of  tne  intoical  ear  ^    475.  Of  the  auditory  nerve  ? 


jrjii 


156 


4NA70M5r,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   n\GlEU£. 


of  the  eai,  will  now  be  explained  by  the  aid  of  fig.  83.  The 
vibrations  of  tlie  air  are  collected  by  the  external  ear,  and 
conducted  through  the  tube  (1)  to  the  membrana  tympani,  (2.) 


Fig.  83. 


Pig.  83.  A  view  of  all  the  parta  of  the  ear.  1,  The  tube  that  leads  to  th»  in!  tea] 
ear.  2,  Tlie  ineinbraua  tympani.  3, 4, 5,  The  bones  of  the  ear.  7,  The  centra'  part 
of  the  labyrinth  named  the  vestilmie.  8,9,10,  The  semicircular  canals.  11,18  Th<» 
channels  of  the  cochlea.  13,  The  auditory  norve.  14,  The  channel  from  the  mid- 
dle ear  to  the  throat,  (eusjtachian  tube.)  15,  The  chorda  tyin-fUtui  nerve.  16.  The 
Btyloid  process.  17,  The  seventh  pair  of  nerves,  (facial.)  16,  The  mastoid  pkocoas 
of  the  temporal  bone. 

From  the  membrana  tympani  the  vibrations  pass  along  the 
chain  of  bones,  (3,  4,  5.)  The  bone  (5)  communicates  with 
the  internal  ear,  (7,  8,  9,  10,  11,  11,  11,  12,  12,  12.)  From 
the  internal  ear  the  impression  is  carried  to  the  brain  by  the 
auditory  nerve,  (13.) 


Nnte.    Let  the  pupil  review  the  anatomy  abd  physiology  of  the  ear  &oi» 
fig.  83,  or  from  anatomical  outline  plate  10. 


HTQIENK    OF   THE    ORGANS    OF    HEAHINO.  157 


HYGIENE  OF  THE  ORGANS  OF  HEARING 

477.  Hearing,  like  the  other  senses,  is  capable  of  very  ^/eai 
improvement.  By  cultivation,  the  blind  are  enabled  to  judge 
with  great  accuracy  the  distance  of  bodies  in  motion.  It  is  also 
capable  of  'mprovement  when  all  the  other  senses  are  perfect. 
Thus  the  Indian  will  distinguish  sounds  that  cannot  be  heard 
jy  the  white  man. 

478.  If  this  sense  is  destroyed  in  early  Ufe,  the  person 
also  loses  the  power  of  articulating  words.  Hence  a  man 
born  deaf  is  always  dumb. 

479.  Acute  hearing  requires  perfection  in  the  structure  and 
functions  of  the  different  parts  of  the  ear,  and  that  portion  of 
the  briin  from  which  the  auditory  nerve  proceeds. 

480.  The  common  causes  of  impaired  hearing,  are  a  thick- 
ening of  the  membrana  tympani  of  the  ear,  an  accumulation 
of  wax  upon  its  exterior  surface,  a  closure  of  the  eustachian 
tube,  disease  of  the  brain,  palsy  of  the  auditory  nerve,  and 
destruction  of  the  middle  and  internal  ear. 

481.  It  is  injurious  to  put  the  heads  of  pins  into  the  ear,  as 
they  frequently  cause  inflammation.  The  wax  can  be  softened 
by  dropping  into  the  tube  some  oil,  and  in  a  few  hours  remove 
it,  by  ejecting  warm  soap-suds  into  the  ear. 

Observation.  When  worms  and  insects  find  their  way  into 
the  tube  of  the  external  ear,  they  can  usually  be  driven  out,  by 
dropping  in  warm  olive-oil. 

477 — 481.  Give  the  hygiene  of  the  organs  of  hearing.  477.  Show  how  the 
faculty  of  hearing  is  capable  of  improvement.  478.  "What  follows  the  los* 
of  hearing  in  early  life  ?  479.  On  what  does  acute  hearing  depend } 
480.  State  some  of  the  causes  of  impaired  hearing.  481,  What  caution  ia 
given  respecting  the  use  of  pins  in  the  ear  ?  How  can  insects  be  removed 
("om  the  ear  ? 

14 


1  58  ANATOMY,    rnVSlOLOGY,    AND   nVGIENB 


CHAPTER    XXXy. 

MEANS    or    rRESEllViNO   THE    HEALTH. 

482.  Our  bodies  are  constituted  according  to  certain  laws, 
and  every  person  should  learn  these,  in  order  to  regulate  hia 
actions  and  duties,  so  that  the  health  may  he  unimpaired,  and 
the  power  of  enjoyment,  activity,  and  usefulness  continue  while 
life  lasts. 

483.  It  is  a  law  of  the  muscles,  that  they  should  either  be 
used  in  some  occupation,  or  called  into  action  by  some  social 
j)lay  and  active  sport.     (See  Chap.  VIII.) 

484.  All  admit  that  food  is  necessary  to  sustain  life;  and 
unless  it  be  of  a  proper  quality,  taken  in  proper  quantities,  and 
at  proper  times,  the  functions  of  the  digestive  organs  will  bo 
deranged,  and  disease  produced.     (See  Chap.  XII.) 

485.  Pure  air  is  essential  to  the  full  enjoyment  of  health. 
The  close,  impure  air  of  heated  rooms  and  crowded  assemblies 
may  be  breathed,  and  the  effect  be  so  gradual  as  not  to  arrest 
attention ;  yet  it  is  a  violation  of  the  physical  laws.  (See 
Chap.  XXI.) 

486.  The  body  also  requires  sleep  ;  and  if  it  is  not  taken  at 
the  right  time,  or  with  regularity,  we  do  not  feel  a  full  reiVesh- 
ment  from  "  tired  nature's  sweet  restorer."  Let  youth  be  taught 
that  "  early  to  bed  and  early  to  rise "  gives  him  health  and  its 
attendant  blessings.  The  brain,  like  other  organs  of  the  body, 
should  be  called  into  action  at  proper  times.  (See  Chap.  XXIX, ) 

482.  Why  is  it  incumbent  on  every  person  to  learn  the  laws  of  health  ? 
483.  Give  a  law  of  the  muscles.  484.  In  preserviLg  the  health,  why  is  it 
necessary  to  give  attention  to  the  food  which  is  eaten  ?  48^.  What  beside 
food  is  essential  to  the  full  enjoyment  of  health  ?  What  is  said  of  the  im- 
Dure  air  of  heated  rooms  and  crowded  assemblies  ?  48G.  What  shi^uld  \)« 
3l>served  'n  regard  to  sleep  ? 


REMOVAL   OF   DJ    EASE.  159 

487.  From  the  extent  of  the  surface  of  the  skin,  and  th«» 
close  sympathy  that  exists  between  it  and  those  organs  whose 
ofTice  IS  to  remove  the  waste  particles  of  matter  from  the  body, 
it  is,  therefore,  very  important  in  the  preservation  of  the  health, 
that  tlie  functions  of  this  membrane  be  properly  maintained. 
(See  Chap.  XXVI.) 

REMOVAL  OF  DISEASE. 

4S8.  It  is  seldom  that  a  physician  is  called  in  the  first  sta{.^e8 
of  disease.  At  this  period,  the  treatment  adopted  should  bo 
proper  and  judicious,  or  the  suflbrings  of  the  patient  are  in- 
creased, and  life,  to  a  greater  or  less  degree,  is  jeopardized. 
Hence  the  utility  of  knowing  what  should  be  done^  and  what 
should  not  be  done,  in  order  that  the  health  may  be  rapidly 
regained. 

489.  In  all  instances  of  acute  disease,  it  is  proper  to  rest, 
not  only  the  body,  but  the  mind.  To  efTcct  this,  the  patient 
should  cease  from  physical  exertion,  and  also  withdraw  his 
thoughts  from  study  and  business  operations.  This  should  be 
done,  even  if  the  person  is  but  slightly  indisposed. 

490.  Select  a  room  for  a  sick  person  that  is  exposed  to  as 
little  external  noise  as  possible,  as  impressions  made  on  the 
ear  greatly  influence  the  nervous  system.  Likewise  select  a 
spacious,  well-ventilated  apartmeni,  that  has  no  superfluous 
furniture.  The  practice  of  placing  a  sick  person  in  a  small, 
ill-arranged  sleeping-room,  when  a  more  spacious  room  can  be 
used,  is  poor  economy,  not  to  aay  unkind. 

491.  Care  is  necessary  in  regulating  the  light  of  a  sick-room. 
While  a  strong  light  would  produce  on  increased  action  of  the 
vessels  of  the  brain,  on  the  contrary,  a  moderate  light  would  be 

487.  Why  should  the  functions  of  the  skin  be  properly  maintained  ? 
488.  "What  is  important  in  the  first  stages  of  disease  ?  489.  What  is  proper 
in  all  instances  of  acute  disease  ?  How  can  it  be  efr'^*,ed  ?  490.  What 
rooms  should  be  selected  for  the  sick  ?  Why  ?  491.  "What  is  said  in  refer- 
ence to  the  quantity  jf  lij;ht  admitted  into  a  sick-room  ? 


160  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

an  appropriate  stimulus  to  this  organ.     It  is  seldom  necessary 
to  exclude  all  light  from  the  sick  chamber. 

492  A  sick  person,  whether  a  child  or  an  adult,  should  not 
be  disturbed  by  visitors,  even  if  their  calls  are  short.  The  ex- 
citement of  meeting  them  is  followed  by  a  depression  of  the 
nervous  system.  The  more  dangerous  and  apparently  nearer 
death  the  sick  person  is,  the  more  r'gorous  should  be  the  obser- 
vance of  this  suggestion. 

493.  Nor  should  ilio  sick-roon  be  opened  to  privileged 
classes ;  for  the  excitement  caused  by  a  visit  from  relations 
and  the  virtuous,  will  do  as  much  injury  to  the  aick,  as  that 
produced  by  strangers  and  the  vicious.  The  custom  of  visiting 
and  conversing  with  sick  friends  during  the  intervals  of  daily 
labor,  and  particularly  on  Sunday,  is  a  great  evil.  No  person 
will  thus  intrude  herself  in  the  sick  chamber,  who  cares  more 
for  the  welfare  of  the  suffering  friend  than  the  gratification  of 
a  sympathetic  curiosity.  Inquiries  can  be  made  of  the  family 
respecting  the  sick,  and  complimentary  or  necessary  messages 
can  be  communicated  through  the  nurse. 

Hhistration.  While  attending  a  Miss  B.,  of  N.  H.,  sick  of 
fever,  I  pronounced  her  better,  withdrew  medicine,  directed 
a  simple,  low  diet,  and  the  exclusion  of  all  visitors.  In  the 
evening,  I  was  sent  for,  to  attend  her.  There  was  a  violent 
relapse  into  the  disease,  which  continued  to  increase  in  severity 
until  the  fourth  day,  when  death  terminated  her  suffering?  I 
learned  that,  soon  after  I  gave  directions  that  no  visitors  be  ad 
mitted  into  her  room,  several  particular  friends  were  permitted 
to  enter  the  chamber  and  talk  with  the  sick  girl.  Their  conver- 
sation produced  a  severe  headache ;  and,  to  use  the  language 
of  the  patient,  "  it  seemed  as  if  their  talk  would  kill  me ; "  and 
it  did  kill  Iter. 

494.  No  solid  food  should  be  taken  in  the  first  stages  of  dis- 

492.  What  effect  have  calls  on  the  sick  ?  493.  What  is  said  of  the  cus- 
tom of  calling  and  conversing  with  the  sick  during  the  intervals  of  daily 
labor  ?  Give  an  illustration.  494,  What  suggestions  relative  to  food,  is 
the  first  stages  of  disease  i 


L 


REMOVAL    OF   DISEASE.  161 

easj,  even  if  the  nfTcction  is  slirrht.  Tlio  thirst  can  be  nllayed 
by  drinking  cold  water,  barlcy-wutcr,  and  other  pieparations  of 
an  unstimulating  character.  It  is  wrong  to  terrif  t  the  appetite 
of  a  person  who  is  indisposed.  The  cessation  of  u  desire  for 
food,  is  the  warning  of  Nature,  that  the  system  is  in  such  a  state 
that  it  cannot  be  digested. 

495.  When  a  patient  is  recovering  from  illness,  the  food 
should  be  simple,  and  in  quantities  not  so  great  as  to  oppress 
the  stomach.  It  should"  xlso  be  given  with  regularity.  "  Eut 
little  and  often,"  with  no  regard  to  regularity,  is  a  bad  practice. 

496.  When  a  physician  attends  a  sick  person,  he  should 
have  the  special  management  of  the  food,  particularly  after  the 
medicine  has  been  withdrawn  and  the  patient  is  convalescent. 
The  prevailing  idea  that  every  person  may  safeiy  advise  rel:*- 
tive  to  food,  or  that  the  appetite  of  the  convalescing  person 
will  guide  correctly,  is  dangerous,  and  cannot  be  too  much 
censured. 

Ulustration.  In  1832,  I  attended  a  Miss  M.,  sick  of  fever. 
After  an  illness  of  a  few  days,  the  fever  abated,  and  I  directed 
a  simple,  unstimulating  diet.  Business  called  me  from  the  town 
two  days.  During  my  absence,  an  officious  matron  called  ; 
found  her  weak,  but  improving ;  and  told  her  she  needed  food 
to  strengthen  her ;  and  "  it  would  now  do  her  good."  Aixord- 
ingly,  a  piece  of  beefsteak  was  prepared,  and  given  to  the  con- 
valescent girl.  She  ate  heartily,  and  the  result  was,  a  relapse 
into  a  fever  more  violent  than  the  first  attack. 

497.  It  is  very  important  in  disease  that  the  skin  be  /cfj)t 

clean.     A  free  action  of  the  vessels  of  this  part  of  the  body 

exerUs  a  ';reat  influence  in  removing  disease  from  the  internal 

ci'-gans,  as  well  as  keeping  them  m  health,     If  the  thirty  ounces 

f  — — — 

4P5.  When  the  patient  is  convalescent,  how  should  the  food  be  given  ? 
What  is  said  of  the  practice  of  eating  "  little  and  often  "  ?  496.  Who 
should  have  the  special  management  of  food  when  medicine  is  withdrawn  t 
What  idea  prevails  in  the  community  ?  Give  an  illustration  of  the  evil 
effects  attending  such  an  idea.  497.  Does  the  skin  exert  a  great  influenctj 
in  removing  disease  from  the  internal  organs,  as  well  as  in  keeping  them 
'p  health  i 

14* 


1G2  ANATOMV,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 

of  waste,  liurtful  matter,  that  passes  through  the  "  pores"  of  the 
skin  in  twenty-fuur  hours,  is  not  removed  by  frequent  bathing 
and  dry  rubbing,  the  action  of  these  vossels  is  deranged,  which 
m^ reases  the  disease  of  the  internal  organs. 

Illustration  Mrs.  M.  R.,  of  N.,  Mass.,  was  aflFlicted  with 
disease  of  the  ungs  and  cough.  This  was  accompanied  with  a 
dr}',  inactive  condition  of  the  skin.  As  medicine  had  no  salu- 
tary effect  in  relieving  her  cough,  she  was  induced  by  the 
advice  of  the  clergyman  of  the  parish  to  enter  upon  a  system- 
atic course  of  bathing  twice  every  day.  Soon  the  skin  became 
soft,  its  proper  functions  were  restored,  the  disease  of  the  lungs 
yielded,  and  the  cough  disappeared. 

498.  The  sick-room  should  be  kept  very  clean,  and  in  per- 
fect order.  When  a  sick  person  sees  ever/  thing  neat  and  in 
its  proper  place,  a  feeling  of  comfort  is  induced,  which  aids  in 
the  recovery  of  the  health ;  while  filth  and  disorder  are  objects 
of  annoyance,  and  tend  to  depress  the  nervous  system. 

499.  Every  sick  person  should  breathe /iMre  air.  The  purer 
,he  blood  that  courses  through  the  body,  the  greater  the  energy 
of  the  system  to  remove  disease.  The  confined,  vitiated  air  of 
the  sick -chamber  not  unfrequently  prolongs  disease ;  and  in 
many  instances,  the  affection  is  not  only  aggravated,  but  even 
rendered  fatal,  by  its  injurious  influences. 

Illustrations.  1st.  In  1833,  I  was  called,  in  consultation 
with  another  physician,  to  Mr.  H.,  who  was  much  debilitated 
and  delirious.  I-'or  several  successive  days  he  had  not  slept. 
His  room  was  kept  very  warm  and  close,  for  fear  he  would 
"  take  cold."  The  only  change  that  I  made  in  the  treatment, 
was  to  open  the  door  and  window, at  a  distance  from  the  bed.  In 
a  short  time,  the  delirium  ceased,  and  he  fell  into  a  quiet  slum- 
ber. From  this  time  he  rapidly  recovered,  and  I  have  no  doubt 
that  the  delirium  was  the  result  of  breathing  impure  air. 

498.  How  should  the  sick-room  be  kept  r  499.  "Why  should  every  sick 
person,  partic  ilarly,  breatlie  pure  air  ?  Are  not  diseases  prolonged,  and 
even  rendered  fatal,  from  breathing  the  impure,  vitiated  air  of  the  sick 
ehamber  ?    Give  illustration  1st. 


REMOVAL    OF    DISEASE.  163 


t 


2d.  Formerly,  every  precaution  was  used  to  prevent  persons 
sick  of  the  small-pox  from  breathing  fresh  air.  When  Mrs. 
Ramsay  had  tiiis  disease  in  Charleston,  S.  C„,  her  friends,  sup- 
posing that  life  was  extinct,  caused  her  body  to  l»e  removed 
from  the  house  to  an  open  shed.  The  pure  air  revived  the  vital 
Bpark,  and  she  lived  to  be  an  ornament  to  her  sex. 

500.  Medicine  is  sometimes  necessary  to  assist  the  natural 
powers  of  the  system  to  remove  disease  ;  but  it  Is  only  an  assis- 
tant. While  emetics  are  occasionally  useful  in  removing  food 
and  other  articles  from  the  stomach,  that  would  cause  disease 
if  yulTered  to  remain,  and  cathartics  are  valuable,  in  some  in- 
stances, to  rf;lieve  the  alimentary  canal  of  irritating  residuum, 
yet  the  irequent  administration  of  either  will  cause  serious  dis 
ease. 

501.  Although  medicine  is  useful  in  isome  instances,  yet,  in 
a  great  proportion  of  the  cases  of  disease,  including  fevers  and 
inflammations  of  all  kinds,  attention  to  the  laws  of  health  will 
tend  to  relieve  the  system  from  disease,  more  certainly  and 
speedily,  and  with  less  danger,  than  wi.en  medicines  are 
administered. 

502.  Thomas  Jeflerson,  in  writing  to  Dr.  Wistar,  of  Phila- 
delphia, said,  "  I  woula  have  the  physician  learn  the  limit  of  his 
art."  I  would  say,  Have  those  who  are  continually  advismg 
"  herb  teas,  pills,  bitters,"  and  other  "  cure-alls,"  for  any  com- 
plaint, labelled  with  some  popular  name,  learn  the  limits  of 
their  duty,  namely,  attention  to  the  laws  of  health.  The  '"■'i 
of  every  family,  and  each  individual,  should  be,  to  touch  not, 
tasio  not,  of  medicine  of  any  kind,  except  when  directed  by 
a  well-educated  and  honest  physician,  (sudden  disease  fi^oni 
accidents  excepted.) 

Give   illustration    2d.      600.    What  is    said  of  the  use  of  medicine  ? 

601.  ^^1lat  is  said  of  its  use  in  fevers   and  many  other  cases  of  disease  ? 

602.  What  remark  by  Thomas  Jefferson  to  Dr.  Wistar?    What  should  be 
the  rule  of  every  person  in  regard  to  taking  medicine  ?    Wliat  exception  ? 


164  ANATOMY,   PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENK. 


CHAPTER    XXXVI. 

DIRECTIONS    lOR    NURSES. 

503.  The  nurse  requires  knowledge  and  practice  to  enable 
her  to  discharge  aright  her  duty  to  the  patient,  as  much  as 
the  physician  and  surgeon  do  to  perform  what  is  incumbent 
en  them.  Woman,  from  her  constitution  and  habits,  is  the 
natural  nurse  of  the  sick ;  and,  in  general,  no  small  portion 
of  her  time  is  spent  in  ministering  at  the  couch  of  disease  and 
suffering. 

504.  As  the  young  and  vigorous,  as  well  as  the  aged  and 
the  infirm,  are  liable  to  be  laid  upon  the  bed  of  sickness,  by  an 
epide.ntc,  or  imprudent  exposure,  or  by  some  accident,  it  is 
therefore  necessary  that  the  girl,  as  well  as  the  matron,  may 
know  how  she  can  render  services  in  an  efficient  and  proper 
manner.  No  girl  should  consider  her  education  complete  who 
is  not  acquainted  with  the  principles  of  the  duties  of  a  general 
nurse  and  a  temporary  watcher. 

505.  It  is  to  be  regretted,  that,  while  we  have  medical 
schools  and  colleges  to  educate  physicians,  there  is  no  institu- 
tion to  educate  nurses  in  their  equally  responsible  station.  In 
the  absence  of  such  institutions,  the  defect  can  be  remedied,  to 
some  extent,  by  teaching  every  girl  hygiene  or  the  laws  of 
health.  To  make  such  knowledge  more  available  and  com- 
plete, attention  is  invited  to  the  following  suggestions  relative 
to  the  practical  duties  of  a  nurse. 

506.  Bathing.     The   nurse,  before  commencing  to  bathe 

503.  Does  the  nurse  require  knowledge  and  practice  in  her  employment, 
M  well  as  the  physician  ?  504.  Who  is  the  natural  nurse  of  the  sick  ? 
What,  then,  is  incumbent  on  every  girl  ?  505.  Should  there  be  Schools  to 
educate  nurses,  as  well  as  physicians  and  surgeons  ?  506.  "What  should  a 
nurse  provide  herself  with,  before  bathing  a  patient  ? 


DIRECTIONS    FOR   NURSES.  165 

»he  patient,  sho  ild  provide  herself  with  water,  two  towels,  a 
sponge,  a  piece  of  soft  flannel,  and  a  sheet,  and  also  notice 
the  temperature  of  the  room. 

50*7 .  When  the  patient  is  feeble,  use  tepid  or  warm  water. 
Cold  water  should  only  be  used  when  the  system  has  vigor 
enough  to  produce  reaction  upon  the  skin.  This  is  showi 
b)  the  increased  redness  of  the  skin,  and  a  feeling  of  warmth 
and  comfort.  Before  using  the  sponge  to  butbe,  a  sheet,  o. 
fold  of  cloth,  should  be  spread  smoothly  over  the  bed,  and  un 
der  the  patient,  to  prevent  the  bed-linen  on  which  the  "atient 
lies  from  becoming  damp  or  wet. 

508.  Apply  the  wet  sponge  to  one  part  of  the  body  at  a 
time  ;  as  the  arm,  for  ^stance.  By  doing  so,  the  liability  of 
contracting  chills  is  diminished.  Take  a  dry,  soft  towel,  wipe 
the  bathed  part,  and  follow  this  by  vigorous  rubbing  with  a 
crash  towel,  or,  what  is  better,  a  mitten  made  of  this  material ; 
then  use  briskly  a  piece  of  soft  flannel,  to  remove  all  moisture 
that  may  exist  on  the  skin,  and  particularly  between  the  fingei's 
and  the  flexions  of  the  joints.  In  this  manner  bathe  the  entire 
body. 

509.  The  sick  should  be  thoroughly  bathed,  at  least  twice 
in  twenty-four  hours.  Particular  attention  should  be  given  to 
the  parts  between  the  fingers  and  toes,  and  about  the  johits,  as 
the  accumulation  of  the  waste  matter  is  most  i^bundant  on  these 
p-'iis.  In  bathing,  these  portions  of  the  system  are  very  gen- 
erally neglected.  The  best  time  for  bathing,  is  when  the 
patient  feels  the  most  vigorous,  and  freest  from  exhaustion. 
The  practice  of  daubing  the  face  and  hands  with  a  towel 
dipped  in  hot  rum,  camphor,  and  vinegar,  does  not  remove 
the  impurities,  but  causes  the  skin  soon  to  feci  dry,  hard, 
and  uncomfortable. 


507.  "When  should  cold  water  be  used  ?  508.  How  .should  the  bathint; 
then  be  performed,  so  that  the  patient  may  not  contract  a  cold  ?  509  How 
often  should  a  sick  person  be  batheil  ?  What  is  said  of  daubing  the  lac* 
and  hauds  merelv  with  a  wet  cloth  ? 


i 


1 


166  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,    AND    HYGIENE. 

510.  Food.  It  is  the  duty  of  every  woman  to  know  how  to 
make  the  simplest  preparations  adapted  to  a  low  diet,  m  the 
most  wholesome  and  the  most  palatable  way.  Water-gruel,* 
which  is  the  simplest  of  all  preparations,  is  frequently  so  ill 
made  as  to  cause  the  patient  to  loathe  it.  Always  prepare  the 
food  for  the  sick  in  the  neatest  and  most  careful  manner. 

511.  When  the  physician  enjoins  abstinence  from  food,  the 
nurse  should  strictly  obey  the  injunction.  She  should  be  Jis 
particular  to  know  the  physician's  directions  about  diet,  as  in 
knowing  how  and  when  to  give  the  prescribed  medicines,  and 
'jhcy  them  as  implicitly. 

512.  When  a  patient  is  convalescing,  the  desire  for  food  is 
generally  strong,  and  it  often  requires  firmness  and  patience, 
together  with  great  care,  on  the  part  of  the  nurse,  that  the  food 
is  prepared  suitably,  and  given  at  proper  times.  The  physician 
should  direct  how  frequently  it  should  be  taken. 

513.  Pure  Air.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  nurse  to  see  that  not 
only  the  room  is  well  ventilated  in  the  morning,  but  that  fresh 
air  is  constantly  coming  in  during  the  day.  Great  care  must 
be  taken,  however,  that  the  patient  does  not  feel  the  current. 

514.  Bed-linen,  as  well  as  that  of  the  body,  should  be  aired 
every  day,  and  oftener  changed  in  sickness  than  in    health 
All  clothing,  when  changed,  should  be  well  dried,  and  warmed 
by  a  fire  previous  to  its  being  put  on  the  patient  or  the  bed. 

515.  Temperature.  The  warmth  of  the  chamber  should 
be  carefully  ""^atched  by  the  nurse.     The  feelings  of  the  patient 


•  Directions  for  making  the  simple  preparations  for  the  sick  are 
found  in  almost  evtiy  cook-book. 

610.  Should  every  woman  know  how  to  make  the  simple  preparations 
adapted  to  a  low  diet  ?  511.  Should  the  nurse  strictly  obey  the  injunctions 
of  the  physician  relative  to  food  ?  512,  What  period  of  a  person's  illresa 
requires  the  most  care  in  regard  to  the  food  ?  513.  Give  another  duty  of 
the  nurse.  614.  What  directions  respecting  the  bed-linen  of  the  patient  ? 
What  is  necessary  when  there  is  a  cliange  of  clothing  ?  615.  Why  should 
there  be  a  well-adjusted  thermometer  in  every  sick-chamber  ? 


REMOVAL    OP    DISEASE.  16? 

OT  nurse  are  not  to  be  relied  on,  as  an  index  of  the  ternpeiature 
of  the  room.  There  should  be  a  well-adjusted  thermometer  m 
every  sick-room.  This  should  be  frequently  consulted  by  the 
nurse. 

516.  The  temperature  of  the  sick-chamber  should  be  mod- 
erate. If  it  is  so  cold  as  to  cause  a  chill,  the  disease  will  be 
aggravated.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  too  warm,  the  patient 
is  enfeebled  and  rendered  more  SKsceptible  to  cold  on  leaving 
the  sick-chamber.  The  Latin  maxim,  "/«  medio  tutissimus 
iJis,"  (in  medium  there  is  most  safety,)  should  be  regarded  in 
the  rooms  of  the  sick. 

517.  Quiet.  The  room  of  the  patient  should  be  kept  free 
of  noise.  The  community  should  be  guided  by  this  rule,  that 
no  more  persons  remain  in  the  room  of  the  sick,  than  the  wel- 
fare of  the  patient  demands.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  physician  to 
direct  when  visitors  can  be  admitted  or  excluded  from  the 
sick-room,  and  the  nurse  should  see  that  these  directions  are 
enforced. 

518.  The  movements  of  the  attendants  should  be  gentle  and 
noiseless.  Shutting  doors  violently,  creaking  hinges  or  shoes, 
and  all  unnecessary  noise,  should  be  avoideil.  Most  persons 
refrain  from  loud  talking  in  the  sick-chamber,  but  are  not 
equally  careful  to  abstain  from  whisperings  which  is  often 
more  trying  than  a  common  tone. 

519.  The  deportment  and  remarks  of  the  nurse  to  the  patient 
sliould  bv  cilm  and  encouraging.  The  illness  of  a  friend,  or 
persons  who  ha"  recently  died,  should  not  be  alluded  to  in  the 
sick-room.  Nc  doubts  or  fears  of  the  patient's  recovery,  either 
by  a  look  or  by  a  word,  should  be  communicated  by  the  nurse, 
in  the  chamber  of  the  sick. 


516.  What  is  said  of  the  temperature  of  the  sick-chamber?  517.  Should 
the  sick-room  be  kept  quiet  ?  518.  What  is  said  of  noise  in  the  sick- 
charaber  ?  Of  whispering  ?  519.  What  should  be  the  deportment  of  thfl 
nurse  toward  the  patient  ?  Should  doubts  and  fears  of  the  patienf'4 
recovrery  be  communicated  in  the  sick-room  ? 


1 


168  ANATOMY,    PHYSIOLOGY,   AND   HYGIENE. 

520.  When  such  information  is  necessary  to  be  communi- 
Cttted,  it  is  the  duty  of  the  physician  to  impart  it  to  the  sick 
person. 

521.  The  nurse  should  not  confine  herself  to  the  sick-room 
more  than  six  hours  at  a  time.  She  should  eat  her  food  regu- 
larly, sleep  at  regular  periods,  and  take  exercise  daily  in  the 
open  air.  To  do  this,  let  her  quietly  leave  the  room  when  the 
patient  is  sleeping.  A  watcher,  or  temporary  nurse,  may  supply 
her  place.  There  is  but  little  danger  of  contracting  disease,  if 
the  nurse  attends  to  the  simple  laws  of  health,  and  remains  not 
more  than  six  hours  at  a  time  in  the  sick-room. 


'  DIRECTIONS  FCR  WATCHERS. 

i 

522.   These  necessary  assistants,  like  the  nurse,  should  have 

i  knowledge  and  practice.     They  should  ever  be  cheerful,  gentle 

I  firm,  and  attentive,  in  the  presence  of  the  patient. 

'  523.   A  simple,   nutritious  supper  should  be  eaten   before 

I  entering  the  sick-room;  and  it  is  well,  during  the  night,  to 

;  take  some  plain  food. 

524.  When  watching  in  cold  weather,  a  person  should  be 
warmly  dressed,  and  furnished  with  an  extra   garment,  as  a 

i  cloak  or  shawl,  because  the  system  becomes  exhausted  toward 

'  morning,  and  less  heat  is  generated  in  the  body. 

525.  Whatever  may  be  wanted  during  the  night,  should  be 
I  •  brought  into  the  sick-chamber,  or  the  adjoining  room,  before 
I  the  family  retires  for  sleep,  in  order  that  the  slumbers  of  the 
\  patient  be  not  disturbed  by  haste,  or  searching  for  needed 
I  articles. 

620.  When  necessary  to  impart  such  intelligence,  on  whom  docs  it  de- 
pend ?  521.  How  long  should  a  nurse  remain  in  the  sick-chamber  at  a 
time  i  522.  What  qualifications  arc  necessary  in  a  watcher  ?  523.  What 
directions  in  regard  to  the  food  of  the  watcher  ?  624.  AVhcn  watching  in 
cold  weather,  what  precaution  is  necessary  ?  525.  What  suggestion  to 
waichera  ? 


i 


SIRBCTIONS    FOR   WATCHERS.  169 

i26.  The  same  general  directions  should  be  observed  by 
watchers,  as  are  given  to  the  nurse ;  nor  should  the  watcher 
deem  it  necessary  to  make  herself  acceptable  to  Ihe  patient  by 
agreeable  conversation. 

5Uf7.  It  can  hardly  be  expected  that  the  farmer,  who  boj 
been  laboting  hard  in  the  field,  or  the  mechanic,  who  has  toiled 
during  the  day,  is  qualified  to  render  all  those  little  attentions 
*/hat  a  sick  person  requires.  Hence,  would  it  not  be  more 
bcnevoicnt  and  economical  to  emp'oy  and  pay  watchers,  who 
are  quaafied  by  knowledge  and  trainings  to  perform  this  duty 
in  a  fa.thful  manner,  while  the  kindness  and  sympathy  of 
friends  may  be  practically  manifested  by  assisting  to  defray 
the  expanses  of  these  qualified  and  useful  assistants  ? 

^■^•^W^— ^  I  ■       ■    MM-I  ■-    ■  I  I  !■  —       — ^-^^         I  ■  ■     ■ M     ■       1^      ■■■  .1  I         ■    II    H  I     BM  .,,.1    m 

626.  WIiAt  should  watchers  observe?    527.  What  is  saidof  employin|( 
those  persv  Jis  to  watch  who  labor  hard  during  the  day  ? 

16 


APPENDIX 


POISONS    AND    THEIR   ANTIDOTES. 

» 

fl28  Poisoning,  either  from  accident  or  design,  is  of  such  frequency  ax.dl 
dangei^that  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance  that  every  person  should  know 
the  proper  made  of  procedure  in  such  cases,  in  order  to  render  immediate 
a88istan«i«  when  within  his  power. 

629.  loisons  are  divided  into  two  classes — mineral  (^ which  will  include 
the  acid»^  and  vegetable 

630.  Tue  first  thing,  usually  to  be  done,  when  it  is  ascertained  that  a 
poison  hhj  been  swallowed,  is  to  evacuate  the  stomach,  unless  vomit- 
ing takes  /lace  spontaneously.  Emetics  of  the  sulphate  of  zinc,  (white 
vitriol,)  ov  ipecacuanha,  (ipecac,)  or  the  wine  of  antimony,  should  be 
given. 

531.  Wh«n  vomiting  has  commenced,  it  should  be  aided  by  large  and 
frequent  draughts  of  the  following  drinks ;  flaxseed  tea,  gum-water,  slip- 
pery-elm tea,  barley-water,  sugar  and  water,  or  any  thing  of  a  mucilaginous 
or  diluent  character. 

MINERAL  POISONS. 

632.  Ammonia.  —  The  water  of  ammonia^  if  taken  in  an  over-dose,  and 
In  an  undiluted  state,  acts  as  a  violent  corrosive  poison. 

633.  The  best  and  most  effectual  antidote  is  vinegar.    It  should  be  ad- 

888.  Is  it  useful  to  know  the  antidotes  or  remedies  for  poison  ?  529.  Into  how  many 
daasea  are  poiscns  divided  ?  530.  What  is  the  first  thing  to  be  done  when  it  is  ascer- 
tained that  poison  has  been  swallowed  ?  531.  What  should  be  taken  after  the  vomit- 
ing has  commenced  i  532.  What  effect  has  an  over-dose  of  ammonia  ?  533.  The 
outtdutef 


APPENDIX.  171 

ministered  in  Wftter,  witAout  delay.    It  neutriilizes  the  ammonia,  and  roa 
ders  ii  inactive.    Emetics  should  not  be  given. 

634.  Antimony.  —  Ine  loine  of  antimony  and  tartar  emetic,  if  taken  tn 
over-doses,  cause  distressing  vomiting.  In  addition  to  the  diluent,  mu- 
cilaginous drinks,  give  a  tea-spoonful  of  the  sirup  of  poppies,  paregoric,  or 
twenty  drops  of  laudanum,  every  twenty  minutes,  until  five  or  six  doser 
have  been  take:;,  or  the  vomiting  ceases. 

635.  Tlie  antiuotea  are  ntU-yalls  and  oak  bark,  which  may  be  administered 
in  infusion,  or  by  steeping  in  water. 

636.  Arsenic.  —  "WHien  this  has  been  taken,  administer  an  emetic  of 
ipecac,  speedily,  in  mucilaginous  teas,  and  use  the  stomach-pump  as  soon 
as  possible. 

537.  The  antidote  is  the  hydrated  peroxide  of  iron.  It  should  be  kept 
constantly  on  hand  at  the  apothecaries*  shops.  It  may  be  given  in  any 
quantity,  without  injurious  results. 

638.  CoprER  —The  most  common  cause  of  poisoning  from  this  metal, 
is  through  the  careless  use  of  cooking  utensils  made  of  it,  on  which  the 
acetate  of  cojjper  {\crdigTia)  has  been  allowed  to  form.  When  this  has  been 
taken,  immediately  induce  vomiting,  give  mucilaginous  drinks,  or  the 
white  of  eggs,  diffused  in  water. 

539.  The  antidote  is  the  carbonate  of  soda,  which  should  be  administered 
without  delay. 

640.  Lead.  —  The  acetate  (sugar)  of  lead  is  the  preparation  of  this  metal 
which  is  liable  to  be  taken  accidentally,  in  poisonous  doses.  Induce  imme- 
diate vomiting,  by  emetics  and  diluent  drinks. 

641.  The  antidote  is  diluted  sidphuric  add.  When  this  acid  is  not  to  be 
obtained,  either  the  sulphate  of  magnena,  (epsom  salts,)  or  the  sulphate 
of  soda,  (glauber's  salts,)  will  answer  every  purpose. 

642.  Mercury. — The  preparation  of  this  mineral  by  which  poisoning  is 


Should  an  emetic  be  given  for  this  poison  .'  534.  What  effect  has  an  over-dose  of 
the  wine  of  antimony  or  tartar  emetic?  5.15.  What  is  ttio  antidote?  5,?6.  What 
should  immediately  be  done  when  arsenic  is  swallowed  ?  5.T7.  VVIint  is  the  anti- 
dote' Can  any  quantity  of  this  prepiiraticm  of  iron  be  given  without  injurious  r»- 
iiills?  5.38.  What  should  be  given  when  verdigris  has  been  taken  into  the  stomach' 
639.  What  is  tlie  antidote?  540.  What  should  immediately  be  given  when  sugar 
of  lead  is  taken  ?    541.  What  is  the  antidute  i 


172  APPENiilX. 

commonly  produced,  is  arrosive  ntblim  ite.  The  mode  cf  treatment  ta  b» 
pursued,  when  this  poison  han  been  sw.  ilowcd,  is  as  ful.ows  :  The  whitet 
of  a  dozen  eggs  should  be  beaten  in  t\>o  quarts  of  cold  water,  and  a  tum- 
Dier-full  given  every  two  minutes,  to  induce  vomiting.  When  the  whites 
of  eggs  are  not  to  be  obtained,  soap  and  water  should  be  mixed  with 
wucat  flour,  and  given  in  copious  draughts,  and  the  stomach-pump  in- 
troduced as  soou  as  possible.  Emetics  or  irritating  substances  ought  not 
to  be  given. 

643.  NiTUB — Saltpetre.  This,  in  over-doses,  produces  violent  poison- 
ous symptoms.  Vomiting  should  be  immediately  induced  by  large  doses 
of  mucilaginous,  diluent  drinks ;  but  emetics,  which  irritate  the  stomach, 
ought  not  to  be  given. 

644.  ZiNO.  —  Poisoning  is  sometimes  caused  by  the  atilphate  of  zinc, 
(white  vitriol.)  When  this  takes  place,  vomiting  should  be  induced, 
aTtd  aided  by  large  draughts  of  mucilaginous  and  diluent  drinks.  Uso 
the  stomach-pump  as  soon  as  possible. 

646.  The  antidote  is  the  carbonate  or  super-carbotuUe  of  soda. 

646.  NiTEic,  (aqua  fortis,)  muriatic,  (marine  acid,)  or  sulphubio 
(oil  of  vitriol)  acids,  may  be  taken  by  accident,  and  produce  poisonous 
effects. 

647.  The  antidote  is  calcined  magnesia,  which  should  be  freely  admin- 
istered, to  neutralize  the  acid  and  induce  vomiting.  When  magnesia 
cannot  be  obtained,  the  carbonate  of  potash  (sala^ratus)  may  be  given. 
Chalk,  powdered  and  given  in  solution,  or  strong  toap  suds,  will  answer 
a  good  purpose,  when  the  other  articles  are  not  at  hand.  It  is  of  very 
great  importance  that  something  be  given  speedily  to  neutralize  the  acid 
One  of  the  substances  before  named  should  be  taken  freely,  in  diluent  and 
mucilaginous  drinks;  as  gum-water,  milk,  flaxseed  or  slippery-elm  tea 
Emetics  ought  to  be  avoided. 

648.  Oxalic  Acid. — This  acid  resembles  the  sulphate  of  magnesia, 
(epsom  salts,)  which  renders  it  liable  to  be  taken,  by  mistake,  in  poison- 
ous doses.  Many  accidents  have  occurred  from  this  circumstance. 
They  can  easily  be  distinguished  by  tasting  a  small  quantity.    Epsom 

543.  Give  the  treatment  when  corrosive  sublimate  has  been  swallowed.  543.  What 
effect  has  an  over-dose  of  saltpetre  ?  What  treatment  she  uld  be  adopted?  544.  What 
l«i  the  treatment  and  antidote  fur  white  vitriol.'*  547.  What  is  the  antidote  for  aqua 
f  jrtis  and  oil  of  vitriol  ?  Should  emetics  be  avoided  ?  548.  How  caji  oxalic  acid  ba 
distinguished  from  epsom  salts? 


xrpENDix.  173 

ioUs,  when  app'\led  to  the  tongue,  have  a  very  bitter  taste,  while  oxalit 
acid  is  intcnflcly  sour. 

649.  The  antidote  is  mn(jnesia,  between  which  and  the  anid  a  cheraicaJ 
action  takes  place,  producing  the  oxalate  of  magnesia,  which  is  inert 
Wlicn  magnesia  is  not  at  hand,  chalk,  lime,  or  carbomite  of  potash, 
(salccrat  s,)  will  answer  as  a  substitute. 

6.50.  Give  the  antidote  in  some  of  the  mucilaginous  drinks  boforo  na.wed 
No  time  ought  to  be  lost,  but  the  stomach-pump  should  be  introduced  ai 
Boon  as  a  surgeon  can  be  obtained. 

651.  Ley. — The  ley  obtained  by  the  leach'Tg  of  ashes  may  be  taken 
by  a  child  accidentally.  The  antidote  is  vinegar,  or  oil  of  any  kind.  The 
vinegar  neutralizes  the  alkali  by  uniting  with  it,  forming  the  acetate  of 
potash.  The  oil  unites  with  the  alkali,  and  forms  soap,  which  is  less 
caustic  than  the  ley.  Give,  at  the  same  time,  large  draughts  of  muci- 
laginous drinks,  as  flaxseed  tea,  &c. 


VEGETABLE  POISONS. 

652.  The  vegetable  poisons  are  quite  as  numerous,  and  many  of  them 
equally  as  violent,  as  any  in  the  mineral  kingdom.  We  shall  describe  the 
most  common,  and  which,  therefore,  are  most  liable  to  be  taken. 

653.  Opium.  —  This  is  the  article  most  frequently  resorted  to  by  those 
wishing  to  commit  suicide,  and,  being  used  as  a  common  medicine,  is 
easily  obtained.  From  this  cause,  also,  mistakes  are  very  liable  to  be 
made,  and  accidents  result  from  it.  Two  of  its  preparations,  Uiicdwmm 
and  paregoric,  are  frequently  mistaken  for  each  other ;  the  former  being 
given  when  the  latter  is  intended. 

554.  Morphia,  in  solution,  or  morphine,  as  it  is  more  commonly  called 
by  the  public,  is  a  preparation  of  the  drug  under  consideration,  with 
wUch  many  cases  of  poisoning  are  produced.  It  is  the  active  narcotic 
principle  of  the  opium ;  and  one  grain  is  equal  to  six  of  this  drug  in  its 
usual  form. 

655.  When  an  over-dose  of  opium,  or  any  of  its  preparations,  has  been 

-  — — ^ — * 

549.  What  la  the  antidote  for  an  over-»lo3e  of  oxalic  acid .'    Wlien  magnesia  can- 
not be  obtained,  what  will  answer  aa  a  substitute  ?     551.  What  is  the  antidote 
i  when  ley  is   swallowed .'    559.  Are  vegetable  poisons  aa  niuneroua  and  as  violeul 

!  In  their  effecta   aa   mineral  ?     55."?.    What  w  said  of  opium  and    ita    prepatations ' 

J  555,  556.  What  tr'^atment  should  be  adopted  when  a/i  uver-di>3e  of  opium  ur  auy 

of  ita  preparations   s  tal<en  ? 

15* 


1 


174  APPENDIX. 

•Whllowcd,  the  iitoniach  should  be  evacuated  aa  Rpecdily  as  possible.  To 
effect  this,  as  much  tartar  emetic  as  can  bo  held  on  a  ten  cent  piece,  or  aa 
much  ipecacuanha  as  can  bo  held  on  a  twouty-ftve  cent  piece,  should  bo 
dissolved  in  a  tui  nbler  of  warm  water,  and  one  half  given  at  once,  and  the 
remainder  in  twenty  minutes,  if  the  first  has  not,  in  the  mean  time,  op- 
erated. In  the  interval,  copious  draughts  of  warm  water,  or  warm  sugar 
and  water,  should  be  drank 

61)6.  The  use  of  the  stomach-pump,  in  these  cases,  is  of  the  greatest 
Importance,  and  should  be  resorted  to  without  delay.  After  most  of  the 
poison  has  been  evacuated  from  the  stomach,  a  strong  infusion  of  coJfe« 
ouglit  to  be  given ;  or  some  one  of  the  vegetable  acids,  such  as  viiieyar 
or  lemon-juice,  should  be  administered. 

657.  The  patient  should  be  kept  in  motion,  and  salutary  efTects  will 
often  be  produced  by  dashing  a  bucket  of  cold  water  on  the  head.  Artifi- 
cial lespiration  ought  to  be  established,  and  kept  up  for  some  time.  If 
the  extremities  are  cold,  r  pply  warmth  and  friction  to  them.  After  the 
poison  has  been  evacuated  from  the  stomach,  stimulants,  as  warm  wine 
and  water,  or  warm  brandy  and  water,  ought  to  be  given,  to  keep  up  and 
sustain  vital  action. 


558.  Stramonium — Thom-Apple.  Th's  is  one  of  the  most  active 
narcotic  poisons,  and  when  taken  in  over-doses,  has,  in  numerous  in- 
stances, caused  death. 

559.  Hyosciamus  —  Henbane.  This  article,  which  is  used  as  a  medi- 
cine, if  taken  in  improper  doses,  acts  as  a  virulent  irritating  and  nar- 
cotic poison. 

660.  The  treatment  for  the  two  above-mentioned  articles  is  similar  to 
that  of  poisoning  from  over-doses  of  opium. 


661.  CoNiUM  —  Hemlock.  Hemlock,  improperly  called,  by  many,  cicuta 
when  taken  in  an  over-dose,  acts  as  a  narcotic  poison.  It  was  by  thia 
narcotic  that  the  Athenians  used  to  destroy  the  lives  of  individuals 
condemned  to  death  by  their  laws.  Socrates  is  said  to  have  been  put 
to  death  by  this  poison.  When  swallowed  in  over-doses,  the  treatment 
is  similar  to  that  of  opium,  stramonium,  aui  henbane,  when  over-doses 
are  taken. 


557.  Should  the  person  be  kept  in  motion?  What  is  said  of  artiflcial  resptra- 
lion,  warmth,  friction,  and  Htimulants.'  5G0.  What  should  be  the  treatment  when 
an  nver-dose  of  stramonium  or  henbane  is  taken?  561.  What  name  is  some- 
Umes  impro|)crly  given  to  eonium,  or  hemlock  ?  How  was  this  narcotic  poison  used 
by  the  Athenians '    How  are  the  effects  of  an  over-dose  counteracted  i 


APPENDIX. 


175 


562.  Bkliadonna  —  Deadly  Nightshade.  Camphob  Aconitb — 
klonkshocd.  Wolfsbane.  Bbtony  —  Bryonia.  Digitalis  —  Foxglove, 
DuLCAMABA  —  Bitter-stceet.  'Jamhoou.  Lobelia  —  Ittdian  Tobacco. 
Sanouinauia — Bloodroot.  On,  of  Savin.  Spioblia  —  Pinkroot. 
Btrychninb  —  Nux  vomica.  Tobacco.  All  of  these,  when  taken  in 
over-doses,  are  poisons  of  greater  or  less  activity.  The  treatment  of 
poisoning,  by  the  use  of  any  of  these  articles,  is  similar  to  that  pursued 
In  over-doses  of  opium.     (See  Opium,  page  173.) 

663.  In  all  cases  of  poisoning,  call  a  physician  as  soon  as  possible. 
/ 


MEANS    OF   DISTINQUISHINO    DEATH    FROM 

ASPHYXIA. 

664.  It  is  no  uncommon  occurrence,  that  persons  considered  dead,  have 
been  restored  to  life  at  the  moment  when  a  post  mortem  examination  was 
to  have  been  made,  or  even  when  they  were  in  the  coffin  or  tomb.  This 
mistake  arises  from  the  difficulty  of  distinfiishing  real  from  appatent 
death. 

665.  In  death,  although  the  limbs  are  stiff,  their  position  is  easily 
changed,  but  they  remain  where  last  placed.  When  a  limb  is  stiff  from 
convulsions  or  asphyxia,  its  position  is  changed  with  difficulty,  and  it  ira 
mediately  returns  to  its  former  state.  Cessation  of  breathing,  or  the 
*'  beating  "  of  the  heart,  coldness,  or  insensibility,  are  no  certain  indica- 
tions of  death.  The  sign  most  certain,  is  well-marked  putrefaction ;  but  it 
does  not  belong  to  the  Uiiprofcssional  to  decide  whether  putrefaction  has 
commenced ;  the  physician  alone  can  establish  the  fact. 


562.  What  is  the  treiitment  when  an  over-dose  of  deadly  nighti^hnde,  monks, 
hood,  foxglove,  Ritter-sweet,  gamboge,  lobelia,  bloodroot,  tobacco,  tec,  is  taken' 
tea.  Hhould  a  physician  be  called  In  all  cases  when  poison  is  swalUiwed'  5G5.  liuie 
cun  death  be  diatinguiahed  fVotn  aspnvxlu/ 


GLOSSARY. 


Ab  80RP''Ti0lf.  Fmm  the  Latin  ah- 
Moroere,  to  rack  up. 

A-CE-T>.B'u-LUM.  From  the  Latin  aee- 
(wm,  Tineigar.  The  cavity  In  the  hip- 
bone, 8o  called  from  its  resernlilance  to 
the  ancient  Greek  vinegar  vessel. 

1-WATO-MY,  Fr  tn  the  Greek  ana, 
throiiph,  and  temxd,  I  cut  A  descrip- 
tion of  the  stmctu-.o  of  animals. 

A-ORT'a.  From  the  Greek  aortf,  to  keep 
m  air.  The  large  vessel  tliat  carries 
blood  froHf  the  heart, 

Ap-pa-ra'TU8.  From  the  Latin  ad,  for, 
and  parut  3,  iu  prejKire.  A  colle-tion  of 
organs. 

Ap-PEND'ix.  From  the  Latin  aa,  to, 
and  pendere,  to  hang.  Something 
added. 

A'QUE-ous.  From  the  Latin  aqua,  water. 
A  nunior  of  the  eye. 

Ar'te-ry.  Frnnti  the  Greek  arteria, 
formed  from  aUr,  air,  and  t«rcin,  to 
keep.  The  ancients  believed  that  the 
at.eries  were  filled  with  air,  like  the 
wind-pipe. 

Ab-phyx'i-a.  From  the  Greek  a,  priva- 
tive, and  ^huxis,  pulse.  Suspended 
animation. 

AT'MOS-piiERE.  From  the  Greek  afmos, 
vajKir,  and  sphaira,  a  sphere.  The  air 
which  surrounds  the  eaith. 

AuiyiT-o-BY  Belonging  to  the  sense 
of  healing. 


Ac'Ri-CLE.  From  the  Latin  auric,  rb 
ear.  The  two  cavities  of  the  heart 
derive  the  name  from  their  resemblance 
to  ears. 

Bi-CUS'PIDS.  From  the  Latin  bis,  two, 
and  eumis,  a  point.  The  name  of  cer 
tain  teeth. 

Bile.  A  yellow,  bitijr,  naaseoua  fluid, 
secreted  by  the  liver, 

Brain.  The  pulpy  mass  enclosed  in 
the  cranium,  or  skull -t>onea. 

Broncii'i-a.  From  tJ  e  Greek  hrogchos, 
the  throat.  The  two  branches  of  the 
wind-pipe. 

Cap'il-la-ry.  From  the  Latin  eapiUus 
hair.  The  capillary  vessels  are  the  ex- 
tremely minute  terminations  of  the  ar- 
teries, and  coh.iuencing  branches  of  tiia 
veins. 

Car'bon.  From  the  Latin  carbo,  a  coal 
An  element:^ry  combustib!?  substance. 

Car-BON'ic,     Coiiiaining  carbon. 

Car'PUS.      From  the  Greek  karpoa,  tha 

wrist.    There  arc  eight  bnnes  in  tos 

wiist. 
Car'ti-lage.     Gristle  ;   a  part  of  the 

animal    body,  soAer    than    bone,  but 

harder  than   ligament. 

Ca'va.  Latin.  Hollow.  Vena  Cava,  i]M 
hollow,  or  deep-seated  vein. 

Cep-e-bel'lum.  The  lower  and  smal' 
er  portion  of  the  brain. 


^"'l 


I 


GLOSSARY. 


177 


Cer'k  brum  The  npper  and  larger 
portion  of  the  brain. 

Chest.  The  part  of  the  body  between 
the  neck  and  tlin  belly. 

Ciio'roid.  From  the  Greek  ehoriov,  the 
skin,  and  eidos,  resemblance.  A  coat 
of  the  eye. 

CiiYLE.  From  the  Greek  ckulos,  nutri- 
tious juice. 

Chyme.  From  the  Greek  chumos,  a 
grayish  juice. 

Cil'lA-RY.  Latin.  Relating  to  the  eye- 
lid. 

Clav'i-cle.  From  the  Latin  clavu,  a 
key.    The  collar-bone. 

Coc'cYX.  Latin.  The  lower  extremity 
of  the  spinal  column. 

Coch'le-a.  liatin.  A  snail-shell.  A 
name  given  to  one  of  the  three  cavities 
of  the  iu'ernal  ear. 

Co'LON  tiieek.  A  portion  of  the  large 
intestine. 

CON'CAVE.  Hollow  ;  as  the  inner  sur- 
face of  a  spherical  body. 

Con'vex.  liulging;  as  the  external  sur- 
fiice  of  a  spherical  body. 

Cohn'e-A.  From  the  Latin  eomu,  n. 
horn.    One  of  the  coats  of  the  eye. 

Crys'tal-line.  a  humor,  or  lena  of 
the  eye.  It  serves  to  transmit  and  re- 
fract the  r.'iys  of  light. 

Cus'piD.  From  the  Latin  euspis,  a  point. 
The  name  of  certain  teeth. 

Ci''Ti-cLE.  The  external  layer  of  the 
skin. 

Cu'Tis  Ve'ra.  Latin.  The  true  skin. 
The  internal  layer  of  the  skin. 

Dl'A-PHRASM.  From  the  Greek  rfm- 
phragma,  a  partition.  The  muscle  that 
sef  urates  the  lungs  and  heart  from  the 
stomach,  liver,  and  intestines. 

Pl-OES'TION.  The  process  of  dissolvinr; 
food  in  the  stomach,  and  preparin;;  i' 
for  circulatii^n  and  nourishment. 

Du-o-DE'Nt'id.     The  first  of  the   8n\all 


Intestine,  being  about  twelve  flngen* 
breadth. 
En-am'el.    The  smooth,  hard  substance 
which  covers  the  crcwns  of  the  teetb. 

Ep-i-olot'tis.  From  the  Greek  cjji, 
upon,  aiid  glottis,  the  glottis.  A  kind 
of  cartilaginous  valvo  at  the  upp(>.7 
part  of  the  larynx,  behind  the  base  of 
the  tongue. 

Eu-sta'chi  an  Tube.  So  called  from 
its  discoverer,  Euft/uhiu-i.  A  tube  that 
connects  the  middle  ear  with  the 
throit. 

Ex-ha'lent.    From  the  Latin  ezhalare, 

to  throw  out. 
Ex-trem'i-ties.     The  limbs j   as  the 

legs  and  arms. 

Fas'ci-a.  Latin.  A  thin  membrane  that 
surrounds  tlie  mi.scies  and  tendons. 

Fe'mur.    Latin.    The  thigh-bone. 

Fi'BaE.  An  organic  filament,  or  thread, 
of  a  solid  consistence,  which  entpra 
into  the  composition  of  every  animal 
and  vegetable  lexture. 

FiB'u-i.A.    Latin.    A  clasp.    The  outei 

and  lefiser  bone  of  the  leg. 
Fil'a-MENT.     ■■■jm  the  Latin  Jilum,  a 

thread.     A  small  fibre. 
Fol'li-cle.    From  the  Latin  foUts,  a 

bag.    Very  minute  secreting  cavities. 

Fore-arm.    That  part  of  the  arm  be 

tween  the  elbow  and  wrist. 
FUNC'TION.    From  the  Latin  fiingor,  I 

net,  1  perform.    The  action  of  organs , 

as  the  function  or  action  c*^  ike  eye  is  to 

see,  the  ear  to  h^ar. 
Gan'gli-ON.    From  the  Greek  gaggUcn^ 

a  knot.    An  enlargement  upon  a  n«rr« 

or  tendon. 
Gust'a-TO-RY.    From  the  Latin  gutlua 

tne  taste.     Belonging  to  the   sense  of 

taste. 
GAs'T-iic  JincE     From  the  Qrrek.  gas- 

ter,  the  stomach.    The  fluiil  secreted  l.y 

the  stomach. 


178 


3L0SSART. 


Glot'tis  a  small,  oblon?  opening  at 
the  upper  i)art  of  tlio  larynx. 

OLANua.  From  the  Latin  glans,  a  nut. 
Soft,  tieiiliy  organs,  of  various  sizes. 

Heart.  A  muscular  organ,  situated  in 
the  left  side  of  the  chest. 

IIu'MER-U8.  The  bone  of  the  arm,  sit- 
uated between  the  shoulder-joint  and 
elbow. 

ilu'MOR.  Every  fluid  substance  of  an 
organi/.ed  body  ;  as  the  chyle,  the  Mood. 

!lY'URO-aEN.  From  the  Greek  hydro, 
water,  and  geinomai,  I  engender  A 
gas  which  constitutes  one  of  the  ele- 
ments of  water. 

Hy-oi-ene'.  The  science  of  preserving 
the  health. 

fN-ci'soR.  From  the  Latin  tnctdo,  I  cut. 
The  fore-teeth. 

IN-T£S'TINE.  Latin.  The  alimentary 
canal. 

I'Ris.  Latin.  The  rainbow.  The  col- 
ored membrane  around  the  pupil  of 
the  eye. 

Lab'Y-rinth.  From  the  Greek  laburin- 
thos,  a  place  full  of  turnings.  A  name 
given  to  the  windings  of  the  internal 
ear. 

Lacii'ry-mal.  From  the  Latin  lachry- 
ma,  a  tear. 

Lac'T£-al.  .-cm  the  Latin  lae,  milk. 
The  vessels  that  convey  the  chyle,  or  a 
niilk-liko        _ianre,  into  the    eins. 

•jAR'ynx  From  ti;e  Grefk  laruj^,  a 
whistle.    The  upper  puii  of  the  vvind- 

Liq'a-ment.  From  ligo,  I  bind.  A 
strong,  flbrous  substance,  which  binds 
bones,  &c.,  together. 

Liv'er.  a  large  gland  situated  below 
the  right  lung. 

Lym-phat'ics.  Vessels  that  perform 
the  office  of  absorption. 

IIe-oul'la.  From  the  Latin  medulla, 
marrow 


Me-dul'la  On-LO!«  oa'ta.  The  t\A- 
nal  cord  that  ia  situated  within  the 
Bkull-bonca. 

Mem'brane.  From  the  Latin  memhra- 
iia,  a  film,  a  delicate  w^.b.  A  nams 
given  to  different  thin  orgai^s. 

Mes'en-ter-y.  From  the  Greek  metoa, 
in  the  middle,  and  entcron,  an  intestine. 
A  membrane  in  the  middle  of  the  lutes' 
tines,  by  which  they  are  attached  tu  the 
spinal  column. 

Met-a-car'pus.  From  the  Greek  mcta, 
after,  and  karpos,  the  wrist.  That  part 
of  the  hand  between  the  wrist  and  fin- 
gers. 

Met-a-tar'sus.  From  tne  Greek  meta, 
after,  and  tarsos,  the  instepi.  That  part 
of  the  foot  between  the  instep  and  toes 

Mid'riff.    The  diaphragm. 

Mi'TRAL.  Resembling  a  mtire,  or  bishop's 

bonnet.    The  name  of  two  vaires  of 

the  heart. 

Mo'lar.  From  the  [>atin  molo,  I  grind 
The  name  of  certain  '.eeth. 

Mu'cus.  A  viscid  fluid  secreted  by  the 
mucous  membrane,  which  it  serves  to 
moisten,  and  also  to  defend. 

Mus'cLE.  A  bundle  of  fibres  enclosed  in 
a  sheath. 

Nerve.  An  organ  of  sensation  and 
motion  in  animals. 

Nl'TRO-GEN.  From  the  Greek  nitron 
nitre,  and  gennad,  I  beget.  One  of  the 
gases  that  compp.se  i;tmospheric  air. 

Nu-TRi'TiON.    The  act  or  process  of  pro 
nuitiiig  the  growth,  or  repairing  the 
waste  of  the  system. 

CE-sopii'a-gus.  From  the  Greek  oii, 
I  cirry,  and  phagd,  I  eat.  The  tube 
that  leads  from  the  mouth  to  the 
stomach. 

Ol-fA'jt'o-rt.  From  the  Latin  oI/m- 
tus.     IluUmging  to  the  sense  of  smell. 

O-men'tum  Latin.  The  caul,  so  called 
because  iHe  ancient  priests  prophesied 
from  on  inspection  of  this  membiane. 


I 


OLOSSARY. 


179 


Ob'OAX.  Prom  the  Greek  orgunon,  an 
Instrument.  A  part  of  the  system  des- 
tined to  exerciae  some  particular  func- 
tion. 

Ox'Y-OEN.  From  the  Greek  oxua,  acid, 
and  geinomai,  I  engender.  A  gaa  which 
constitutes  about  one  fiAh  of  our  atmos- 
phere. 

Pan'cre-as.  From  the  Greek  pan,  all, 
and  krea3,  flesh ;  that  is,  quite  fleshy, 
A  g'.and  situated  behind  the  stomach. 

Pa-PIL'la.     From  the  Latin  papilla,  nip- 
ple.   Small,  conirwil  prominences  seeii 
'    on  the  tongue  and  skin. 

Pa-ROT'id.  From  the  Greek  para,  about, 
and  ova,  the  ear.  A  gland  situated  un- 
der the  ear. 

Pa-tel'la.  From  the  Latin  patina,  a 
dish.    The  knee-pan. 

Pel'vis.  L3»tin.  A  basin.  The  name 
of  a  bony  structure  at  the  lower  part 
of  the  trunk. 

Per-i-os'te-um.  From  p»n,  about,  and 
OS,  bone.  The  membrane,  or  skin  that 
surrounds  the  bones. 

Per-spi-ra'tion.  The  evacuation  of 
the  dtiids  of  the  body  through  the  pores 
of  the  skin. 

Pha-lan'oes.  From  the  Greek  pha- 
lagx,  a  tile  of  soldiers.  The  bones 
composing  the  fingers  and  toea. 

Phar'ynx.  From  the  Hreek  pharugx, 
the  pharynx.    The  swallow. 

PllYS-l-OL'O-GY.  From  the  Greek  phu- 
»j?,  nature,  and  logos,  a  discourse.  The 
science  which  trcat^s  of  the  functions 
of  animals  and  vegetables. 

Pleu'ra.  Greek.  The  menibrnne  that 
lines  the  chest  and  surrounds  the  lungs. 

PUL'MO-NA-RY.    Belonging  to  the  lungs. 

Pi.EX'us.  Latin.  Any  union  of  nerves 
or  fibres,  in  the  Toruj  of  net-work. 

ELa'di-us.  Latin.  A  spoke.  The  small 
bone  of  the  fore-arm. 

Bec'tuh.  The  lower  and  straight  por- 
tion ol  the  intestines 


Re-siu'u-XJM.  Residue.  The  waste  re- 
mains of  the  food. 

Ret'i-na.  From  the  Latin  reU,  a  uet 
The  net-like  expansion  of  the  optic 
nerve  on  the  inner  surface  of  the 
eye. 

Sa'crum.  A  bone  so  called  because  U 
was  ofl'ered  in  sacrifice.  The  lower 
portion  of  the  spinal  column. 

Sa-li'va.  Latin.  The  fluid  secreted  in 
the  mouth. 

ScAP'u-LA.    Latin.    The  shoulder-blade 

ScLE-ROT'lc.  From  the  Greek  skleroo, 
I  harden.     A  membrane  of  the  eye 

SE-CRE'TlOJf.  From  the  Latin  secemere, 
to  separate.  The  function  of  several 
glands,  by  which  they  separate  from 
the  blood  the  material  which  they  ra> 
spcctively  demand  for  their  several  pur 
poses. 

Sem-i-lu'nar.  From  the  Latin  #«m», 
half,  and  luna,  moon.  The  name  of 
two  valves  at  the  commencement  of 
the  aorta  and  pulmonary  artery. 

8kel'e-ton.  From  the  Greek  skellO, 
I  dry.  The  articulated,  dry  bones  of 
an  animal. 

Spi'nal.  Cord.  A  prolongation  of  the 
brain. 

Spine.  From  the  Latin  spina,  a  thorn. 
Tlie  back-bone. 

Spleen.  The  milt.  It  was  supposed 
by  the  ancients  to  be  the  seat  of  nicl 
anclioly,  anger,  and  vexation. 

Ster'num.    Greek.    The  breast-bone. 

Stom'ach.  The  principal  organ  of  di 
gestion,  situated  below  the  left  lung. 

Sub-lin'gual.  From  the  Latin  stib, 
under,  and  lingua,  the  tongue.  The 
name  applied  to  the  gland  under  the 
tongue. 

Sub-max'il-la-ry.  From  the  Latin 
snb,  under,  and  maxilla,  the  jaw-bone. 
The  name  applied  to  the  gland  under 
the  Jaw. 

SuT'uRE.    From  the  Latin  tM»,  I  •titcta 


I 


180 


GL0S9ARY. 


Th«  senm   or  joint  whicli  unites  tlie 
ikull-bones. 

flVN-O'vi-A.  From  the  Greeic  sun,  with 
and  oon,  an  egg.  The  lubricating  tluit. 
of  the  Joints. 

Bts'tem.  From  the  Greeli  »un,  to- 
gether, and  isteini,  I  place.  An  assem- 
blage of  organs,  arranged  according  to 
some  plan  or  meliiod ;  as  the  nervous 
system. 

Bys-tem'ic.  Belonging  to  the  general 
system. 

Ten'don.  From  the  Greek  teind,  1 
stretch.  Strong,  white  cords,  that  con- 
ned the  muscles  to  the  bone  which 
they  move. 

TiiO-RAC'ic.  From  the  Greek  IhOrax, 
the  chest. 

Tib'i-a.  Latin.  A  pipe  or  flute.  The 
largest  bone  of  the  leg. 

Tra'cue-a.  From  the  Greek  traehtu, 
rough,  and  arteria.  The  canal  that 
conveys  air  to  the  lungs. 

Tri-cus'fid.  From  the  Latin  trea,  three, 
and  cuspis,  a  point  1'he  th  -ee  valves 
lu  the  right  side  o!  the  beoit. 


Trunk.    The  body  of  animals,  without 
the  limbs. 

I<atin.    Tlie  drum  of  the 


A    cubit.    A  bone  of 


Tym'pan-um. 

ear. 
Ul'na.    Latin. 

the  fore-arm. 

Valve.  From  the  Latin  vaha,  a 
small  door.  Any  membrane,  or  dou- 
bling of  any  membrane,  which  pre- 
vents fluid  from  flowing  back  in  <*  ^ 
vessels  and  canals  of  the  animal  body 

Veins.  From  the  Latin  vena.  The 
vessels  that  carry  the  blood  to  the 
heart. 

Ven'tri-cle.  Latin.  A  small  cavity 
of  the  animal  body. 

Vert'e-bra,-jE.  From  the  Latin  »«■ 
to,  I  turn.  A  Joint  of  the  spinal 
column. 

Ves'i-cle.  From  the  Latin  vuicula,  t 
small  vessel,  or  bladder. 

Vi'tal.    From  the  Latin  vita,  life. 

ViT'RE-ous.  PerUining  to  giaxs.  A 
name  given  tr  one  of  the  humnra  of 
tiie  oye 


INDEX. 


Absorption, 76 

Aci  D8,  Antiduted  for, 172 

AlB,  Compoaition  of  the, 96 

»— ,  the  Effects  of,  when  Impure, 99 

— ,  the  Elfecta  of,  upon  the  Bkin,...125 

Air-Ce  LL3, 90 

Ammonia,  Antidotes  for 170 

Aorta, t)5 

Arsenic,  Antidote  for, 171 

Arteries, 63 

,  Nutrient, 87 

,  Pulmonary, S4 

of  the  Skin, 117 

,  Treatment  of  divided, . . .  .72 

ASPVYXIA,  from  Carbonic  Gas, 105 

,  from  Electricity, 105 

,  from  Drowning, 104 

,  from  Hanging, 104 

Attitudes, 25 

AuaiCLEsof  the  Heart, 62 

B. 

Batiiino,  Necessity  of, 125 

,  Method  of, 164 

Belladonna,  Antidote  for, 175 

Bile, 52 

Blood,  Composition  of, 86 

,  Circulation  of, 67 

,  Change  of, 97 

BOPfES,  Structure  of, 11 

,  Physi.ilogy  of, 21 

,  Hygiene  of, 24,  26 

of  the  Head, 11 

of  the  Trunk, 12 

of  the  Upper  Extremities, 16 

of  the  Lower  Extremities, 17 

BiiAiN, 127 

,  Membranes  of, 198 

,  Functions  of, 134 

,  Injuries  of, 137 

H.IO.NflllA 90 

liRONC  HITIS, 90,  Hi 

Burns  and  Scalds,  Treatment  of,.  .126 

f. 

Capillaries, 6fi 

Carbonic  Gas, 95,  1U7 

the  Effect*  ui,  when 

breathed 99 

Cartilage, 19 

Cerebellum, 128 

Cerebrum, 128 

Chest, 13,  101 

wUYLE -....54 

16 


rA4ia, 
Chtmk, »i 

Circulatort  Oroans, C9 

,  Physiology  of, 67 

,  Hygiene  of,  ....70 — 75 

Clothing,  Amount  of, 123 

,  Change  of, !i24 

,  Kind  of, 122 

should  be  loosely  worn, 

24,  70,  123 

CONIUM,  Antidote  for, 174 

Copper,  Antidote  for, 171 

Cuticle,    115,  1I9 

Cutis  Vera,  ...  117 

D. 

Diaphragm, 31 

Digestive  Organs, 48 

,  Physiology  ofj.  .53 

,  Hygiene  of,  5o — 61 

Drinks, 59 

Drowned,  Treatment  of  Persons,. .104 
Duodenum, 50 

E. 

Ear,  Anatomy  of, 152 

,  Pliy siology  of, 155 

,  Hygiene  of, ; 157 

EXHA  LENTS, 82 

Eve,  Anatomy  of, 143 

,  PhyHiology  of, 149 

,  Hygiene  of, 150 

— ^-,  Method  of  removing  Dust  from,  151 

P. 

Fascia, 29 

Fibres, 27 

Follicle, «a 

Food,  ('hanges  of,  during  the  Diges- 
tive Proctjss, 54 

,  Uuaiititv  of, 56 

,  Ciuality'of, 57 

,  Mfmner  of  taking, .SS 

,  Time  for  taking, 60 

Frozen  Limbs,  Treatment  of, IHB 

G. 

Gastric  Juice 54 

GLANiis,  Structure  of, 83 

,  Larhrymal, H7 

,  Ijympliatic, 'lii 

,  Mesenteric, 51 

,  O.I, 118,  ICO 

,  Perspiratory, ]  18,  120 

,  ?  Ji -ary,    48 

Glottis, IM 


182 


INDEX. 


II.  rAOB. 

Health,  Means  of  preBerving, 158 

[ICARiiNG,  Sense  of, 153 

Heart, ti2 

,  Contractions  of  the 07,  fJ9 

Heat,  Animal, 106 

,  Hygiene  of 108,  lo9 

Hemokruaqe,  Means  of  arresting,... 72 

I. 

Intestines, 50 

J. 

iriNTS,  Structure  of, 19 

,  Use  of, 21 

I.. 

LaCTE  ALS, 51 

Larynx 110 

I^e:  AU,  Antidote  K>r, 171 

Lioaments, 20 

l-iuirr,  Influence  of,   37,  12G 

LiviiR, 52 

LUNU3, 89 

Lymphatics, 76 

,  Physiolojjy  of, 78 

,  Hygiene  of, 79 — 81 

,  of  the  Skin, 117 

M. 

Medulla  Oblongata, 129 

Membrane, 21 

Mercury,  Antidote  for, 17.3 

Mineral  Poisons, 170 

Muscles,  Anatomy  of, 27 

,  Physiology  of, 30 

,  Hygiene  of, 3f)— 42 

-,  Compression  of, 38,  113 

N. 

Nervous  System, 127 

,  Physiology  of,  ..131 

,  Hygiene  of.im — 137 

Nerves, 130 

,  Sympathetic, J.30 

. ,  of  the  Skm, 117,  119 

,  Gustatory, 139 

,  Olfactory, 141 

,  Auditory, = 1.54 

,  Optic, 146 

NiTR".,  Treatment  for  an  Over-dose. .  172 
N u RSES,  Directions  for, 1G4 

O. 

O^sopiiAsus, 49 

Omentum, 52 

Opium,  Treatment  for  an  Over-dose,. .  173 

P. 

Pancreas, 52 

Periosteum,  21 

PHARYNX, 'i'i 

fi  I ISON  B  anu  their  Ar.tid  )tes 170 


R.  AOB 

Reading,  the  proper  Postton  tn,....119 

Removal  of  Disease, 15& 

RESPI  RATOKY  ORO  AN.-f, 8S 

,  Physiology  of, 193 

-,  Hygiene  of, 98—10;; 

Retina 44 

Ribs »a 

S. 

Saliva, 53 

Secretory  Organs, 82 

-,  Physiology  of,   83 

■,  Hygiene  of,  84,  W 

Senses, 138 

Skin,  Anatomy  of, 115 

,  Physiology  of, II!) 

,  Hygiene  of, 122,  liti 

Smell,  Sense  of, 141 

Sound, ill,  155 

Spinal  Column 14 

,  Curvature  of, 20 

Cord, 129 

Spleen, 62 

Stramonium,    Treatment    for    an 

Over-dose, 174 

Stomach 49 

Synovia, 21 

Synovial  Membrane, « •  .20 

T. 

Taste,  Sense  of, 139 

Teeth,  Anatomy  of, 43 

,  Physiology  of, 44 

,  Hygiene  of, 45,  4b 

Tendon  > 27 

Thoracic  Duct, 52 

Throat,  extraneous  Bo<lic8  in, 114 

Touch,  Sense  of, 138 

Trachea,  ... 'JO 

U. 

Ulna, ; 16 

V. 

Valves  of  the  Heart, 02 

of  tlie  Aorta, t)3 

of  the  Pulmonary  Artery, (13 

Veins (iC 

of  the  Skin, 117 

Vegetable  Poisons, 173 

Ventilation 100 

Ventricles  of  the  Heart, 62 

Vertebra, 14 

Vision, 143 

Vocal  Organs, lio 

,  Physiology  of, Ill 

,  Hygiene  of,. ..112,  114 

W. 

WATCHTiRS,  Directions  for, 188 

WOUH'  s,  Treatment  of, 7<t 


4 

I 


KEY  TO  ANATOMICAL  OUTLINE  PLATES.        183 


KEY  TO  ANATOMICAL  OUTLINE  PLATES. 


SUGGESTIONS  TO  TEACHERS. 

In  using  these  plates,  we  would  suggest,  that  the  pupil  carefully  exaimne 
the  illustrating  cuts  interspersed  with  the  text,  in  connection  with  the 
fesson  to  be  recited.  The  similarity  between  these  and  the  plates  will 
enable  the  pupil  to  recite,  and  the  teacher  to  conduct  his  recitation,  from 
the  latter. 

Let  a  pupil  show  the  situation  of  an  organ,  or  part,  on  an  anatomical 
outline  plate,  and  also  give  its  structure ;  while  other  members  of  the  class 
note  all  omissions  and  misstatements.  Another  pupil  may  give  the  use  of 
that  organ,  and  if  necessary,  others  may  give  an  extended  explanation. 
The  third  may  explain  the  laws  on  which  the  health  of  the  part  depends, 
while  other  members  of  the  class  supply  what  has  been  omitted.  After 
thus  presenting  the  subject  in  the  form  of  topics,  questions  Tiay  be  pro- 
posed prciuiscuously,  (roir  each  para^'aph,  and  where  examples  occur  in 
the  text,  let  other  analogous  ones  be  given. 

If  the  physiology  and  hygiene  of  a  given  subject  have  not  been  studied, 
confine  the  recitation  to  those  parts  only  on  which  the  pupil  is  prepared. 
When  practicable,  the  three  departments  should  be  united ;  but  this  can 
only  be  done  when  the  chapter  on  the  hygiene  has  been  learned,  while 
the  physiology  can  be  united  with  the  anatomy,  in  all  chapters  upon 
lihy  biology. 

PixA.TE  I. 

A  FRONT  VIEW  OF  THE  SKELETON, 

Bones  of  the  Head.  7,  The  sphenoid  bone.  8,  The  frontal  bone.  10,  The 
parietal  bone.  11,  The  os  unguis.  12,  The  superior  maxillary  bono, 
(tipper  jaw.)  13,  The  nasal  bone.  14,  The  ethmoid  bone.  IS,  The  malar 
bone,  (cheek-bone.)  16,  The  vomer.  17,  The  inferior  maxillary  bone, 
(the  lower  jaw.)    a.  Its  body,    b,  Its  ramus,  or  branch.     18,  The  teeth 

Bonesof  ike  Trunk.  1, 1,  The  spinal  column.  2,  The  sternum.  «i,  3,  The 
ribs.    4,  The  sacrum.    6,  The  innominatum. 

Bovica  of  the  Upper  Extremities.    19,  The  clavicle,  (coUw  bone  )    20,  Tho 


184         KEY  TC  AN/^TOMICAL  OUTLINE  PLATES. 

■capula,  (shonldpr-blnde.)  21,  The  humrrus.  22,  The  iilna.  23,  Th« 
radius.  24,  2.>,  26,  27,  28,  29,  30,  31,  The  bones  of  the  carpus,  (wrist.j 
y2,  32,  32,  The  five  bones  of  the  metacarpus,  (the  pahn  of  tht  hand.' 
33,  33,  33,  The  first  range  of  finger-bones.  34,  34,  The  second  range  of 
finger-bones.     3o,  3.5,  3.),  The  third  range  of  finger-bones. 

Bones  of  the  Lower  Extremities.  3G,  The  feraur,  (thigh-bone.)  37,  Tht 
patella,  (knee-pan.)  38,  The  tibia,  (shin-bone.)  39,  The  fibula.  40,  40, 
40,  The  bones  of  the  tarsus,  (instep.)  41,41,  The  bones  of  the  metatarsus 
(middle  of  the  foot.)    42,  42,  The  bones  of  the  toes. 

Articulations.    (Left  side  of  the  plate.) 

Ligaments  of  Uie  Trunk,  1,  1,  The  common  spinal  ligament.  2,  2,  The 
intervertebral  ligament,  (cartilage  bctvyeen  the  vertebraj.)  9,  10,  11, 12,  Ar- 
ticulations of  the  ribs  with  the  spinal  column.  13,  13,  14,  16,  16,  Liga- 
ments that  connect  the  cartilages  of  the  ribs  with  the  sternum. 

Ligaments  of  the  Upper  Extremities.  25,  The  ligament  that  connects 
the  clavicle  and  sternum.  27,  The  ligament  that  connects  the  upper  rib 
and  clavicle.  28,  29,  30,  Ligaments  that  connect  the  clavicle  and  scapula 
81,  32,  33,  34,  Ligaments  of  the  shoulder-joint.  35,  35,  36,  Ligaments  of 
the  elbow-joint.  37,  38,  39,  40,  Ligaments  of  the  wrist.  41,  42,  43,  44, 
Ligaments  of  the  fingers. 

Ligaments  of  the  Lower  Extremities.  49,  49,  Ligaments  of  the  hip-joint. 
60,  50,  Ligaments  of  the  patella.  61,  52,  63,  64,  55,  Ligaments  of  the 
knee-joint.  66,  A  large  bursa  mucosa.  67,  The  ligament  of  the  tibia  and 
fibula.  58,  58,  The  interosseous  ligament.  69,  69,  Ligaments  of  the  an- 
kle-joint. 60,  61,  62,  Ligaments  of  the  metatarsus.  63,  64,  Ligaments  of 
the  toes. 

A,  The  brachial  artery.  B,  The  brachial  vein.  C,  The  radial  artery. 
D,  The  femoral  artery.  E,  The  femoral  vein.  F,  O,  The  anterior  tibial 
artery. 

PLATE  II. 

A  BACK  VIEW  OF  THE  SKELETON. 

Bone*  of  the  Uead.  5,  The  occipital  bone.  6,  The  parietal  bone.  7,  The 
temporal  bone.  8,  The  frontal  bone.  9,  The  sphenoid  bone.  15,  The 
malar  bone.  16,  The  nasal  bone.  17,  The  superior  maxillary  bone,  (upper 
jaw.)     18,  The  inferior  maxillary  bone,  (lower  jaw.)     19,  The  teeth. 

Bmies  of  the  Tnmk.  1,1,  The  spinal  column.  2,  The  sacrrm.  3,  The 
coccyx.     20,  The  innominatam.     4,  4,  The  ribs. 

B(mes  of  the  Ujyper  Extremities.  21,  Theclavicb,  (Cv.'llar-bone.)  22,  The 
scapula,  (sh"ulder-bladc.)  23,  The  humerus.  24.  The  ulna.  25,  The 
radius.  26,  27,  28,  29,  30,  31,  32.  The  bones  of  the  cs'pi's.  (wrist.) 
33,  33,  33,  The  bones  of  the  metacarpus,  (palm  of  the  h<uid.)  34  3^,  34, 
Tlie  firpt  range  of  finger-bones.  35,  35,  The  secona  range  uf  finj-o'-hoiwa 
30,  36,  36,  The  third  range  of  flnger-tx'uss. 


KEY   TO   ANATOMICAL    OUTLINE   PLATES.  185 

Boties  of  the  Lower  Extremities.  37,  The  fcnmr,  (thigh-bone.)  38,  The 
patella,  (knee-pan.)  39,  The  tibia,  (shin-bone.)  40,  The  fibu'a.  41,  42, 
13,  44,  45,  The  bones  of  the  tarsus,  (instep.)  46,  46,  The  bonca  of  the 
metatarsus,  (middle  of  the  foot.)    47,  47,  Bones  of  the  toes. 

Articulations.    (Left  side  of  the  plate.) 

Ligaments  of  tlie  Trunk.  1,  2,  3,  4,  6,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10,  Ligaments  of  the 
spinal  column.  14,  14,  15,  15,  Ligaments  that  connect  th.  'bs  and  spinal 
column.  11,  11,  21,  22,  23,  24,  25,  26,  Ligaments  that  connect  the  sacrum 
and  innominatum. 

LiffuTtietUs  of  the  Upper  Extremities.  27,  28,  Ligaments  that  connect  the 
clavicle  and  scapula.  29,  The  capsular  ligament  of  the  shoulder-joint. 
80,  30,  Lig'aments  of  the  elbow.  31,  32,  33,  34,  Ligaments  of  the  carpus, 
(wrist.) 

Ligaments  of  the  Lower  Extremities.  9,  Tendon  of  the  gluteus  muscle. 
35,  The  capsular  ligament  of  the  hip-joint.  36,  36,  Ligaments  of  the  knee* 
joint.  37,  The  ligament  that  connects  the  tibia  and  fibula.  38,  The  in. 
terosseous  ligament.    39,  40,  Ligaments  of  the  ankle-joint. 


PLATE  m. 

A  FRONT  VIEW  OF  THE  MUSCLES. 

Mitscles  of  the  Head  and  Neck.  7,  The  sterno-mastoideus  muscle. 
8,  The  stemo-hyoideus  muscle.  9,  The  omo-hyoideus  muscle.  10,  The 
trapezius  muscle.  11,  The  orbicularis  oculi  muscle.  12,  The  frontal 
muscle.  14,  The  orbiculans  oris  muscle.  15,  The  elevator  muscle  of  the 
nostrils.  16,  The  zygomatic  muscle.  17,  The  depressor  of  the  lower  lip. 
18,  The  depressor  anguli  oris  muscle.  19,  The  triangular  muscle  of  the 
nose.     20,  21,  The  aural  muscles.     22,  The  masseter  muscle. 

Muscles  of  the  Tnmk.     2,  3,  The  external  oblique  muscles 

Micscles  of  the  Upper  Extremities.  1,  The  grand  pectoral  muscle. 
3,  4,  The  serratus  muscle.  23,  The  deltoid  muscle.  24,  The  biceps 
brachialis  muscle.  2.5,  The  coraco-brachialis  muscle.  26,  The  anterior 
brachial  muscle.  27,  The  triceps  brachialis  muscle.  28,  The  long  su- 
pinator muscle.  29,  The  external  radial  muscle.  30,  The  pronator  teres 
muscle.  31,  The  anterior  radial  muscle.  32,  The  palmaris  brevis  muscle 
33,  The  anterior  ulnar  muscle.  35,  The  palmar  muscle  36,  The  abductor 
muscle  of  tlie  thumb.  37,  The  adductor  muscle  of  the  thumb.  38,  39, 
Small  flexor  muscles  of  the  thumb.  40,  The  abductor  muscle  of  the  little 
finger.  41,  41,  The  lumbricalcs  muscles.  61,61,  The  bifurcation  of  the 
tendons  of  the  superficial  flexor  muscle,  in  the  fingers. 

Muscles  of  the  Loioer  Extremtties.  42,  The  fascia  lata  muscle.  43,  The 
sartorius  muscle.  44,  The  rectus  fcmoris  muscle.  45,  The  vastus  sxtemus 
muscle.  46,  The  vastus  intcrnus  muscle.  47,  The  internal  straight  muscle. 
48,  The  pectineus  muscle.     49,  The  adductor  muscle.     50,  Ihe  psoai* 

J6» 


1H6  KEY   TO   ANATOMICAL    OUTLlNli    PLATES. 

muscle.  61,  The  tibialis  anticus  muscle.  52,  Tho  long  extensor  muscle 
of  the  great  toe.  63,  The  long  extensor  muscle  of  the  toes.  64,  Th« 
anterior  peroneal  muscle.  65,  The  long  lateral  peroneal  muscle.  66, 57,  The 
gastrocncnui  muscles.  58,  The  long  flexor  muscle  of  the  great  to& 
59,  The  short  extensor  muscles  of  the  toes.  60,  The  abduc  tor  muscle  of 
the  great  toe. 

The  figures  and  letters  on  the  left  side  of  the  plate,  indicate  the  position 
of  important  fasciffi,  that  cover  the  muscles  and  enclose  the  tcndoni. 


PLAl'E  IV. 

A  BACK  VIEW  OF  THE  MUSCLES. 

Muschs  of  the  Head  and  Neck.  4,  The  sterno-mastoideus  muscle. 
5,  The  complexus  muscle.  6,  The  mylo-hyoideus  muscle.  7,  8,  The  oo- 
cjpito-frontalis  muscle.  9,  The  massetcr  muscle.  10,11,12,  The  anterior, 
middle,  and  posterior  aural  muscles.     13,  The  temporal  muscle. 

Muscles  of  the  Trunk.  1,1,  The  trapezius  muscle.  2,  The  latissimus  dorsl 
muscle.     3,  The  rhomboideus  muscle.    4,  The  external  oblique  muscle. 

Muscles  of  t/ie  Upper  Extremities.  5,  The  deltoid  nmscle.  6,  7,  The 
infra-spinatus  muscle.  9,  The  triceps  extensor  muscle.  10,  The  internal 
brachial  muscle.  11,  The  long  supinator  muscle.  12,  The  external  radi- 
al muscle.  13,  The  second  external  radial  muscle.  14,  The  anconeus 
muscle.  15,  16,  The  extensor  digitorum  communis  muscle.  17,  The  ex- 
tensor carpi  ulnaris  muscle.  18,  The  flexor  carpi  ulnaris.  19,  20,  The 
pxtensor  ossis  mctacarpi  poUicis  muscles.  21,  An  extensor  muscle  of  the 
thumb.     22,  'ii,  Interossii  muscles. 

Mtunles  of  the  Lower  Extremities.  29,  The  gluteus  maximus  muscle. 
30,  The  gluteus  mcdius  muscle.  31,  The  biceps  flexor  cruris  muscle 
82,  The  semi-tendinosus  muscle.  33,  The  semi-raembranosis  muscle. 
'W,  The  gracilis  muscle.  35,  The  adductor  muscle.  36,  The  vastus  ex- 
ternus  muscle.  37,  The  sartorius  muscle.  38,  39,  The  gastrocnemii 
muscles.  40,  The  long  peroneal  muscle.  41,  The  external  peroneal  mus- 
cle. 42,  Tho  long  flexor  muscle  of  the  great  toe.  43,  The  long  extensor 
muscle  of  the  toes.  44,  The  short  extensor  muscle  of  the  toes.  47,  The 
short  flexor  muscle  of  the  toes. 

The  figures  and  letters  on  the  left  side  of  the  plate,  indicate  the  position 
of  membranous  fasciae  which  envelop  the  muscles  and  tendons. 

PLATE  V. 

ORGANS  OF  THE  THORAX  AND  ABDOMEN 

Fig.  1.  The  Mouth  and  Neck.  (A  Side  view.)  1,  The  upper  lip.  2,  Tho 
lower  lip.  3,  The  i-pper  jaw.  4,  The  lower  jaw.  5,  The  tongue.  6,  The 
hard  palate,   (roof  of  the  mDuth.)    7.  The  parotid  gland.    8,  The  sub- 


KEY   TO    ANATOMICAL   OUTLINE    I'LATES.  Ifi'I 

lingual  gland.     T,  The  larynx.     10,  Thn  pharynx.     11,  The  ocBophagua 

12,  The  Jipper  portion  of  the  spinal  column.     C,  The  spinal  cord. 

The  (Sliest  and  its  Oryans.  9,  9,  The  trachea.  R,  The  right  auncle 
of  the  heart.  L,  The  left  auricle.  13,  The  left  ventricle  of  the  neart. 
14,  The  right  ventricle,  lo.  The  aorta.  16,  The  pulmonary  artery. 
17,  The  vena  cava  desccndens.  18,  The  right  subclavian  vein.  19,  The 
left  subcHvian  vein.  20,  The  right  jugular  vein.  21,  The  left  jugular 
vein.  22,  The  right  carotid  artery.  23,  The  left  carotid  artery.  24,  25, 
26,  The  upper,  middle,  and  lo^-er  lobes  of  the  right  lung.  21,  28,  The 
upper  and  lower  lobes  of  the  left  lung.  29,  29,  29,  The  diaphragm. 
P,  V,  P,  P,  The  pleura,  that  lines  the  cavity  of  the  chest  S,  8,  The  clavi- 
cles. O,  O,  0,  O,  The  riba.  M,  M,  M,  M,  Muscles  of  the  chest.  40,  The 
thoracic  duct,  opening  into  the  left  subclavian  vein. 

I'he  Abdomen  and  its  Organs.  30,  The  stomach.  31,  32,  The  right  and 
left  lobe  of  the  liver.  F,  The  fissure  that  separates  the  two  lobes.  33,  The 
gall  bladder,  34,  34,  The  duodenum.  3-5,  The  ascending  colon.  36,  The 
transverse  colon.  37,  The  descending  colon.  38,  38,  38,  38,  The  small 
intestine.  39,  39,  The  walls  of  the  abdominal  cavity  turned  down.  41, 
The  spleen. 

Fig.  2.  The  Relation  of  the  Lacteals  and  Thoracic  Duct.  1,  1,  A  section 
of  the  small  intestine.  2,  2,  2,  2,  2,  2,  2,  2,  Mesenteric  glands,  through 
whicn  the  lacteals  from  the  intestine  pass.  3,  Several  lacteal  vesseU 
entering  the  enlarged  portion  and  commencement  of  the  thoracic  duct. 
6,  5,  5,  The  thoracic  duct.  6,  The  thoracic  duct  opening  into  the  left  sub-  / 
clavian  vein.  7,  (See  40,  Fig.  1.)  8,  The  right  subclavian  vein.  9,  The 
vena  cava  dcscendens.     10,  11,  11,  The  aorta.      12,  The  carotid  arteries. 

13,  13,  The  jugular  veins.     14,  The  vena  azagos.     15,  15,  The  spinal  col- 
umn.    16,  The  diaphragm. 

Fig.  3.     The  Relation  of  the  Larynx,  Trachea,  Bronchia,  and  Air-celU 
1,  1,  1,   An  outline  of  the  right  lung.    2,  2,2,  An  outline  of  the  left  lung. 
3,  The  larynx.    4,  The  trachea.    5,  The  right  bronchia.     6,  The  left  bron 
chia.     7,  7,  7,  7,  Divisions  of  the  right  bronchia.    8,  8,  8, 8,  Divisions  of  the 
left  bronchia.    9,  9,  9,  9,  9,  9,  Air-cells. 

Fig.  4.  An  idial  View  of  a  lateral  and  vertical  Section  of  the  Larynx. 
1,  1,  The  superior  vocal  cords,  (ligaments.)  2,  2,  The  inferior  vocal  cords. 
3,  3,  The  glottis.    4,  4,  The  ventricles  of  the  larynx 


PLATE  VI. 

HEART,  ARTERIES,  AND  VEINS. 

Fig.  1.  The  Heart  and  large  Arteries.  1,  The  right  auricle  of  the  heart 
2,  The  right  ventricle  of  the  heart.  3,  The  left  auricle.  4,  Tfic  left  ven- 
tricle. 6,  The  pulmonar/  artery.  6,  The  aorta.  7,  7,  The  descending 
aorta.  8,  Ttie  arteria  innominata,  9,  The  left  carotid  artery.  10.  The  left 
subclavian  artery.    66,  The  right  subclavian  artery. 


/ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


// 


«// 


^4^ 


1.0 


I.I 


1.25 


Hi  1 2.8 

■  50     "^" 


Z2 

lig    III  2.0 


1.4 


1.8 


1.6 


j^ 


<^ 


<# 


'" 


/i 


^a 


'^ 


r 


'c*l 


'/ 


s>.. 


s 


Photographic 

Sciences 
Cor^  oration 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

1716)  872-4503 


L 


188  KEY    TO    ANATOMICAL   OUTLINE   PLATES. 

Arteries  of  the  Ntck  and  Head.  15,  The  right  carotid  artery.  18,  The 
left  carotid  artery.  17,  The  right  temporal  artery.  60,  The  right  facial 
artery.    64,  The  left  temporal  artery. 

Arteries  of  ,e  Ujjper  Extremities.  11,  11,  The  left  brachial  artery, 
12,  The  left  radial  artery.  13,  13,  The  right  brachial  artery.  14,  The 
right  radial  artery.    61,  The  right  ulnar  artery. 

Arteries  of  the  Lower  Extremities.  18,  The  left  iliac  artery.  19,  The  right 
iliac  artery.  20,  The  left  femoral  artery.  21,  The  right  femoral  artery. 
22,  The  peroneal  artery.  23,  The  left  anterior  tibial  artery.  24,  The  mus- 
cular artery.  2-5,  25,  The  right  and  left  arteria  profunda.  26,  The  right 
anterior  tibial  artery.    27,  The  right  peroneal  artery. 

T/ie  Veins  of  t/ie  Neck  atid  Head.  28,  The  vena  cava  descendens. 
29,  The  left  subclavian  vein.  30,  The  right  subclavian  vein.  31,  The 
right  jugular  vein.  32,  The  left  jugular  vein.  63,  The  right  temporal 
Tein.    65,  The  left  temporal  vein.    49,  The  right  facial  vein. 

Veins  of  the  Upper  Extremities.  33,  The  left  brachial  vein.  34,  The  left 
radial  vein.  35,  The  right  brachial  vein.  36,  The  right  radial  vein. 
61,  The  right  ulnar  vein. 

Veins  of  the  Lywer  Extremities.  27,  The  vena  cava  ascendens.  38,  The 
left  iliac  vein.  !9,  The  right  iliac  vein.  40,  The  left  femoral  vein.  41,  The 
right  femoral  vein.  42,  The  left  anterior  tibial  vein.  43,  The  left  per- 
oneal vein.  44;  The  right  anterior  tibial  vein.  45,  The  right  peroneal 
vein.  46,  46,  The  profunda  veins.  47,  The  muscular  veins.  48,  48,  48, 
48,  48,  48,  Intercostal  arteries  and  veins. 

Fig.  2.  The  Relation  of  the  Cavities  of  the  Heart  to  the  large  Blood-vessels 
1,  The  vena  cava  descendens.  2,  The  vena  cava  ascendcns.  3,  The  right 
auricle  of  the  heart.  4,  The  opening  between  the  right  auricle  and  right 
ventricle.  5,  The  right  ventricle.  6,  The  tricuspid  valves.  7,  The  pul- 
monary artery.  8,  8,  The  branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery  that  pass  to 
the  right  and  left  lung.  9,  The  semilunar  valves  of  the  pulmonary  artery. 
10,  The  left  pulmonary  veins.  11,  The  right  pulmonary  veins.  12,  The 
left  auricle.  13,  The  opening  between  the  left  auricle  and  left  ventricle. 
14,  The  left  ventricle.  15,  The  mitral  valves.  16,  16,  The  aorta.  17,  The 
semilunar  valves  of  the  aorta.  18,  The  septum  between  the  right  and  left 
ventricle. 

Fig.  3.  An  ideal  View  of  the  Heart,  Atieries,  and  Veins.  A,  The  right 
auricle.  B,  The  right  ventricle.  C,  The  tricuspid  vaives.  D,  The  open- 
ing between  the  right  auricle  and  right  ventricle.  E,  The  left  auricle. 
F,  The  left  ventricle.  G,  The  mitral  valves.  H,  The  opening  between 
the  left  auricle  and  left  ventricle.  I,  T'le  septum  between  the  right  and 
left  ventricle.  K,  The  pulmonary  artery.  L,  The  set  Jlunar  valves  of  the 
pulmonary  artery.  M,  M,  The  right  'pulmonary  artery.  N,  N,  The  left 
pulmonary  artery.  O,  O,  0,  0,  O,  O.  The  capillary  vessels  of  the  lungs. 
P,  P,  P,  The  right  pulmonary  vein.  Q,  Q,  The  left  pulmonavy  vein 
R,  R,  The  aorta.  S,  The  semilunar  valves  of  the  aorta.  T,  T,  A  branch 
of  the  aorta  to  the  upper  extremities.  U,  U,  U,  U,  A  branch  to  the  lower 
ex-trtmities.     V,  V,  V,  V,  V,  V,    The  oapillary  vessels  at  the  extremity 


JfJi^    TO    ANATOMICAi.    OUTLINE    PLATES.  189 

of  the  branches  of  the  aorta.  W,  W,  The  descending  vena  caya., 
X,  X,  X,  The  ascending  vena  cava. 

In  Figf).  1,  2,  3,  the  course  of  the  blood  through  the  circulatory  veMelg 
is  indicated  by  arrows. 

PLATE  Vn. 

THE  PULMONARY  CIRCUi^ATION. 

Fig.  1.  1,  The  right  auricle  oi  heart.  2,  The  left  auricle.  8,  Tl.e 
right  ventricle  of  the  heart.  4,  The  left  ventricle.  5,  The  pulmonary 
artery.  6,  The  branch  of  the  pulmonary  artery  to  the  left  lung.  7,  The 
branch  of  the  pulmonary  skftery  to  the  right  lung.  8,  8,  8,  8, 8,  8,  8,  8, 8,  8, 
Branches  of  the  pulmonary  artery  in  the  right  and  left  lung.  9, 9, 9,  9,  9^  9, 
Air-cells.  JO,  10,  10,  10,  10,  10,  10,  Small  pulmo:iary  veins  in  the  right 
and  left  lung.  11,  The  left  pulmonary  vein.  12,  12,  The  right  pulmonary 
vein. 

Fig.  2.  An  ideal  View  of  the  Pulmonary  Circulation.  1,1,  The  right 
lung.  2, 2,  The  left  lung.  3,  The  trachea.  4, 4,  J,  4, 4,  The  right  bronchia. 
5,  6,  6, 6,  6,  The  left  ironchia.  6,  6,  6,  6,  6,  6,  Air-cells,  with  arteries  and 
veins  passing  around  them.  7,  The  right  auricle  of  the  heart.  8,  The 
right  ventricle  of  the  hearL  9,  The  tricuspid  valves.  10,  The  pulmonary 
artery.  11,  11,  11,  11,  The  right  pulmonary  artery.  12,  12,  12,  12, 12,  The 
left    puln.onary    artery.  13,  13,   13,  13,    The  right  pulmonary  vein. 

14, 14,  14,  14,  The  left  pulmonary  vein.  16,  The  left  auricle.  16,  The 
left  ventricle.  17,  The  mitral  valves.  18,  The  septum  between  the  right 
and  left  ventricles. 

Fig.  3.  An  ideal  View  of  the  Cipillaries.  1,  1,  A  branch  of  the  pul- 
monary artery.  2,  2,  A  branch  of  the  pulmonary  vein.  3,  3,  Capillar? 
vessels  between  the  artery  and  vein. 

Fig.  4.  An  ideal  View  of  the  Relation  of  ttte  Bronchia,  Air-ceUt,  Put- 
hwnary  Arteries,  and  Vein*.  1,  A  brou'^hial  tube.  2,  2,  2,  Air-cella. 
3  A  branch  of  the  pulmonary  artery.    4,  A  branch  of  the  pulmonary  vein. 


PLATE  Vin. 

TUE  CEREBRUM,  CEREBELLUM,  SPINAL  CORD,  AND 

NERVES. 

1,  The  cerebrum.  2  The  cerebellum.  3,  3,  The  spinal  cord.  4,  The 
orachial  plexus  of  nerves,  5,  The  lumbar  plexus  of  nerves.  6,  The  sa- 
cral plexus  of  nerves.  7,  The  facial  nerve.  8,  17,  The  radial  nerve. 
9,  9,  16,  The  ulnar  nsrve.  10,  The  median  nerve.  Q,  The  circumjBev 
nerve  of  the  shoulder. 

U,  11,  The  great  sciatic  nerve.    12,  The  external  poplitea.^,  or  peroneal 


190        KEY  TO  ANATOMICAL  OUTLINE  PLATES. 

nerve.  13,  13,  The  poster'or  tibial  nerve.  14,  The  external  tibial  nerve. 
16,  The  muscular  branch  jf  the  external  peroneal  nerve.  18,  The  muBOO* 
lar  branch  of  the  sciatic  nerve.    P,  Q,  The  posterior  tibial  nerve. 

The  letters  and  other  figures  indicate  minor  nervous  filaments  dis- 
tributed to  the  various  muscles  and  the  skin. 


PLATE  IX. 

THE  SKIN. 

Fig.  1.  A  perspiratory  Tribe  and  Gland.  1,  1,  The  contorted  portion  of 
the  tube  that  forms  the  gland.  2,  2,  Two  branches  which  unite  to  form 
the  main  duct  of  the  gland.  3,  %  The  perspiratory  tube.  4,  The  cuticle. 
6,  Its  colored  porHon.  6,  The  cutis  vera,  (true  skin.)  7,  7,  Fat  vesicles, 
m  which  the  gland  is  imbedded. 

Fig.  2.  A  Papilla  of  the  Skin.  1,  1,  Two  papillae,  formed  of  an  artery, 
vein,  and  nerve.  2,  2, 2, 2,  Nerves  forming  a  loop  in  the  papillae.  3,  3,  Ar- 
teries of  the  papillBC.  4,  4,  Veins  of  the  papillae.  6,  6,  A  net-work  of 
arteries,  veins,  and  nerves.  6,  6,  Nerves  of  the  skin.  8,  8,  Arteries  of 
the  skin.     7,7,   Veins  of  the  skin. 

-Fig.  3.  A  Hair,  and  its  Oil-Glands.  1,  1,  The  hair.  2,  2,  The  sheath 
of  the  hair.  3,  Oil-glands  that  surround  the  bulb  of  the  hair,  the  ducts  of 
which  open  into  the  sheath  of  the  hair,  (2,  2.) 

Fig.  4.  A  Section  of  the  Skin.  1,  1,  The  cuticle.  2,  2,  Its  colored  por- 
tion. 3,  3,  The  papillary  layer.  4,  4,  A  net-work  of  arteries,  veins,  and 
nerves,  upon  the  upper  surface  of  the  cutis  vera.  6,  6,  6,  5,  The  cutis 
vera,  (true  skin.)  6,  6, 6,  Hairs  that  originate  in  the  cutis  vera.  7, 7, 7,  Oil- 
glands,  the  ducts  of  which  connect  with  the  sheath  of  the  hair.  8,  8,  8  8, 
8,  8,  8, 8,  Perspiratory  glands  and  their  ducts.  9,  9;  9,  9,  9,  Nerves  of  the 
skin.  10,  10,  10,  10,  10,  Arteries  of  the  skin.  11,  11,  11,  11,  11,  Veins  of 
the  skin.    12,  12,  12,  12,  Papillae,  or  ridges  of  the  skin. 


PLATE  X. 

AN  ANTERO-POSTERIOR  SECTION  OF  THE  EYE. 

Fig.  1.  1,  1,  The  sclerotic  coat.  2,  2,  The  cornea.  3,  3,  The  choroid 
coat.  4,4,  The  retina.  6,6,  The  iris.  6,6,  The  posterior  cha  'ler  of 
the  eye  that  contains  the  aqueous  humor.  7,  7,  The  anterior  c.  nber. 
8,  8,  The  pupil.  9,  The  crystalline  humor.  10,  10,  The  vitreous  humor. 
11,  The  optic  nerve.  12,  A  representation  of  a  pen.  13,  An  ir. verted 
image  of  the  pen  (12)  on  the  retina.  14,  14,  A  canal  surrounding  th* 
crystalline  humor.    16,  1>';,  The  bevelled  junction  of  the  cornea  and  scla 


KEY   TO   ANATOMICAL    OtTfLINE    PLATES. 


191 


rotic  coats.    A.  a  perpendicular  ray  of  light  from  the  pen.    B,  B.  obliqua 

ternal  ear.    A  Ihe  meatus  auditouus  externus,  (the  tube  that  con«ecti 
8,  8    The  tympanum,   (middle  ear.)     4,  The  malleus.      5,    The  incus 
Lib^wT^   ''  i""'^'^^"'  («tirrup-bone.)  that  conn'ects^ith  the 

u  -TK  ^.  '  '  ^^^  semicircular  canals.  13,  13,  The  cochlea 
4,  The  auditory  nerve.  15.  The  division  of  the  auditory  nerve  to  the 
semicircular  canals.  16.  The  division  to  the  cochlea.^  l"  I7  The 
Bus  ach.aa  tube  18,  The  chorda  tymr-ani  nerve.  19,  The  seventL  pa' 
ac.l)  nerve.  20  The  styloid  process  of  the  te.p'oral  Cl  fl,'^, 
21,  21,  21,  The  pntrous  or  hard  portion  of  the  ten.poral  bone,  in  ^hki 
the  parts  of  the  middle  and  internal  ear  are  situated.  .'"»'"»''»««» 


